Hyundai 2016 i800 Car User Manual

OWNER'S MANUAL

Operation

Maintenance

Specifications

The information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication.

However, the right to amend specifications without notice or obligation to

incorporate such amendments into vehicles already produced is reserved.

This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descriptions

and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result,

some of the equipment operating descriptions referred to may not apply to

the particular vehicle with which this manual is supplied.

Please refer to the nearest Hyundai authorised repairer for information

regarding current standard and optional equipment levels.

Modification to the original vehicle specification may invalidate the manufacturers warranty and may

adversely affect the safety and durability of the vehicle.

Components which are subject to modification or are added to the original vehicle specification with-

out the express approval of the manufacturer and result in consequential loss or damage are not cov-

ered by the vehicle manufacturers warranty.

This vehicle is fitted with electronically controlled fuel injection or other micro processor controlled

equipment.

It is possible for incorrectly installed two way radio equipment including mobile telephones to adverse-

ly affect these systems.

Before radio equipment of this kind is installed, please contact your Hyundai authorised repairer for

recommendation regarding the suitability of the particular radio equipment concerned and the rec-

ommended method of installation and equipment location. Incorrectly installed or unsuitable equip-

ment which gives rise to incorrect functioning of or damage to electronic vehicle components will not

fall within the scope of the vehicle manufacturers warranty.

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO ORIGINAL VEHICLE SPECIFICATION

TWO WAY RADIO INSTALLATION

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.

These titles indicate the following:

✽

NOTICE

This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

WARNING

This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other

persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTION

This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the

caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

FOREWORD

Hyundai Motor Company wish to take this opportunity to thank you for purchasing a Hyundai product and to welcome you to the

ever increasing number of discriminating motorists who drive Hyundai vehicles. The advanced engineering and construction meth-

ods employed during both design and production of the Hyundai marque are something of which we are proud, and this commit-

ment to providing a high quality product is supported by a comprehensive after sales and warranty service of which we are equal-

ly proud.

This owner's manual will introduce the operating and maintenance requirements for the vehicle and it is recommended that it is

carefully read to ensure that the maximum performance and durability along with safe and satisfactory operation are obtained.

We recommend that service and maintenance on your vehicle be performed by a Hyundai authorised repairer.

Should any question or query exist regarding any aspect of your Hyundai please contact the nearest Hyundai authorised repairer

who will be only too pleased to assist wherever possible.

Note : This owners manual should be considered as part of the vehicle and should be kept in the vehicle at all times for ease of

reference.

In the event of the vehicle being sold please ensure that this manual is left in the vehicle for the reference of the new owner.

system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company.

CAUTION

Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet

Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page

9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.

Introduction

Your vehicle at a glance

Safety features of your vehicle

Features of your vehicle

Driving your vehicle

What to do in an emergency

Maintenance

Consumer information

Specifications

Index

table of contents

How to use this manual / 1-2

Fuel requirements / 1-3

Vehicle handling instructions / 1-6

Vehicle run-in process / 1-6

Introduction

This Owners Manual is designed to help

vehicle users derive the greatest possi-

ble amount of enjoyment and satisfaction

from driving the HYUNDAI H-1/i800. It is

strongly recommended that the entire

manual is read in order that all of the fea-

tures, safety systems and maintenance

requirements are understood.

To minimise the RISK of death or injury,

the "WARNING" and "CAUTION" state-

ments must be read and understood

before operating the vehicle.

Illustrations are used throughout the

manual to complement written descrip-

tions intended to best explain how to

enjoy using the vehicle.

Reading this manual will assist the vehi-

cle user to learn about and understand

the features, important safety informa-

tion, and driving recommendations.

The general layout of the manual is pro-

vided in the Table of Contents. The index

has an alphabetical listing of all the infor-

mation contained in the manual. The

manual has nine sections plus an index.

Each section begins with a brief list of

contents to easily identify at a glance if

that section contains the information

being sought.

"WARNING", "CAUTION", and "NOTICE"

information is provided to enhance the

personal safety of the vehicle user. This

information must be carefully read and

followed.

✽

NOTICE

A NOTICE indicates interesting or help-

ful information is being provided.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation in

which harm, serious bodily injury or

death could result if the warning is

ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation in

which damage to your vehicle could

result if the caution is ignored.

Introduction

Petrol engine

Unleaded

Your new HYUNDAI vehicle is designed

to use only unleaded fuel having an

Octane Rating of RON (Research

Octane Number) 91 / AKI (Anti-Knock

Index) 87 or higher. (Do not use

methanol blended fuels.)

Your new vehicle is designed to obtain

maximum performance with UNLEADED

FUEL, as well as minimise exhaust emis-

sions and spark plug fouling.

Petrol containing alcohol and

methanol

Gasohol, a mixture of petrol and ethanol

(also known as grain alcohol), and petrol

or gasohol containing methanol (also

known as wood alcohol) are being mar-

keted along with or instead of leaded or

unleaded petrol.

Do not use gasohol containing more than

10% ethanol, and do not use petrol or

gasohol containing any methanol. Either

of these fuels may cause drivability prob-

lems and damage to the fuel system,

engine control system and emission con-

trol system.

Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if

drivability problems occur.

Vehicle damage or driveability problems

may not be covered by the manufactur-

er’s warranty if they result from the use

of:

1. Gasohol containing more than 10%

ethanol.

2. Petrol or gasohol containing methanol.

3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

CAUTION

NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The

use of leaded fuel is detrimental to

the catalytic converter and will

damage the engine control sys-

tem’s oxygen sensor and affect

emission control.

Never add any fuel system cleaning

agents to the fuel tank other than

what has been specified. (We rec-

ommend that the system be con-

sulted by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.)

WARNING

• Do not "top off" after the nozzle

automatically shuts off when

refuelling.

• Always check that the fuel cap is

installed securely to prevent fuel

spillage in the event of an acci-

dent.

CAUTION

Never use gasohol which contains

methanol. Discontinue use of any

gasohol product which impairs dri-

vability.

Introduction

Other fuels

Using fuels such as;

- Silicone (Si) contained fuel,

- MMT (Manganese, Mn) contained fuel,

- Ferrocene (Fe) contained fuel, and

- Other metallic additives contained fuels,

may cause vehicle and engine damage

or cause plugging, misfiring, poor accel-

eration, engine stalling, catalyst melting,

abnormal corrosion, life cycle reduction,

etc.

Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp

(MIL) may illuminate.

✽

NOTICE

Damage to the fuel system or perform-

ance problem caused by the use of these

fuels may not be covered by your New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Use of MTBE

HYUNDAI recommends that fuels con-

taining MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl

Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content

2.7% weight) should not be used in your

vehicle.

Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.

(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may

reduce vehicle performance and produce

vapour lock or hard starting.

Do not use methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alco-

hol) should not be used. This type of fuel

can reduce vehicle performance and

damage components of the fuel system.

Fuel Additives

HYUNDAI recommends that you use

unleaded petrol which has an Octane

Rating of RON (Research Octane

Number) 91 / AKI (Anti-Knock Index) 87

or higher.

For customers who do not use good

quality petrols including fuel additives

regularly, and have problems starting or

the engine does not run smoothly, one

bottle of additives added to the fuel tank

at every 10,000 miles (15,000 km).

Additives are available from your

HYUNDAI authorised repairer along with

information on how to use them. Do not

mix other additives.

CAUTION

The New Vehicle Warranty does not

cover damage to the fuel system or

any performance problems caused

by the use of fuels containing

methanol or fuels containing MTBE

(Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over

15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7%

weight).

Introduction

Operation in foreign countries

Drivers of vehicles which are to be oper-

ated in foreign countries must satisfy

themselves that:

• The vehicle meets all local regulations

with respect to insurance, specifica-

tions etc..

• The correct types and grades of fuel

are available for satisfactory operation

of the vehicle.

Diesel engine

Diesel fuel

Diesel engines must be operated only on

commercially available diesel fuel that

complies with EN 590 or comparable

standard. (EN stands for "European

Norm"). Do not use marine diesel fuel,

heating oils, or non-approved fuel addi-

tives, these will increase wear and cause

damage to the engine and fuel system.

The use of non-approved fuels and/or

fuel additives will invalidate the New

Vehicle Warranty.

Diesel fuel of above cetane 51 must be

used in HYUNDAI diesel engined vehi-

cles. If two types of diesel fuel are avail-

able, use summer or winter fuel properly

according to the following temperature

conditions.

• Above -5°C (23°F) ... Summer type

diesel fuel.

• Below -5°C (23°F) ... Winter type diesel

fuel.

Watch the fuel gauge very carefully : If

the engine stops due to fuel failure, the

circuits must be completely purged to

permit restarting.

CAUTION

Do not allow petrol or water to enter

the fuel tank. If this happens, the

tank should be completely drained

and the fuel lines must all be

cleaned out to prevent the fuel

pump from becoming contaminat-

ed.

CAUTION - Diesel Fuel

(if equipped with DPF)

It is recommended to use the regu-

lated automotive diesel fuel for

diesel vehicle equipped with the

DPF system.

If you use diesel fuel including high

sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur)

and unspecified additives, it can

cause the DPF system to be dam-

aged and white smoke can be emit-

ted.

Introduction

Biodiesel

Commercially supplied Diesel blends of

no more than 7% biodiesel, commonly

known as "B7 Diesel" may be used in

your vehicle if Biodiesel meets EN 14214

or equivalent specifications. (EN stands

for "European Norm"). The use of biofu-

els exceeding 7% made from rapeseed

methyl ester (RME), fatty acid methyl

ester (FAME), vegetable oil methyl ester

(VME) etc. or mixing diesel exceeding

7% with biodiesel will cause increased

wear or damage to the engine and fuel

system. Repair or replacement of worn or

damaged components due to the use of

non approved fuels will not be covered by

the manufactures warranty.

As with other vehicles of this type, failure

to operate this vehicle correctly may

result in loss of control, an accident or

vehicle rollover.

Specific design characteristics (higher

ground clearance, track, etc.) give this

vehicle a higher centre of gravity than

other types of vehicles. In other words

they are not designed for cornering at the

same speeds as conventional 2-wheel

drive vehicles. Avoid sharp turns or

abrupt manoeuvres. Again, failure to

operate this vehicle correctly may result

in loss of control, an accident or vehicle

rollover. Be sure to read the “Reducing

the risk of a rollover” driving guide-

lines, in section 5 of this manual.

No special run-in period is needed. By

following a few simple precautions for the

first 600 miles (1,000 km) you may add to

the performance, economy and life of

your vehicle.

• Do not race the engine.

• Whilst driving, keep your engine speed

(rpm, or revolutions per minute)

between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.

• Do not maintain a single speed for long

periods of time, either fast or slow.

Varying engine speed is needed to

properly run-in the engine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emergen-

cies, to allow the brakes to seat prop-

erly.

• Don't tow a trailer/caravan during the

first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of opera-

tion.

VEHICLE RUN-IN PROCESSVEHICLE HANDLING

INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION

• Never use any fuel, whether

diesel, B7 biodiesel or otherwise,

that fails to meet the latest petro-

leum industry specification.

• Never use any fuel additives or

treatments that are not recom-

mended or approved by the vehi-

cle manufacturer.

Interior overview / 2-2

Instrument panel overview / 2-3

Engine compartment / 2-4

Your vehicle at a glance

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

1. Door lock/unlock button* ...................4-10

2. Outside rearview mirror control

switch*...............................................4-36

3. Central door lock switch* ..................4-11

4. Power window switches*...................4-18

5. Air vent..............................................4-78

6. Front fog light switch*........................4-67

7. Rear fog light switch* .......................4-67

8. Head lamp levelling device*..............4-68

9. Instrument panel illumination control

knob*.................................................4-40

10. Steering wheel tilt control* ..............4-33

11. Steering wheel ................................4-32

12. Fuse box .........................................7-43

13. Bonnet release lever .......................4-22

14. Brake pedal.....................................5-21

15. Accelerator pedal..............................5-7

16. Seat...................................................3-2

17. Fuel filler lid release button.............4-24

* : if equipped

OTQ027001R

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

Your vehicle at a glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

1. Instrument cluster.............................4-39

2. Light control / Turn signals ...............4-64

3. Horn .................................................4-34

4. Wiper/Washer...................................4-69

5. Steering wheel audio controls* ......4-114

6. Driver’s front air bag* .......................3-45

7. Ignition switch.....................................5-5

8. Audio*.............................................4-113

9. Hazard warning flasher

switch ........................................4-63, 6-2

10. Climate control system* ........4-75, 4-88

11. Parking brake .................................5-20

12. Shift lever ..............................5-13, 5-10

13. AUX, USB* ...................................4-115

14. Passenger’s front air bag*..............3-45

15. Glove box .....................................4-104

* : if equipped

OTQ025002R

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

Your vehicle at a glance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1. Power steering fluid reservoir ...........7-19

2. Automatic transmission fluid

dipstick*.............................................7-20

3. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-13

4. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-18

5. Fuse box ...........................................7-45

6. Negative battery terminal..................7-30

7. Positive battery terminal ...................7-30

8. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-15

9. Engine oil dipstick.............................7-13

10. Radiator cap ...................................7-16

11. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir..7-22

12. Air cleaner.......................................7-24

* : if equipped

OTQ027003R

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Seats / 3-2

Seat belts / 3-16

Child restraint system / 3-29

Air bag - supplemental restraint system / 3-41

Safety features of your vehicle

Front seat

(1) Fore/aft seat slide adjustment lever

(2) Seatback recline lever

(3) Seat cushion height adjuster

(Driver’s seat)*

(4) Seat warmer (Driver’s seat)*

(5) Head restraint

2nd row seat* / 3rd row seat*

(6) Fore/aft seat slide adjustment lever

(7) Seatback recline lever

(8) Head restraint

4th row seat*

(9) Fore/aft seat slide adjustment lever

(10) Folding seat cushion release lever

(11) Head restraint

*: if equipped

SEATS

OTQ035001R

The actual seats in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING

- Driver’s seat

• Never attempt to adjust the seat

whilst the vehicle is moving. This

could result in loss of control,

and an accident causing death,

serious injury, or property dam-

age.

• Do not allow anything to interfere

with the normal position of the

seatback. Storing items against a

seatback or in any other way

interfering with proper locking of

a seatback could result in serious

or fatal injury in a sudden stop or

collision.

• Always drive and ride with your

seatback upright and the lap por-

tion of the seat belt snug and low

across the hips. This is the best

position to protect you in case of

an accident.

• In order to avoid unnecessary

and perhaps severe air bag

injuries, always sit as far back as

possible from the steering wheel

whilst maintaining comfortable

control of the vehicle. We recom-

mend that your chest be at least

10 inches (250 mm) away from

the steering wheel.

WARNING - Uprighting

seat

When you return the seatback to its

upright position, hold the seatback

and return it slowly and be sure

there are no other occupants

around the seat. If the seatback is

returned without being held and

controlled, the back of the seat

could spring forward resulting in

accidental injury to a person struck

by the seatback.

WARNING

- Loose objects

Loose objects in the driver’s foot

area could interfere with the opera-

tion of the foot pedals, possibly

causing an accident. Do not place

anything under the front seats.

WARNING

- Driver respon-

sibility for passengers

Riding in a vehicle with the seat-

back reclined could lead to serious

or fatal injury in an accident. If a

seat is reclined during an accident,

the occupant’s hips may slide

under the lap portion of the seat

belt applying great force to the

unprotected abdomen. Serious or

fatal internal injuries could result.

The driver must advise the front

passenger to keep the seatback in

an upright position whenever the

vehicle is in motion.

WARNING

Do not use a sitting cushion that

reduces friction between the seat

and passenger. The passenger's

hips may slide under the lap por-

tion of the seat belt during an acci-

dent or a sudden stop. Serious or

fatal internal injuries could result

because the seat belt can't operate

normally.

Safety features of your vehicle

(Continued)

• To avoid the possibility of burns,

do not remove the carpet in the

cargo area. Emission control

devices beneath this floor gener-

ate high temperatures.

WARNING

- Rear seatbacks

• The rear seatback must be

securely latched. If not, passen-

gers and objects could be thrown

forward resulting in serious

injury or death in the event of a

sudden stop or collision.

• Luggage and other cargo should

be laid flat in the cargo area. If

objects are large, heavy, or must

be piled, they must be secured.

Under no circumstances should

cargo be piled higher than the

seatbacks. Failure to follow these

warnings could result in serious

injury or death in the event of a

sudden stop, collision or rollover.

• No passenger should ride in the

cargo area or sit or lie on folded

seatbacks whilst the vehicle is

moving. All passengers must be

properly seated in seats and

restrained properly whilst riding.

• When resetting the seatback to

the upright position, make sure it

is securely latched by pushing it

forward and backward.

(Continued)

WARNING

After adjusting the seat, always

check that it is securely locked into

place by attempting to move the

seat forward or backwards without

using the fore/aft adjuster. Sudden

or unexpected movement of the dri-

ver's seat could cause you to lose

control of the vehicle resulting in

an accident.

WARNING

• Use extreme caution so that

hands or other objects are not

caught in the seat mechanisms

whilst the seat is moving.

• Do not put a cigarette lighter on

the floor or seat. When you oper-

ate the seat, gas may gush out of

the lighter and cause fire.

• If there are occupants in the rear

seats, be careful whilst adjusting

the front seat position.

• Use extreme caution when pick-

ing small objects trapped under

the seats or between the seat and

the centre console. Your hands

might be cut or injured by the

sharp edges of the seats mecha-

nism.

Safety features of your vehicle

Front seat adjustment

Forward and backward

To move the seat forward or backward:

1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever

under the front edge of the seat cush-

ion up and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position you

desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the

seat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, and make

sure the seat is locked securely by trying

to move forward and backward without

using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not

locked properly.

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:

1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on the

seatback recline lever located on the

outside of the seat at the rear.

2. Carefully lean back on the seat and

adjust the seatback of the seat to the

position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the

seatback is locked in place. (The lever

MUST return to its original position for

the seatback to lock.)

Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat)

To change the height of the seat cushion,

push the lever that is located on the out-

side of the seat cushion upwards or

downwards.

• To lower the seat cushion, push the

lever down several times.

• To raise the seat cushion, pull the lever

up several times.

OTQ037002/H OTQ037004/HOTQ037003/H

Safety features of your vehicle

Seat warmer

(Driver’s seat, if equipped)

The seat warmer is provided to warm the

front seats during cold weather. With the

ignition switch in the ON position, push

either of the switches to warm the driver's

seat or the front passenger's seat.

During mild weather or under conditions

where the operation of the seat warmer

is not needed, keep the switches in the

"OFF" position.

• Each time you press the switch, the

temperature setting of the seat will

change as follows :

• The seat warmer defaults to the OFF

position whenever the ignition switch is

turned on.

✽

NOTICE

With the seat warmer switch in ON

position, the heating system in the seat

turns off or on automatically depending

on the seat temperature.

OTQ045243R

CAUTION

• When cleaning the seats, do not

use an organic solvent such as

thinner, benzene, alcohol and

petrol. Doing so may damage the

surface of the heater or seats.

• To prevent overheating the seat

warmer, do not place anything on

the seats that insulates against

heat, such as blankets, cushions

or seat covers whilst the seat

warmer is in operation.

• Do not place heavy or sharp

objects on seats equipped with

seat warmer. Damage to the seat

warming components could

occur.

• Do not change the seat cover. It

may damage the seat warmer or

airventilation system.

OFF

→

HIGH( )

→

MIDDLE( )

→

LOW( )

→

Safety features of your vehicle

Head restraint

The driver's and front passenger's seats

are equipped with a head restraint for the

occupant's safety and comfort.

The head restraint not only provides

comfort for the driver and front passen-

ger, but also helps to protect the head

and neck in the event of a collision.

WARNING

- Seat warmer

burns

Passengers should use extreme

caution when using seat warmers

due to the possibility of excess

heating or burns. The seat warmer

may cause burns even at low tem-

peratures, especially if used for

long periods of time.

In particular, the driver must exer-

cise extreme care for the following

types of passengers:

1. Infants, children, elderly or hand-

icapped persons, or hospital out-

patients

2. Persons with sensitive skin or

those that burn easily

3. Fatigued individuals

4. Intoxicated individuals

5. Individuals taking medication

that can cause drowsiness or

sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold

tablets, etc.)

OTQC031161E

WARNING

• For maximum effectiveness in

case of an accident, the head

restraint should be adjusted so

the middle of the head restraint is

at the same height of the centre

of gravity of an occupant's head.

Generally, the centre of gravity of

most people's head is similar

with the height of the top of their

eyes. Also, adjust the head

restraint as close to your head as

possible. For this reason, the use

of a cushion that holds the body

away from the seatback is not

recommended.

• Do not operate the vehicle with

the head restraints removed as

severe injury to the occupants

may occur in the event of an acci-

dent. Head restraints may provide

protection against neck injuries

when properly adjusted.

• Do not adjust the head restraint

position of the driver's seat

whilst the vehicle is in motion.

Safety features of your vehicle

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the head restraint, pull it up to

the desired position (1). To lower the

head restraint, push and hold the release

button (2) on the head restraint support

and lower the head restraint to the

desired position (3).

Removal

To remove the head restraint:

1. Recline the seatback (2) with the

recline lever (1).

2. Raise head restraint as far as it can go.

3. Press the head restraint release button

(3) whilst pulling the head restraint up

(4).

OFD037037 OTQ033200

WARNING

NEVER allow anyone to ride in a

seat with the head restraint

removed.

OYFH034205

CAUTION

If you recline the seatback towards

the front with the head restraint and

seat cushion raised, the head

restraint may come in contact with

the sunvisor or other parts of the

vehicle.

Safety features of your vehicle

Reinstall

To reinstall the head restraint :

1. Put the head restraint poles (2) into the

holes whilst pressing the release but-

ton (1).

2. Recline the seatback (4) with the

recline lever (3).

3. Adjust the head restraint to the appro-

priate height.

Seatback pocket (if equipped)

The seatback pocket is provided on the

back of the front passenger’s and driver’s

seatbacks.

Rear seat adjustment

Forward and backward

(2nd and 3rd row, if equipped)

To move the seat forward or backward:

1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment lever

under the front edge of the seat cush-

ion and hold it.

OTQ033201

WARNING

Always make sure the head

restraint locks into position after

reinstalling and adjusting it proper-

ly.

WARNING - Seatback

pockets

Do not put heavy or sharp objects

in the seatback pockets. In an acci-

dent they could come loose from

the pocket and injure vehicle occu-

pants.

OTQ037036

OTQ037011

OTQ037011G

■ Type A

■ Type B

Safety features of your vehicle

103

2. Slide the seat to the position you

desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the

seat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, and make

sure the seat is locked securely by trying

to move forward and backward without

using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not

locked properly.

Seatback angle (if equipped)

To recline the seatback:

1. Pull or pull up the seatback recline

lever.

2. Carefully lean back the seat and adjust

the seatback to the position you

desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the

seatback is locked in place. (The lever

MUST return to its original position for

the seatback to lock.)

OTQ037012

OTQ037012G

OTQ037015

■ Type B

■ Type A

■ Type C

311

Safety features of your vehicle

Head restraint

The rear seats are equipped with head

restraints in the outboard seating posi-

tions (except centre seating position) for

the occupant's safety and comfort.

The head restraint not only provides com-

fort for passengers, but also helps to pro-

tect the head and neck in the event of a

collision.

OTQC031161F

WARNING

• For maximum effectiveness in

case of an accident, the head

restraint should be adjusted so

the middle of the head restraint is

at the same height of the centre

of gravity of an occupant's head.

Generally, the centre of gravity of

most people's head is similar

with the height of the top of their

eyes. Also, adjust the head

restraint as close to your head as

possible. The use of a cushion

that holds the body away from

the seatback is not recommend-

ed.

• Do not operate the vehicle with

the head restraints removed as

severe injury to an occupant may

occur in the event of an accident.

Head restraints may provide pro-

tection against severe neck

injuries when properly adjusted.

CAUTION

When there is no occupant in the

rear seats, adjust the height of the

head restraint to the lowest posi-

tion.The rear seat head restraint can

reduce the visibility of the rear area.

Safety features of your vehicle

123

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the head restraint, pull it up to

the desired position (1). To lower the

head restraint, push and hold the release

button (2) on the head restraint support

and lower the head restraint to the

desired position (3).

Removal

To remove the head restraint, raise it as

far as it can go then press the release

button (1) whilst pulling upward (2).

To reinstall the head restraint, put the

head restraint poles (3) into the holes

whilst pressing the release button (1).

Then adjust it to the appropriate height.

Centre seat folding (if equipped)

1. Stow the rear seat belt in the pocket to

prevent the seat belt from being dam-

aged.

2. Pull the release knob and fold the

seatback forward.

3. Fold up the seat.

OHM038017 OHM038018N

WARNING

Make sure the head restraint locks

in position after adjusting it to

properly protect the occupants.

OTQ037031

313

Safety features of your vehicle

Folding the rear seat

(4th row seat, if equipped)

The rear seat cushion may be folded to

facilitate carrying long items or to

increase the luggage capacity of the

vehicle.

WARNING

- Uprighting

seat

When you return the seatback to its

upright position, hold the seatback

and return it slowly. If the seatback

is returned without holding it, the

back of the seat could spring for-

ward resulting in injury caused by

being struck by the seatback.

CAUTION - Rear seat belts

When returning the rear (2nd and/or

3rd row) seatbacks to the upright

position, remember to return the

rear shoulder belts to their proper

position. Routing the seat belt web-

bing through the rear seat belt

guides will help keep the belts from

being trapped behind or under the

seats.

CAUTION - Damaging rear

seat belt buckles

When you fold the rear (2nd and/or

3rd row) seatback, insert the buckle

in the pocket between the rear seat-

back and cushion. Doing so can

prevent the buckle from being dam-

aged by the rear seatback.

WARNING

The purpose of the fold rear seat is

to allow you to carry longer objects

that could not be accommodated in

the cargo area.

Never allow passengers to sit on a

improper position (ex : top of the

folded seat, floor etc.) whilst the car

is moving as this is not a proper

seating position and no seat belts

are available for use. This could

result in serious injury or death in

case of an accident or sudden stop.

Objects carried on the cargo area

should not extend higher than the

top of the front seatbacks. Doing

this could allow cargo to slide for-

ward and cause injury or damage

during sudden stops.

Safety features of your vehicle

143

To fold the rear seat:

1. Stow the rear seat belt in the pocket to

prevent the seat belt from being dam-

aged.

2. Set the 3rd row seatback to the upright

position and if necessary, slide the 3rd

row seat forward.

3. Pull on the seat cushion folding lever,

then fold the seat toward the rear of

the vehicle.

4. Increase the luggauge compartment

space by moving the rear seat using

the sliding lever.

OTQ037016

OTQ037017

WARNING

When you return the rear seat

cushion to its locking position after

being folded:

Be careful not to damage the seat

belt webbing or buckle. Do not

allow the seat belt webbing or

buckle to get caught or pinched in

the rear seat. Ensure that the seat

is completely locked into its proper

position by pushing the seat cush-

ion and seatback.

Otherwise, in an accident or sud-

den stop, the seat could fold, which

could result in serious injury or

death.

315

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING

- Cargo

Cargo should always be secured to

prevent it from being thrown about

the vehicle in a collision and caus-

ing injury to the vehicle occupants.

Do not place objects in the rear

seats, since they cannot be proper-

ly secured and may hit the front

seat occupants in a collision.

WARNING - Cargo loading

Make sure the engine is off, the

automatic transmission is in P

(Park) or the manual transmission

is in R (Reverse) or 1st, and the

parking brake is securely applied

whenever loading or unloading

cargo. Failure to take these steps

may allow the vehicle to move if the

shift lever is inadvertently moved to

another position.

OUN026140

WARNING

The head restraint on the seat

(especially the last row seat)

should be adjusted so the middle of

the head restraint is at the same

height as the top of the occupant's

eyes.

If the tailgate is pushed down to

close when a passenger's head is

not against a properly adjusted

head restraint or a tall person is

seated, the tailgate may hit the

occupant's head, which could

cause injury.

Safety features of your vehicle

163

Seat belt restraint system

SEAT BELTS

WARNING

• For maximum restraint system

protection, the seat belts must

always be used whenever the car

is moving.

• Seat belts are most effective

when seatbacks are in the

upright position.

• Children age 12 and under must

always be properly restrained in

the rear seat. Never allow chil-

dren to ride in the front passen-

ger seat. If a child over 12 must

be seated in the front seat, he/she

must be properly belted and the

seat should be moved as far back

as possible.

• Never wear the shoulder belt

under your arm or behind your

back. An improperly positioned

shoulder belt can cause serious

injuries in a crash. The shoulder

belt should be positioned midway

over your shoulder across your

collarbone.

(Continued)

WARNING

Seat belts are designed to bear

upon the bony structure of the

body, and should be worn low

across the front of the pelvis, or the

pelvis, chest and shoulders, as

applicable; wearing the lap section

of the belt across the abdominal

area must be avoided.

Seat belts should be adjusted as

firmly as possible, consistent with

comfort, to provide the protection

for which they have been designed.

A slack belt will greatly reduce the

protection afforded to the occu-

pant.

Care should be taken to avoid con-

tamination of the webbing with pol-

ishes, oils and chemicals and par-

ticularly battery acid. Cleaning may

safely be carried out using mild

soap and water. The belt should be

replaced if webbing becomes

frayed, contaminated or damaged.

(Continued)

• Never wear a seat belt over frag-

ile objects. If there is a sudden

stop or impact, the seat belt can

damage it.

• Avoid wearing twisted seat belts.

A twisted belt can't do its job as

well. In a collision, it could even

cut into you. Be sure the belt

webbing is straight and not twist-

ed.

• Be careful not to damage the belt

webbing or hardware. If the belt

webbing or hardware is dam-

aged, replace it.

317

Safety features of your vehicle

Seat belt warning (if equipped)

As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt

warning light will illuminate for approxi-

mately 6 seconds each time you turn the

ignition switch ON regardless of belt fas-

tening.

If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened after

the ignition switch is ON, the seat belt

warning light illuminates until the belt is

fastened.

If you continue not to fasten the seat belt

and you drive over 9km/h, the illuminated

warning light will start to blink until you

drive under 6km/h. (if equipped)

(Continued)

It is essential to replace the entire

assembly after it has been worn in

a severe impact even if damage to

the assembly is not obvious. Belts

should not be worn with straps

twisted. Each seat belt assembly

must only be used by one occu-

pant; it is dangerous to put a belt

around a child being carried on the

occupant's lap.

WARNING

• No modifications or additions

should be made by the user

which will either prevent the seat

belt adjusting devices from oper-

ating to remove slack, or prevent

the seat belt assembly from being

adjusted to remove slack.

• When you fasten the seat belt, be

careful not to latch the seat belt

in buckles of other seat. It's very

dangerous and you may not be

protected by the seat belt proper-

ly.

• Do not unfasten the seat belt and

do not fasten and unfasten the

seat belt repeatedly whilst driv-

ing. This could result in loss of

control, and an accident causing

death, serious injury, or property

damage.

• When fastening the seat belt,

make sure that the seat belt does

not pass over objects that are

hard or can break easily.

• Make sure there is nothing in the

buckle. The seat belt may not be

fastened securely.

1GQA2083

Safety features of your vehicle

183

If you continue not to fasten the seat belt

and you drive over 20km/h the seat belt

warning chime will sound for approxi-

mately 100 seconds and the correspon-

ding warning light will blink. (if equipped)

Lap/shoulder belt

To fasten your seat belt:

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the

retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into

the buckle (2). There will be an audible

"click" when the tab locks into the buckle.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to the

proper length only after the lap belt por-

tion is adjusted manually so that it fits

snugly around your hips. If you lean for-

ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will

extend and let you move around. If there

is a sudden stop or impact, however, the

belt will lock into position. It will also lock

if you try to lean forward too quickly.

✽

NOTICE

If you are not able to pull out the seat

belt from the retractor, firmly pull the

belt out and release it. Then you will be

able to pull the belt out smoothly.

B180A01NF-E

319

Safety features of your vehicle

Height adjustment (if equipped)

You can adjust the height of the shoulder

belt anchor to one of 5 positions for max-

imum comfort and safety.

The height of the adjusting seat belt

should not be too near your neck. The

shoulder portion should be adjusted so

that it lies across your chest and midway

over your shoulder nearest the door and

not your neck.

To adjust the height of the seat belt

anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster

into an appropriate position.

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1).

To lower it, push it down (3) whilst press-

ing the height adjuster button (2).

Release the button to lock the anchor

into position. Try sliding the height

adjuster to make sure that it has locked

into position.

B200A02NF/H

WARNING

You should place the lap belt por-

tion as low as possible and snugly

across your hips, not on your waist.

If the lap belt is located too high on

your waist, it may increase the

chance of injury in the event of a

collision. Both arms should not be

under or over the belt. Rather, one

should be over and the other under,

as shown in the illustration.

Never wear the seat belt under the

arm nearest the door.

WARNING

• Verify the shoulder belt anchor is

locked into position at the appro-

priate height. Never position the

shoulder belt across your neck or

face. Improperly positioned seat

belts can cause serious injuries

in an accident.

• Failure to replace seat belts after

an accident could leave you with

damaged seat belts that will not

provide protection in the event of

another collision leading to per-

sonal injury or death. Replace

your seat belts after being in an

accident as soon as possible.

OEN036029

Front seat

Safety features of your vehicle

203

To release the seat belt:

The seat belt is released by pressing the

release button (1) in the locking buckle.

When it is released, the belt should auto-

matically draw back into the retractor.

If this does not happen, check the belt to

be sure it is not twisted, then try again.

Lap belt (if equipped)

To fasten your seat belt:

To fasten a 2-point static type belt, insert

the metal tab (1) into the locking buckle

(2). There will be an audible "click" when

the tab locks into the buckle. Check to

make sure the belt is properly locked and

that the belt is not twisted.

With a 2-point static type seat belt, the

length must be adjusted manually so it

fits snugly around your body. Fasten the

belt and pull on the loose end to tighten.

The belt should be placed as low as pos-

sible on your hips, not on your waist. If

the belt is too high, it could increase the

possibility of your being injured in an

accident.

B210A01NF-E B220A04NF-1

OHM039105N

B220B01NF

Too high

Shorten

Correct

321

Safety features of your vehicle

When using the rear centre seat belt, the

buckle with the “CENTER” mark must be

used.

To release the seat belt:

When you want to release the seat belt,

press the button (1) in the locking buckle.

Stowing the rear seat belt

OTQ037020

B210A02NF-1

WARNING

The centre lap belt latching mecha-

nism is different from those for the

rear seat shoulder belts. When fas-

tening the rear seat shoulder belts

or the centre lap belt, make sure

they are inserted into the correct

buckles to obtain maximum protec-

tion from the seat belt system and

assure proper operation.

OTQ037021

OTQ037022

OTQ037022G

■ Type B

■ Type A

■ Type C

Safety features of your vehicle

223

• The rear seat belt buckles can be

stowed in the pocket between the rear

seatback and cushion when not in use.

• The centre seat belt can be stowed

with the plate and webbing rolled in the

pocket between the rear seatback and

cushion.

Pre-tensioner seat belt

(if equipped)

The vehicle is equipped with driver and

front passenger pre-tensioner seat belts.

The pre-tensioner function ensures that

the seat belts fit tightly against the occu-

pant under certain impact conditions. If

the severity of impact or the angle of

impact is such that the airbags or pre-

tensioners will not provide additional

occupant protection, the system will not

deploy. If the occupant tries to lean for-

ward too quickly, the seat belt retractor

will lock into position. Under impact or

braking conditions, seat belt retractor will

lock.

Depending upon the severity and angle

of impact, the pre-tensioner may activate

and will pull the seat belt into tighter con-

tact against the occupant.

OED030300/H

WARNING

For your safety, be sure that the

belt webbing is not loose or twisted

and always sit properly on your

seat.

323

Safety features of your vehicle

The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-

sists mainly of the following components.

Their locations are shown in the illustra-

tion:

1. SRS air bag warning light

2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly

3. SRS control module

✽

NOTICE

• Both the driver and front passenger

pre-tensioners activate according to

the angle and severity of impact.

• When the pre-tensioners are activat-

ed, a loud noise may be heard and fine

dust, which may appear to be smoke,

may be visible in the passenger com-

partment. These are normal operating

conditions and are not hazardous.

• Although it is harmless, the fine dust

may cause skin irritation and should

not be breathed for prolonged peri-

ods. Wash all exposed skin areas thor-

oughly after an accident in which the

pre-tensioners.

1KMB3311A/H

WARNING

To obtain maximum benefit from a

pre-tensioner seat belt:

1. The seat belt must be worn cor-

rectly and adjusted to the proper

position. Please read and follow

all of the important information

and precautions about your vehi-

cle’s occupant safety features –

including seat belts and air bags

– that are provided in this manu-

al.

2. Be sure you and your passen-

gers always wear seat belts prop-

erly.

Safety features of your vehicle

243

✽

NOTICE

Because the sensor that activates the

SRS air bag is connected with the pre-

tensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag

warning light on the instrument

panel will illuminate for approximately

6 seconds after the ignition switch has

been turned to the ON position, and

then it should turn off.

CAUTION

If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not

working properly, this warning light

will illuminate even if there is no

malfunction of the SRS air bag.

If the SRS air bag warning light

does not illuminate when the igni-

tion switch is turned to ON, or if it

remains illuminated after illuminat-

ing for approximately 6 seconds, or

if it illuminates whilst the vehicle is

being driven, we recommend that

the system be inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING

• Pre-tensioners are designed to

operate only one time. After acti-

vation, pre-tensioner seat belts

must be replaced. All seat belts,

of any type, should always be

replaced after they have been

worn during a collision.

• The pre-tensioner seat belt

assembly mechanisms become

hot during activation. Do not

touch the pre-tensioner seat belt

assemblies for several minutes

after they have been activated.

• Do not attempt to inspect or

replace the pre-tensioner seat

belts yourself. We recommend

that the system be inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

• Do not strike the pre-tensioner

seat belt assemblies.

• Do not attempt to service or

repair the pre-tensioner seat belt

system in any manner.

(Continued)

• Improper handling of the pre-ten-

sioner seat belt assemblies, and

failure to heed the warnings not

to strike, modify, inspect, replace,

service or repair the pre-tension-

er seat belt assemblies may lead

to improper operation or inadver-

tent activation and serious injury.

• Always wear the seat belts when

driving or riding in a motor vehi-

cle.

• If the vehicle or pre-tensioner

seat belt must be discarded, we

recommend that you contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

325

Safety features of your vehicle

Seat belt precautions

Infant or small child

You should be aware of the specific

requirements in your country. Child

and/or infant seats must be properly

placed and installed in the rear seat. For

more information about the use of these

restraints, refer to “Child restraint sys-

tem” in this section.

WARNING

All occupants of the vehicle must

wear their seat belts at all times.

Seat belts and child restraints

reduce the risk of serious or fatal

injuries for all occupants in the

event of a collision or sudden stop.

Without a seat belt, occupants

could be shifted too close to a

deploying air bag, strike the interior

structure or be thrown from the

vehicle. Properly worn seat belts

greatly reduce these hazards.

Always follow the precautions

about seat belts, air bags and occu-

pant seating contained in this man-

ual.

WARNING

Every person in your vehicle needs

to be properly restrained at all

times, including infants and chil-

dren. Never hold a child in your

arms or lap when riding in a vehi-

cle. The violent forces created dur-

ing a crash will tear the child from

your arms and throw the child

against the interior. Always use a

child restraint appropriate for your

child's height and weight.

CAUTION

Body work on the front area of the

vehicle may damage the pre-ten-

sioner seat belt system. Therefore,

we recommend that the system be

serviced by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

Safety features of your vehicle

263

✽

NOTICE

Small children are best protected from

injury in an accident when properly

restrained in the rear seat by a child

restraint system that meets the require-

ments of the Safety Standards of your

country. Before buying any child

restraint system, make sure that it has a

label certifying that it meets Safety

Standards of your country. The restraint

must be appropriate for your child's

height and weight. Check the label on

the child restraint for this information.

Refer to “Child restraint system” in this

section.

Larger children

Children who are too large for child

restraint systems should always occupy

the rear seat and use the available

lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should

be fastened snug on the hips and as low

as possible. Check belt fit periodically. A

child's squirming could put the belt out of

position. Children are afforded the most

safety in the event of an accident when

they are restrained by a proper restraint

system in the rear seat. If a larger child

(over age 12) must be seated in the front

seat, the child should be securely

restrained by the available lap/shoulder

belt and the seat should be placed in the

rearmost position. Children age 12 and

under should be restrained securely in

the rear seat. NEVER place a child age

12 and under in the front seat. NEVER

place a rear facing child seat in the front

seat of a vehicle.

If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch-

es the child’s neck or face, try placing the

child closer to the centre of the vehicle. If

the shoulder belt still touches their face

or neck they need to be returned to a

child restraint system.

WARNING

- Shoulder belts

on small children

• Never allow a shoulder belt to be

in contact with a child’s neck or

face whilst the vehicle is in

motion.

• If seat belts are not properly worn

and adjusted on children, there is

a risk of death or serious injury.

327

Safety features of your vehicle

Pregnant women

The use of a seat belt is recommended

for pregnant women.The seat belt should

be worn as low and snugly as possible

across the hips, not across the abdomen.

A qualified Medical Practitioner should

be consulted for further information.

Injured person

A seat belt should be used when an

injured person is being transported. For

specific recommendations, the advice of

a qualified Medical Practioner should be

sought.

One person per belt

The seat belts are designed to be used

by one seat occupant only. The use of a

seat belt by more than one person

increases the levels of injury which may

be sustained in the event of an accident.

Do not lie down

To reduce the chance of injuries in the

event of an accident and to achieve max-

imum effectiveness of the restraint sys-

tem, all passengers should be sitting up

and the front and rear seats should be in

an upright position when the car is mov-

ing. A seat belt cannot provide proper

protection if the person is lying down in

the rear seat or if the front and rear seats

are in a reclined position.

WARNING

Riding with a reclined seatback

increases your chance of serious

or fatal injuries in the event of a col-

lision or sudden stop. The protec-

tion of your restraint system (seat

belts and air bags) is greatly

reduced by reclining your seat.

Seat belts must be snug against

your hips and chest to work proper-

ly. The more the seatback is

reclined, the greater the chance

that an occupant's hips will slide

under the lap belt causing serious

internal injuries or the occupant's

neck could strike the shoulder belt.

Drivers and passengers should

always sit well back in their seats,

properly belted, and with the seat-

backs upright.

Safety features of your vehicle

283

Care of seat belts

Seat belt assemblies must never be dis-

assembled or modified in any way. In

addition, care should be exercised to

ensure that the belt assemblies do not

become damaged by being trapped in

seat mechanisms, door shuts etc.

Periodic inspection

All seat belts should be inspected peri-

odically for wear or damage of any kind.

Parts of the system that are damaged

should be replaced as soon as possible.

Under no circumstances must any part of

the seat belt assemblies be dismantled

or repaired.

Keep belts clean and dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.

If belts become dirty, they can be

cleaned using a mild soap solution and

warm water. Bleach, dye, strong deter-

gents or abrasives should not be used

since the fabric may become damaged

and weakened.

When to replace seat belts

The entire seat belt assembly or assem-

blies should be inspected by an autho-

rised repairer if the vehicle has been

involved in an accident even if no dam-

age is evident. If you have additional

questions regarding seat belt operation,

we recommend that you consult a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING

When you return the rear seat to its

seating position after the rear seat

has been folded, be careful not to

damage the seat belt webbing or

buckle. Be sure that the webbing or

buckle does not get caught or

pinched in the rear seat. A seat belt

with damaged webbing or buckle

could possibly fail during a colli-

sion or sudden stop, resulting in

serious injury. If the webbing or

buckles are damaged, get them

replaced immediately.

329

Safety features of your vehicle

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

Children riding in the car should sit in the

rear seat and must always be properly

restrained to minimise the risk of injury in

an accident, sudden stop or sudden

manoeuvre. According to accident statis-

tics, children are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seats than in the

front seat. Larger children not in a child

restraint should use one of the seat belts

provided.

You should be aware of the specific

requirements in your country. Child

and/or infant safety seats must be prop-

erly placed and installed in the rear seat.

You must use a commercially available

child restraint system that meets the

requirements of the Safety Standards of

your country. Child restraint systems are

designed to be secured in vehicle seats

by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a

lap/shoulder belt, or by a tether anchor

and/or ISOFIX anchors (if equipped).

Children could be injured or killed in a

crash if their restraints are not properly

secured. For small children and babies, a

child seat or infant seat must be used.

Before buying a particular child restraint

system, make sure it fits your car seat

and seat belts, and fits your child.

Follow all the instructions provided by the

manufacturer when installing the child

restraint system.

(Continued)

• When the child restraint system

is not in use, store it in the lug-

gage area or fasten it with a seat

belt so that it will not be thrown

forward in the case of a sudden

stop or an accident.

• Children may be seriously injured

or killed by an inflating air bag.

All children, even those too large

for child restraints, must ride in

the rear seat.

WARNING

• A child restraint system must be

placed in the rear seat. Never

install a child or infant seat on the

front passenger's seat. Should an

accident occur and cause the

passenger-side air bag to deploy,

it could severely injure or kill an

infant or child seated in an infant

or child seat. Thus only use a

child restraint in the rear seat of

your vehicle.

• A seat belt or child restraint sys-

tem can become very hot if it is

left in a closed vehicle on a sunny

day, even if the outside tempera-

ture does not feel hot. Be sure to

check the seat cover and buckles

before placing a child there.

(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

303

WARNING

To reduce the chance or serious or

fatal injuries:

• Children of all ages are safer

when restrained in the rear seat.

A child riding in the front passen-

ger seat can be forcefully struck

by an inflating air bag resulting in

serious or fatal injuries.

• Always follow the child restraint

system manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation and use of

the child restraint.

• Always make sure the child seat

is secured properly in the car and

your child is securely restrained

in the child seat.

• Never hold a child in your arms or

lap when riding in a vehicle. The

violent forces created during a

crash will tear the child from your

arms and throw the child against

the car’s interior.

• Never put a seat belt over your-

self and a child. During a crash,

the belt could press deep into the

child causing serious internal

injuries.

(Continued)

• Never leave children unattended

in a vehicle – not even for a short

time. The car can heat up very

quickly, resulting in serious

injuries to children inside. Even

very young children may inadver-

tently cause the vehicle to move,

entangle themselves in the win-

dows, or lock themselves or oth-

ers inside the vehicle.

• Never allow two children, or any

two persons, to use the same

seat belt.

• Children often squirm and repo-

sition themselves improperly.

Never let a child ride with the

shoulder belt under their arm or

behind their back. Always prop-

erly position and secure children

in rear seat.

• Never allow a child to stand-up or

kneel on the seat or floor of a

moving vehicle. During a colli-

sion or sudden stop, the child

can be violently thrown against

the vehicles interior, resulting in

serious injury.

(Continued)

• Never use an infant carrier or a

child safety seat that "hooks"

over a seatback, it may not pro-

vide adequate security in an acci-

dent.

• Seat belts can become very hot,

especially when the car is parked

in direct sunlight. Always check

seat belt buckles before fasten-

ing them over a child.

• After an accident, we recommend

that the system be checked by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

331

Safety features of your vehicle

Using a child restraint system

For small children and babies, the use of

a child seat or infant seat is required. This

child seat or infant seat should be of

appropriate size for the child and should

be installed in accordance with the man-

ufacturer's instructions.

For safety reasons, we recommend that

the child restraint system be used in the

rear seats.

CRS09

OTQ037038

Forward-facing child restraint system

Rearward-facing child restraint system

WARNING

- Child seat

installation

• A child can be seriously injured

or killed in a collision if the child

restraint is not properly anchored

to the car and the child is not

properly restrained in the child

restraint. Before installing the

child restraint system, read the

instructions supplied by the child

restraint system manufacturer.

• If the seat belt does not operate

as described in this section, we

recommend that the system be

checked by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

• Failure to observe this manual's

instructions regarding child

restraint systems and the

instructions provided with the

child restraint system could

increase the chance and/or

severity of injury in an accident.

• If the vehicle head restraint pre-

vents proper installation of a

child seat, the head restraint of

the respective seating position

shall be readjusted or entirely

removed.

WARNING

Never place a rear-facing child

restraint in the front passenger

seat, because of the danger that an

inflating passenger-side air bag

could impact the rear-facing child

restraint and kill the child.

Safety features of your vehicle

323

Installing a child restraint system by

lap belt

To install a child restraint system on the

outboard or centre rear seats, do the fol-

lowing:

1. Place the child restraint system on the

rear seat.

2. Extend the latch plate tongue of the

lap belt.

3. Route the lap belt through the restraint

according to the seat manufacturer’s

instructions.

4. Buckle the seat belt and adjust the lap

belt for a snug hold on the child

restraint by pulling on the loose end of

the belt. After installation of the child

restraint system, try to move it in all

directions to be sure the child restraint

system is securely installed.

Installing a child restraint system by

lap/shoulder belt

To install a child restraint system on the

outboard or centre rear seats, do the fol-

lowing:

1. Place the child restraint system in the

seat and route the lap/shoulder belt

around or through the restraint, follow-

ing the restraint manufacturer’s

instructions. Be sure the seat belt web-

bing is not twisted.

E2MS103005

1GHA2260

OTQ007002

333

Safety features of your vehicle

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into

the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”

sound.

Position the release button so that it is

easy to access in case of an emergency.

3. Buckle the seat belt and allow the seat

belt to take up any slack. After installa-

tion of the child restraint system, try to

move it in all directions to be sure the

child restraint system is securely

installed.

If you need to tighten the belt, pull more

webbing toward the retractor. When you

unbuckle the seat belt and allow it to

retract, the retractor will automatically

revert back to its normal seated passen-

ger emergency locking usage condition.

OEN036101 OEN036104

Safety features of your vehicle

343

Seating position

Age group

0 : Up to 10 kg

XXXUU

(0 - 9 months)

0+ : Up to 13 kg

L4 L4 L4 U U

(0 - 2 years)

I : 9 kg to 18 kg

L1, L2, L3 L1, L2, L3 L1, L2, L3 U U

(9 months - 4 years)

II & III : 15 kg to 36 kg

XXXUU

(4 - 12 years)

Front

passenger

2nd

outboard

3rd

centre

3rd

outboard

2nd

centre

Seating position

Age group

0 : Up to 10 kg

XXXX

(0 - 9 months)

0+ : Up to 13 kg

L4XL4X

(0 - 2 years)

I : 9 kg to 18 kg

L1, L2, L3 X L1, L2, L3 X

(9 months - 4 years)

II & III : 15 kg to 36 kg

XXXX

(4 - 12 years)

Front

passenger

Front

centre

2nd

centre

2nd

outboard

Child seat restraint suitability for seat position using the seat belt

Use child safety seats that have been officially approved and are appropriate for your

children. When using the child safety seats, refer to the following table.

L1 : Suitable for Romer Lord Plus (E1

03301136) approved for the use in

this mass group

L2 : Suitable for Romer DUO (E1

3301133) approved for the use in

this mass group

L3 : Suitable for BeSafe iZi COMFORT

(E4 03443206) approved for the use

in this mass group

L4 : Suitable for Bebe comfort ELIOS

(E2 037014) approved for the use in

this mass group

U : Suitable for "universal" category

restraints approved for use in this

mass group

UF : Suitable for forward-facing "univer-

sal" category restraints approved

for the use in this mass group

X : Seat position not suitable for children

in this mass group

8-seater Wagon

5/6-seater Van

335

Safety features of your vehicle

Securing a child restraint seat with

“Tether Anchor” system

(if equipped)

Child restraint hook holders are located

behind the rear seats.

1. Route the child restraint seat strap

over the seatback.

For vehicles with adjustable head

restraint, route the tether strap under

the head restraint and between the

head restraint posts, otherwise route

the tether strap over the top of the

seatback.

2. Connect the tether strap hook to the

appropriate child restraint hook holder

and tighten to secure the seat.

2GHA3300L

WARNING - Tether strap

Never mount more than one child

restraint to a single tether or to a

single lower anchorage point. The

increased load caused by multiple

seats may cause the tethers or

anchorage points to break, causing

serious injury or death.

WARNING

A child can be seriously injured or

killed in a collision if the child

restraint is not properly anchored

to the car and the child is not prop-

erly restrained in the child restraint.

Always follow the child seat manu-

facturer’s instructions for installa-

tion and use.

OTQ037039L

Safety features of your vehicle

363

Securing a child restraint system

with “ISOFIX” system and “Tether

Anchorage” system (if equipped)

ISOFIX is a standardised method of fit-

ting child seats that eliminates the need

to use the standard adult seat belt to

secure the seat in the vehicle. This

enables a much more secure and posi-

tive location with the added benefit of

easier and quicker installation.

An ISOFIX-seat can only be installed if it

has vehicle-specific approval in accor-

dance with the requirements of ECE-

R44.

There are ISOFIX marks located on the

lower portion of each side of the rear

seatbacks. These marks indicate the

position of the lower anchors for child

restraints so equipped.

WARNING

- Child restraint

check

Check that the child restraint sys-

tem is secure by pushing and

pulling it in different directions.

Incorrectly fitted child restraints

may swing, twist, tip or separate

causing death or serious injury.

WARNING

- Child restraint anchorage

• Child restraint anchorages are

designed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted

child restraints. Under no circum-

stances are they to be used for

adult seat belts or harnesses or

for attaching other items or

equipment to the vehicle.

• The tether strap may not work

properly if attached somewhere

other than the correct tether

anchor.

OTQ038161R OTQ037040L

337

Safety features of your vehicle

On each side of the rear seat, between

the cushion and backrest, are located a

pair of ISOFIX anchorage points togeth-

er with a top tether mounting behind the

rear seats. During the installation, the

seat has to be engaged at the anchor-

age-points in a way you can hear it click-

ing (check by pulling!) and has to be fixed

with the Top Tether-belt on the belonging

point behind rear seats.

The installing and the use of a child-seat

has to be done according to the

installing-manual, which is added to the

ISOFIX-seat.

To secure the child restraint seat

1. To engage the child restraint seat to

the ISOFIX anchor, insert the child

restraint seat latch into the ISOFIX

anchor. Listen for the audible “click”

sound.

2. Connect the tether strap hook to the

child restraint hook holder and tighten

to secure the seat. (Refer to the previ-

ous page.)

OUN036140L

WARNING

• When using the vehicle's

"ISOFIX" system to install a child

restraint system in the rear seat,

all unused vehicle rear seat belt

metal latch plates or tabs must be

latched securely in their seat belt

buckles and the seat belt web-

bing must be retracted behind

the child restraint to prevent the

child from reaching and taking

hold of unretracted seat belts.

Unlatched metal latch plates or

tabs may allow the child to reach

the unretracted seat belts which

may result in strangulation and a

serious injury or death to the

child in the child restraint.

• Do not place anything around the

lower anchors. Also make sure

that the seat belt is not caught in

the lower anchors.

WARNING

Install the child restraint seat fully

rearward against the seatback with

the seatback in a vertical position,

not reclined.

CAUTION

Do not allow the rear seat belt web-

bing to get scratched or pinched by

the ISOFIX-seat latch and ISOFIX

anchor during the installation.

Safety features of your vehicle

383

WARNING

• Do not install a child restraint

seat at the centre of the rear seat

using the vehicle's ISOFIX

anchors. The ISOFIX anchors are

only provided for the left and

right outboard rear seating posi-

tions. Do not misuse the ISOFIX

anchors by attempting to attach a

child restraint seat in the middle

of the rear seat to the ISOFIX

anchors. In a crash, the child

restraint seat ISOFIX attachments

may not be strong enough to

secure the child restraint seat

properly in the centre of the rear

seat and may break, causing seri-

ous injury or death.

• Do not mount more than one

child restraint to a child restraint

lower anchorage point. The

improper increased load may

cause the anchorage points or

tether anchor to break, causing

serious injury or death.

(Continued)

• Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-com-

patible child restraint seat only to

the appropriate locations shown

in the illustration.

• Always follow the installation and

use instructions provided by the

manufacturer of the child

restraint.

339

Safety features of your vehicle

F ISO/L1 - IUF

G ISO/L2 - IUF

E ISO/R1 - IUF

D ISO/R2 - IUF

C ISO/R3 - IUF

D ISO/R2 - IUF

C ISO/R3 - IUF

B ISO/F2 - IUF

B1 ISO/F2X - IUF

A ISO/F3 - IUF

Rear OutboardFront Passenger

FixtureSize ClassMass Group

Carrycot

0 : UP to 10kg

0+ : UP to 13kg

I : 9 to 18kg

vehicle ISOFIX positions

IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of

universal category approved for use in the mass group.

* Both ISO/R2 and ISO/R3 are able to be set up only at the

foremost position of the passenger seat.

* ISOFIX child restraint system size classes and fixtures

A - ISO/F3: Full-Height Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height

720mm)

B - ISO/F2: Reduced-Height Forward-Facing toddler CRS

(height 650mm)

B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced-Height Second Version Back Surface

Shape Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height 650mm)

C - ISO/R3: Full-Size Rearward-Facing toddler CRS

D - ISO/R2: Reduced-Size Rearward-Facing toddler CRS

E - ISO/R1: Infant-Size Rearward-Facing CRS

F - ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)

G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)

Child seat restraint suitability for vehicle ISOFIX positions

Safety features of your vehicle

403

Recommended child restraint systems - For Europe

CRS Manufacturer information

Britax Römer http://www.britax.com

Mass Group

Name

Part. No.

Manufacturer Type of Fixation

ECE-R44

Approval No.

Group 0-1

(0-18kg)

Baby Safe Plus

Part. No. E8945-66001

Part. No. E8945-66029

Britax Römer Rearward facing with ISOFIX Base E1 04301146

Group 1

(9-18kg)

Duo Plus

Part. No. E8945-66011

Britax Römer

Forward facing with vehicle ISOFIX lower

anchorage + Top Tether

E1 04301133

341

Safety features of your vehicle

(1) Driver’s front air bag

(2) Passenger’s front air bag*

(3) Side impact air bag*

* : if equipped

AIR BAG - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OTQ036023R

* The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

WARNING

• Even in vehicles with air bags,

you and your passengers must

always wear the safety belts pro-

vided in order to minimise the

risk and severity of injury in the

event of a collision or rollover.

• SRS and pretensioners contain

explosive chemicals.

If scraping a vehicle without

removing SRS and pretensioners

from a vehicle, it may cause fire.

Before scraping a vehicle, we rec-

ommend that you contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

• Keep the SRS parts and wirings

away from water or any liquid. If

the SRS components are inoper-

ative due to exposure to water or

liquids, it may cause fire or

severe injury.

Safety features of your vehicle

423

How does the air bag system

operate

• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if

necessary) only when the ignition

switch is turned to the ON or START

position.

• Air bags inflate instantly in the event of

a serious frontal collision in order to

help protect the occupants from seri-

ous physical injury.

• There is no single speed at which the

air bags will inflate.

Generally, air bags are designed to

inflate based upon the severity of a col-

lision and its direction. These two fac-

tors determine whether the sensors

produce an electronic deployment/

inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on a

number of factors including vehicle

speed, angles of impact and the densi-

ty and stiffness of the vehicles or

objects which your vehicle hits in the

collision. The determining factors are

not limited to those mentioned above.

• The front air bags will completely

inflate and deflate in an instant.

It is virtually impossible for you to see

the air bags inflate during an accident.

It is much more likely that you will sim-

ply see the deflated air bags hanging

out of their storage compartments after

the collision.

• In order to help provide protection in a

severe collision, the air bags must

inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag

inflation is a consequence of the

extremely short time in which a colli-

sion occurs and the need to inflate the

air bag between the occupant and the

vehicle structures before the occupant

impacts those structures. This speed of

inflation reduces the risk of serious or

life-threatening injuries in a severe col-

lision and is thus a necessary part of

air bag design.

However, air bag inflation can also

cause injuries which can include facial

abrasions, bruises and broken bones

because the inflation speed also caus-

es the air bags to expand with a great

deal of force.

• There are even circumstances

under which contact with the steer-

ing wheel air bag can cause fatal

injuries, especially if the occupant

is positioned excessively close to

the steering wheel.

WARNING

• To avoid severe personal injury

or death caused by deploying air

bags in a collision, the driver

should sit as far back from the

steering wheel air bag as possi-

ble (at least 10 inches (250 mm)

away). The front passengers

should always move their seats

as far back as possible and sit

back in their seat.

• Air bags inflate instantly in the

event of collision, and passen-

gers may be injured by the air bag

expansion force if they are not in

proper position.

• Air bag inflation may cause

injuries including facial or bodily

abrasions, injuries from broken

glasses or burns.

343

Safety features of your vehicle

Noise and smoke

When the air bags inflate, they make a

loud noise and they leave smoke and

powder in the air inside of the vehicle.

This is normal and is a result of the igni-

tion of the air bag inflator. After the air

bag inflates, you may feel substantial dis-

comfort in breathing due to the contact of

your chest with both the seat belt and the

air bag, as well as from breathing the

smoke and powder. Open your doors

and/or windows as soon as possible

after impact in order to reduce dis-

comfort and prevent prolonged expo-

sure to the smoke and powder.

Though the smoke and powder are non-

toxic, they may cause irritation to the skin

(eyes, nose and throat, etc). If this is the

case, wash and rinse with cold water

immediately and consult a doctor if the

symptom persists.

Do not install a child restraint on

the front passenger’s seat

WARNING

When the air bags deploy, the air

bag related parts in the steering

wheel and/or instrument panel are

very hot. To prevent injury, do not

touch the air bag storage area’s

internal components immediately

after an air bag has inflated.

1JBH3051

OYDESA2042

OLM034310

■ Type B

■ Type A

■ Type C

Safety features of your vehicle

443

Never place a rear-facing child restraint

in the front passenger’s seat. If the air

bag deploys, it would impact the rear-fac-

ing child restraint, causing serious or

fatal injury.

In addition, do not place front-facing child

restraints in the front passenger’s seat

either. If the front passenger air bag

inflates, it could cause serious or fatal

injuries to the child.

Air bag warning light

The purpose of the air bag warning light

in your instrument panel is to alert you of

a potential problem with your air bag -

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).

When the ignition switch is turned ON,

the warning light should illuminate for

approximately 6 seconds, then go off.

Have the system checked if:

• The light does not turn on briefly when

you turn the ignition ON.

• The light stays on after illuminating for

approximately 6 seconds.

• The light comes on whilst the vehicle is

in motion.

WARNING

• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a

rearward facing child restraint on

a seat protected by an air bag in

front of it!

• Never put a child restraint in the

front passenger’s seat. If the front

passenger air bag inflates, it can

cause serious or fatal injuries.

W7-147

345

Safety features of your vehicle

SRS components and functions

The SRS consists of the following com-

ponents:

1. Driver's front air bag module

2. Passenger's front air bag module

3. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies

4. Air bag warning light

5. SRS control module (SRSCM)

6. Front impact sensors*

7. Side impact sensors*

8. Side air bag

*: if equipped

The SRSCM continually monitors all

SRS components whilst the ignition

switch is ON to determine if a crash

impact is severe enough to require air

bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat

belt deployment.

The SRS air bag warning light on the

instrument panel will illuminate for about

6 seconds after the ignition switch is

turned to the ON position, after which the

SRS air bag warning light should go out.

If any of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction of the SRS.

We recommend that the system be

inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

• The light does not turn on briefly when

you turn the ignition ON.

• The light stays on after illuminating for

approximately 6 seconds.

• The light comes on whilst the vehicle is

in motion.

The front air bag modules are located

both in the centre of the steering wheel

and in the front passenger's panel above

the glove box. When the SRSCM detects

a sufficiently severe impact to the front of

the vehicle, it will automatically deploy

the front air bags.

B240B01L-R

Driver’s front air bag (1)

OTQ036106R

Safety features of your vehicle

463

Upon deployment, tear seams moulded

directly into the pad covers will separate

under pressure from the expansion of the

air bags. Further opening of the covers

then allows full inflation of the air bags.

A fully inflated air bag, in combination

with a properly worn seat belt, slows the

driver's or the passenger's forward

motion, reducing the risk of head and

chest injury.

After complete inflation, the air bag

immediately starts deflating, enabling the

driver to maintain forward visibility and

the ability to steer or operate other con-

trols.

B240B02L-R B240B03L-R

Driver’s front air bag (2) Driver’s front air bag (3)

WARNING

• Do not install or place any acces-

sories (drink holder, cassette

holder, sticker, etc.) on the front

passenger's panel above the

glove box in a vehicle with a pas-

senger's air bag. Such objects

may become dangerous projec-

tiles and cause injury if the pas-

senger's air bag inflates.

• When installing a container of liq-

uid air freshener inside the vehi-

cle, do not place it near the

instrument cluster nor on the

instrument panel surface.

It may become a dangerous pro-

jectile and cause injury if the pas-

senger's air bag inflates.

B240B05L-R

Passenger’s front air bag

347

Safety features of your vehicle

Driver's and passenger's front air

bag (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a

Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) System

and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver

and passenger seating positions. The

indications of the system's presence are

the letters "SRS AIR BAG" embossed on

the air bag pad cover in the steering

wheel and the passenger's side front

panel pad above the glove box.

The SRS consists of air bags installed

under the pad covers in the centre of the

steering wheel and the passenger's side

front panel above the glove box.

WARNING

• If an air bag deploys, there may

be a loud noise followed by a fine

dust released in the vehicle.

These conditions are normal and

are not hazardous - the air bags

are packed in this fine powder.

The dust generated during air

bag deployment may cause skin

or eye irritation as well as aggra-

vate asthma for some persons.

Always wash all exposed skin

areas thoroughly with lukewarm

water and a mild soap after an

accident in which the air bags

were deployed.

• The SRS can function only when

the ignition switch is in the ON

position. If the SRS air bag warn-

ing light does not illuminate, or

continuously remains on after

illuminating for about 6 seconds

when the ignition switch is turned

to the ON position, or after the

engine is started, comes on

whilst driving, the SRS is not

working properly. If this occurs,

we recommend that the system

be inspected by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

(Continued)

• Before you replace a fuse or dis-

connect a battery terminal, turn

the ignition switch to the LOCK

position and remove the ignition

key. Never remove or replace the

air bag related fuse(s) when the

ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion. Failure to heed this warning

will cause the SRS air bag warn-

ing light to illuminate.

OTQ035024/H

Driver’s front air bag

Safety features of your vehicle

483

The purpose of the SRS is to provide the

vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-

ger with additional protection than that

offered by the seat belt system alone in

case of a frontal impact of sufficient

severity.

(Continued)

To reduce the chance of serious or

fatal injuries and receive the maxi-

mum safety benefit from your

restraint system:

• Never place a child in any child or

booster seat in the front seat.

• ABC – Always Buckle Children in

the back seat. It is the safest

place for children of any age to

ride.

• Front air bags can injure occu-

pants improperly positioned in

the front seats.

• Move your seat as far back as

practical from the front air bags,

whilst still maintaining control of

the vehicle.

• You and your passengers should

never sit or lean unnecessarily

close to the air bags. Improperly

positioned drivers and passen-

gers can be severely injured by

inflating air bags.

• Never lean against the door or

centre console – always sit in an

upright position.

(Continued)

WARNING

Always use seat belts and child

restraints – every trip, every time,

everyone! Air bags inflate with con-

siderable force and in the blink of

an eye. Seat belts help keep occu-

pants in proper position to obtain

maximum benefit from the air bag.

Even with air bags, improperly and

unbelted occupants can be severe-

ly injured when the air bag inflates.

Always follow the precautions

about seat belts, air bags and occu-

pant safety contained in this manu-

al.

(Continued)

OTQ037025/H

Passenger’s front air bag

349

Safety features of your vehicle

(Continued)

• No objects should be placed over

or near the air bag modules on

the steering wheel, instrument

panel, and the front passenger's

panel above the glove box,

because any such object could

cause harm if the vehicle is in a

crash severe enough to cause

the air bags to deploy.

• Do not tamper with or disconnect

SRS wiring or other components

of the SRS system. Doing so

could result in injury, due to acci-

dental deployment of the air bags

or by rendering the SRS inopera-

tive.

• If the SRS air bag warning light

( ) remains illuminated whilst

the vehicle is being driven, we

recommend that the system be

inspected by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

(Continued)

• Air bags can only be used once –

we recommend that the system

be replaced by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

• The SRS is designed to deploy

the front air bags only when an

impact is sufficiently severe and

when the impact angle is less

than 30° from the forward longitu-

dinal axis of the vehicle.

Additionally, the air bags will only

deploy once. Seat belts must be

worn at all times.

• Front air bags are not intended to

deploy in side-impact, rear-

impact or rollover crashes. In

addition, front air bags will not

deploy in frontal crashes below

the deployment threshold.

(Continued)

• A child restraint system must

never be placed in the front seat.

The infant or child could be

severely injured or killed by an air

bag deployment in case of an

accident.

• Children age 12 and under must

always be properly restrained in

the rear seat. Never allow chil-

dren to ride in the front passen-

ger seat. If a child over 12 must

be seated in the front seat, he or

she must be properly belted and

the seat should be moved as far

back as possible.

• For maximum safety protection in

all types of crashes, all occu-

pants including the driver should

always wear their seat belts

whether or not an air bag is also

provided at their seating position

to minimise the risk of severe

injury or death in the event of a

crash. Do not sit or lean unneces-

sarily close to the air bag whilst

the vehicle is in motion.

(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

503

Side impact air bag (if equipped)

❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif-

fer from the illustration.

Your vehicle is equipped with a side

impact air bag in each front seat.

The purpose of the air bag is to provide

the vehicle's driver and/or the front pas-

senger with additional protection than

that offered by the seat belt alone.

The side impact air bags are designed to

deploy during certain side-impact colli-

sions, depending on the crash severity,

angle, speed and point of impact.

The side air bags are not designed to

deploy in all side impact situations.

WARNING

Do not allow the passengers to lean

their heads or bodies onto doors,

put their arms on the doors, stretch

their arms out of the window, or

place objects between the doors

and passengers when they are

seated on seats equipped with side

and air bags.

ODM032043

OTQ036204

(Continued)

• Sitting improperly or out of posi-

tion can result in serious or fatal

injury in a crash. All occupants

should sit upright with the seat

back in an upright position, cen-

tred on the seat cushion with

their seat belt on, legs comfort-

ably extended and their feet on

the floor until the vehicle is

parked and the ignition key is

removed.

• The SRS air bag system must

deploy very rapidly to provide

protection in a crash. If an occu-

pant is out of position because of

not wearing a seat belt, the air

bag may forcefully contact the

occupant causing serious or fatal

injuries.

351

Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING

• The side impact air bag is sup-

plemental to the driver's and the

passenger's seat belt systems

and is not a substitute for them.

Therefore your seat belts must be

worn at all times while the vehicle

is in motion. The air bags deploy

in certain side impact conditions

severe enough to cause signifi-

cant injury to the vehicle occu-

pants.

• For best protection from the side

impact air bag system and to

avoid being injured by the

deploying side impact air bag,

both front seat occupants should

sit in an upright position with the

seat belt properly fastened. The

passenger's arms and hands

should be placed on their laps.

(Continued)

• Do not use any accessory seat

covers.

• Use of seat covers could reduce

or prevent the effectiveness of

the system.

• Do not install any accessories on

the side or near the side impact

air bag.

• Do not place any objects over the

air bag or between the air bag

and yourself.

• Do not place any objects (an

umbrella, bag, etc.) between the

front door and the front seat. Such

objects may become dangerous

projectiles and cause injury if the

supplemental side impact air bag

inflates.

• To prevent unexpected deploy-

ment of the side impact air bag that

may result in personal injury, avoid

impact to the side impact sensor

when the ignition key is on.

• If the seat or seat cover is dam-

aged, we recommend that the

system be serviced by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

Safety features of your vehicle

523

Air bag system operation

(deployment/non deployment)

There are many types of accidents in

which the air bag would not be expect-

ed to provide additional protection.

These include rear impacts, second or

third collisions in multiple impact

accidents, as well as low speed

impacts.

Air bag collision sensors

(1) SRS control module

(2) Front impact sensor

(3) Side impact sensors

OTQ036026/OTQ037027/OTQ037028/OTQ036202

353

Safety features of your vehicle

Air bag inflation conditions

Front air bags

Front air bags are designed to inflate in a

frontal collision depending on the intensi-

ty, speed or angles of impact of the front

collision.

1TQA2084/H

(Continued)

• Problems may arise if the sensor

installation angles are changed

due to the deformation of the

front bumper, body. We recom-

mend that the system be serviced

by a HYUNDAI authorised repair-

er.

• Your vehicle has been designed

to absorb impact and deploy the

air bag(s) in certain collisions.

Installing bumper guards or

replacing a bumper with non-gen-

uine parts may adversely affect

your vehicle’s collision and air

bag deployment performance.

WARNING

• Do not hit or allow any objects to

impact the locations where air

bags or sensors are installed.

This may cause unexpected air

bag deployment, which could

result in serious personal injury

or death.

• If the installation location or

angle of the sensors is altered in

any way, the air bags may deploy

when they should not or they may

not deploy when they should,

causing severe injury or death.

Therefore, do not try to perform

maintenance on or around the air

bag sensors. We recommend that

the system be serviced by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

(Continued)

Safety features of your vehicle

543

Although the front air bags (driver’s and

front passenger’s air bags) are designed

to inflate only in frontal collisions, they

also may inflate in other types of colli-

sions if the front impact sensors detect a

sufficient impact.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted by

bumps or objects on unimproved roads,

the air bags may deploy. Drive carefully

on unimproved roads or on surfaces not

designed for vehicle traffic to prevent

unintended air bag deployment.

Air bag non-inflation conditions

• In certain low-speed collisions the air

bags may not deploy. The air bags are

designed not to deploy in such cases

because they may not provide benefits

beyond the protection of the seat belts

in such collisions.

• Frontal air bags are not designed to

inflate in rear collisions, because occu-

pants are moved backward by the

force of the impact. In this case, inflat-

ed air bags would not be able to pro-

vide any additional benefit.

1TQA2086/H OTQ036087/H

355

Safety features of your vehicle

• Front air bags may not inflate in side

impact collisions, because occupants

move to the direction of the collision,

and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag

deployment would not provide addi-

tional occupant protection.

• In an angled collision, the force of

impact may direct the occupants in a

direction where the air bags would not

be able to provide any additional bene-

fit, and thus the sensors may not

deploy any air bags.

• Just before impact, drivers often brake

heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the

front portion of the vehicle causing it to

“ride” under a vehicle with a higher

ground clearance. Air bags may not

inflate in this "under-ride" situation

because deceleration forces that are

detected by sensors may be signifi-

cantly reduced by such “under-ride”

collisions.

1TQA2089/H1TQA2088/H OTQ052215/H

Safety features of your vehicle

563

• Air bags may not inflate in rollover acci-

dents because air bag deployment

would not provide protection to the

occupants.

• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle

collides with objects such as utility

poles or trees, where the point of

impact is concentrated to one area and

the full force of the impact is not deliv-

ered to the sensors.

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-free

and so there are no parts you can safely

service by yourself. If the SRS air bag

warning light does not illuminate or if it

continuously remains on, we recommend

that the system be inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

1TQA2091 1TQA2092/H

357

Safety features of your vehicle

Additional safety precautions

• Never let passengers ride in the

cargo area or on top of a folded-

down back seat. All occupants should

sit upright, fully back in their seats with

their seat belts on and their feet on the

floor.

• Passengers should not move out of

or change seats whilst the vehicle is

moving. A passenger who is not wear-

ing a seat belt during a crash or emer-

gency stop can be thrown against the

inside of the vehicle, against other

occupants, or out of the vehicle.

• Each seat belt is designed to

restrain one occupant. If more than

one person uses the same seat belt,

they could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

• Do not use any accessories on seat

belts. Devices claiming to improve

occupant comfort or reposition the seat

belt can reduce the protection provided

by the seat belt and increase the

chance of serious injury in a crash.

• Passengers should not place hard

or sharp objects between them-

selves and the air bags. Carrying

hard or sharp objects on your lap or in

your mouth can result in injuries if an

air bag inflates.

WARNING

• Modification to SRS components

or wiring, including the addition

of any kind of badges to the pad

covers or modifications to the

body structure, can adversely

affect SRS performance and lead

to possible injury.

• For cleaning the air bag pad cov-

ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or

one which has been moistened

with plain water. Solvents or

cleaners could adversely affect

the air bag covers and proper

deployment of the system.

• No objects should be placed over

or near the air bag modules on

the steering wheel, instrument

panel, and the front passenger's

panel above the glove box,

because any such object could

cause harm if the vehicle is in a

crash severe enough to cause

the air bags to inflate.

• If the air bags inflate, we recom-

mend that the system be

replaced by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

(Continued)

• Do not tamper with or disconnect

SRS wiring, or other components

of the SRS system. Doing so

could result in injury, due to acci-

dental inflation of the air bags or

by rendering the SRS inopera-

tive.

• If components of the air bag sys-

tem must be discarded, or if the

vehicle must be scrapped, certain

safety precautions must be

observed. A HYUNDAI authorised

repairer knows these precautions

and can give you the necessary

information. Failure to follow

these precautions and proce-

dures could increase the risk of

personal injury.

• If your car was flooded and has

soaked carpeting or water on the

flooring, you shouldn't try to start

the engine; we recommend that

you contact a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

Safety features of your vehicle

583

• Keep occupants away from the air

bag covers. All occupants should sit

upright, fully back in their seats with

their seat belts on and their feet on the

floor. If occupants are too close to the

air bag covers, they could be injured if

the air bags inflate.

• Do not attach or place objects on or

near the air bag covers. Any object

attached to or placed on the front air

bag covers could interfere with the

proper operation of the air bags.

• Do not modify the front seats.

Modification of the front seats could

interfere with the operation of the sup-

plemental restraint system sensing

components.

• Do not place items under the front

seats. Placing items under the front

seats could interfere with the operation

of the supplemental restraint system

sensing components and wiring har-

nesses.

• Never hold an infant or child on your

lap. The infant or child could be seri-

ously injured or killed in the event of a

crash. All infants and children should

be properly restrained in appropriate

child safety seats or seat belts in the

rear seat.

Adding equipment to or modify-

ing your air bag-equipped vehicle

If you modify your vehicle by changing

your vehicle's frame, bumper system,

front end or side sheet metal or ride

height, this may affect the operation of

your vehicle's air bag system.

WARNING

• Sitting improperly or out of posi-

tion can cause occupants to be

shifted too close to a deploying

air bag, strike the interior struc-

ture or be thrown from the vehicle

resulting in serious injury or

death.

• Always sit upright with the seat-

back in an upright position, cen-

tred on the seat cushion with

your seat belt on, legs comfort-

ably extended and your feet on

the floor.

359

Safety features of your vehicle

Air bag warning label

Air bag warning labels are attached to

alert driver and passengers (including

children) of the potential risks from the air

bag system.

Note that these government warnings

focus on the risk to children, we also

wants you to be aware of the risks which

adults are exposed to. Those have been

described in previous pages.

OTQ037029

* : if equipped

Keys / 4-2

Remote keyless entry / 4-4

Theft-alarm system / 4-7

Door locks / 4-9

Tailgate / 4-14

Windows / 4-17

Bonnet / 4-22

Fuel filler lid / 4-24

Sunroof / 4-27

Steering wheel / 4-32

Mirrors / 4-35

Instrument cluster / 4-39

Rear parking assist system / 4-60

Hazard warning flasher / 4-63

Rearview camera / 4-63

Lighting / 4-64

Wipers and washers / 4-69

Interior light / 4-72

Defroster / 4-74

Manual climate control system / 4-75

Automatic climate control system / 4-88

Windscreen defrosting and defogging / 4-100

Storage compartment / 4-104

Interior features / 4-107

Audio system / 4-131

Features of your vehicle

Record your key number

The key code number is

stamped or printed on

the bar code tag

attached to the key set.

Should you lose your

keys, we recommend that you contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Remove the key code tag and store it in

a safe place. Also, record the code num-

ber and keep it in a safe and handy

place, but not in the vehicle.

Key operations

Used to start the engine, lock and unlock

the doors.

KEYS

WARNING

We recommend that you use parts

for replacement from a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

If an aftermarket key is used, the

ignition switch may not return to

ON after START. If this happens,

the starter will continue to operate

causing damage to the starter

motor and possible fire due to

excessive current in the wiring.

WARNING - Ignition key

Leaving children unattended in a

vehicle with the ignition key is dan-

gerous even if the key is not in the

ignition switch is ACC or ON posi-

tion. Children copy adults and they

could place the key in the ignition

switch.

The ignition key would enable chil-

dren to operate power windows or

other controls, or even make the

vehicle move, which could result in

serious bodily injury or even death.

Never leave the keys in your vehicle

with unsupervised children, when

the engine is running.

Features of your vehicle

Immobiliser system

Your vehicle may be equipped with an

electronic engine immobiliser system to

reduce the risk of unauthorised vehicle

use.

Your immobiliser system is comprised of

a small transponder in the ignition key

and electronic devices inside the vehicle.

With the immobiliser system, whenever

you insert your ignition key into the igni-

tion switch and turn it to ON, it checks

and determines and verifies if the ignition

key is valid or not.

If the key is determined to be valid, the

engine will start.

If the key is determined to be invalid, the

engine will not start.

To deactivate the immobiliser sys-

tem:

Insert the ignition key into the key cylin-

der and turn it to the ON position.

To activate the immobiliser system:

Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.

The immobiliser system activates auto-

matically. Without a valid ignition key for

your vehicle, the engine will not start.

✽

NOTICE

The immobiliser system detects the

presence of a key in the ignition switch.

To ensure the system performs correct-

ly, the keys should be separated after

delivery of the vehicle so that only one

key is near the ignition switch when

using the vehicle. The engine may not

start or may stop shortly after starting if

more than one key is near the ignition

switch.

✽

NOTICE

If you need additional keys or lose your

keys, we recommend that you consult a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

The transponder in your ignition

key is an important part of the

immobiliser system. It is designed

to give years of trouble-free service,

however you should avoid expo-

sure to moisture, static electricity

and rough handling. Immobiliser

system malfunction could occur.

CAUTION

Do not change, alter or adjust the

immobiliser system because it

could cause the immobiliser sys-

tem to malfunction.We recommend

that the system be serviced by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Malfunctions caused by improper

alterations, adjustments or modifi-

cations to the immobiliser system

are not covered by your vehicle

manufacturer warranty.

CAUTION

Do not put metal accessories near

the ignition switch.

The engine may not start for the

metal accessories may interrupt the

transponder signal from normally

transmitting.

WARNING

In order to prevent theft of your

vehicle, do not leave spare keys

anywhere in your vehicle. Your

immobiliser password is a cus-

tomer unique password and should

be kept confidential. Do not leave

this number anywhere in your vehi-

cle.

Features of your vehicle

Remote keyless entry system

operations

Lock

All doors (and tailgate) are locked if the

lock/unlock button (1) is pressed when a

front door is unlocked.

If all doors (and tailgate) are closed, the

hazard warning lights blink once to indi-

cate that all doors (and tailgate) are

locked.

However, if any door (or tailgate) remains

open, the hazard warning lights will not

operate. If all doors (and tailgate) are

closed after the lock button is pressed,

the hazard warning lights blink.

Unlock

All doors (and tailgate) are unlocked if

the lock/unlock button (1) is pressed

when both front doors are locked.

The hazard warning lights will blink twice

again to indicate that all doors (and tail-

gate) are unlocked.

After depressing this button, the doors

(and tailgate) will be locked automatical-

ly unless you open any door within 30

seconds.

• To unfold the key, press the release

button then the key will unfold auto-

matically.

• To fold the key, fold the key manually

whilst pressing the release button.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)

OTQ047002

■ Type A

OTQ045220

■ Type B

CAUTION

Do not fold the key without press-

ing the release button. This may

damage the key.

Features of your vehicle

Transmitter precautions

✽

NOTICE

The transmitter will not work if any of

following occur:

• The ignition key is in ignition switch.

• You exceed the operating distance

limit (about 30 feet [10 m]).

• The battery in the transmitter is

weak.

• Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal.

• The weather is extremely cold.

• The transmitter is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station or

an airport which can interfere with

normal operation of the transmitter.

When the transmitter does not work

correctly, open and close the door with

the ignition key. If you have a problem

with the transmitter, we recommend

that you contact a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

(Continued)

• If the transmitter is in close proximity

to your cell phone or smart phone, the

signal from the transmitter could be

blocked by normal operation of your

cell phone or smart phone. This is

especially important when the phone

is active such as making call, receiving

calls, text messaging, and/or sending/

receiving emails. Avoid placing the

transmitter and your cell phone or

smart phone in the same pants or

jacket pocket and maintain adequate

distance between the two devices.

CAUTION

Keep the transmitter away from

water or any liquid. If the keyless

entry system is inoperative due to

exposure to water or liquids, it will

not be covered by your manufactur-

er vehicle warranty.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate

the equipment. If the keyless entry

system is inoperative due to

changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance, it will

not be covered by your manufactur-

er’s vehicle warranty.

CAUTION

Keep the transmitter away from

electromagnetic materials that

blocks electromagnetic waves to

the key surface.

Features of your vehicle

Battery replacement

The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium bat-

tery which will normally last for several

years. When replacement is necessary,

use the following procedure.

1. Remove the screw (1) using a cross-

tip screwdriver.

2. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen-

tly pry open the transmitter centre

cover.

3. Remove the battery cover (2).

4. Replace the battery with a new one.

When replacing the battery, make sure

the battery position.

5. Install the battery in the reverse order

of removal.

CAUTION

• The keyless entry system trans-

mitter is designed to give you

years of trouble-free use, howev-

er it can malfunction if exposed to

moisture or static electricity.

If you are unsure how to use your

transmitter or replace the battery,

we recommend that you contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

• Using the wrong battery can

cause the transmitter to malfunc-

tion. Be sure to use the correct

battery.

• To avoid damaging the transmit-

ter, don't drop it, get it wet, or

expose it to heat or sunlight.

• An inappropriately disposed bat-

tery can be harmful to the envi-

ronment and human health.

Dispose the battery according to

your local law(s) or regulation.

OLM042302

OTQ047003G

■ Type A

■ Type B

Features of your vehicle

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

This system is designed to provide pro-

tection from unauthorised entry into the

car. This system is operated in three

stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the

second is the "Theft-alarm" stage, and

the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-

gered, the system provides an audible

alarm with blinking of the hazard warning

lights.

Armed stage

Park the car and stop the engine. Arm

the system as described below.

1. Remove the ignition key from the igni-

tion switch and exit the vehicle.

2. Make sure that all doors (and tailgate)

and engine bonnet are closed and

latched.

3. Lock the doors using the transmitter of

the keyless entry system.

After completion of the steps above, the

hazard warning lights will blink once to

indicate that the system is armed.

If any door (or tailgate) or engine bonnet

remains open, the hazard warning lights

will not blink and the theft-alarm will not

arm. If all doors (and tailgate) and engine

bonnet are closed after the lock button is

pressed, the hazard warning lights blink

once.

✽

NOTICE

The theft-alarm system by the key can

be activated by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer. If you want this feature, we

recommend that you consult a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Do not arm the system until all pas-

sengers have left the vehicle. If the

system is armed whilst a passen-

ger(s) remains in the vehicle, the

alarm may be activated when the

remaining passenger(s) leave the

vehicle. If any door (or tailgate) or

engine bonnet is opened within 30

seconds after the system enters the

armed stage, the system is disarmed

to prevent an unnecessary alarm.

Armed

stage

Theft-alarm

stage

Disarmed

stage

Features of your vehicle

Theft-alarm stage

The alarm will be activated if any of the

following occurs whilst the system is

armed.

• A front or rear door is opened without

using the transmitter.

• The tailgate is opened without using

the transmitter.

• The engine bonnet is opened.

The horn will sound and the hazard

warning lights will blink continuously for

approximately 30 seconds. To turn off the

system, unlock the doors with the trans-

mitter.

Disarmed stage

The system will be disarmed when the

doors (and tailgate) are unlocked with the

transmitter.

After depressing the unlock button, the

hazard warning lights will blink twice to

indicate that the system is disarmed.

After depressing the unlock button, if any

door (or tailgate) is not opened within 30

seconds, the system will be rearmed.

✽

NOTICE

• If the system is not disarmed with the

transmitter, insert the key into the

ignition switch and start the engine.

Then the system will be disarmed.

• If you lose your keys, we recommend

that you consult a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

CAUTION

Do not change, alter or adjust the

theft-alarm system because it could

cause the theft-alarm system to

malfunction. We recommend that

the system be serviced by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Malfunctions caused by improper

alterations, adjustments or modifi-

cations to the theft-alarm system

are not covered by your vehicle

manufacturer warranty.

Features of your vehicle

Operating door locks from out-

side the vehicle

• Turn the key toward the rear of the

vehicle to lock and toward the front of

the vehicle to unlock.

• If you lock/unlock the driver’s door with

a key, all vehicle doors will lock/unlock

automatically. (if equipped)

• If you lock the front passenger’s door

with a key all vehicle doors will lock

automatically. (if equipped)

• Doors can also be locked and

unlocked with the transmitter. (if

equipped)

• Once the doors are unlocked, they may

be opened by pulling the door handle.

• When closing the door, push the door

by hand. Make sure that doors are

closed securely.

✽

NOTICE

• In cold and wet climates, door lock

and door mechanisms may not work

properly due to freezing conditions.

• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-

ple times in rapid succession with

either the vehicle key or door lock

switch, the system may stop operating

temporarily in order to protect the

circuit and prevent damage to system

components.

• Once the rear doors are unlocked, they

may be opened by pulling the door

handle and sliding the door towards

the rear of the vehicle.

• When the rear door is fully open, the

door will lock into an open position. To

close the door, pull out the door handle

and slide the door towards the front of

vehicle.

DOOR LOCKS

OTQ047005/H

Unlock

Lock

OTQ047006/H

Rear sliding doors

WARNING

• If you don't close the door

securely, the door may open

again.

• Be careful that someone's body

and hands are not trapped when

closing the door.

Features of your vehicle

104

• To lock a door without the key, push the

inside door lock button (1) or central

door lock switch (2

)

to the “Lock” posi-

tion and close the door (3).

• If you lock the door with the central

door lock switch (2), all vehicle doors

will lock automatically. (if equipped)

✽

NOTICE

Always remove the ignition key, engage

the parking brake, close all windows

and lock all doors when leaving your

vehicle unattended.

WARNING

When the rear sliding door is not

fully open, it is not latched and may

move unintentionally. This could

result in a serious injury.

CAUTION

The left sliding door cannot be

opened when the fuel filler lid is

open. However, if the fuel filler lid is

opened after the door is opened

slightly, the left sliding door can be

slide rearward. Close the left sliding

door to prevent possible damage to

the door or the fuel filler lid.

OTQ047007R

Front door

OTQ047008

Rear sliding door

411

Features of your vehicle

Operating door locks from inside

the vehicle

With the door lock button

• To unlock a door, push the door lock

button (1) to the “Unlock” position. The

red mark (2) on button will be visible.

• To lock a door, push the door lock but-

ton (1) to the “Lock” position. If the door

is locked properly, the red mark (2) on

the door lock button will not be visible.

• To open a door, pull the door handle

(3) outward.

• If the inner door handle of the driver’s

door is pulled when the door lock but-

ton is in lock position, the button is

unlocked and door opens. (if equipped)

• Front doors cannot be locked if the

ignition key is in the ignition switch and

any front door is open.

OTQ047009R

Front door

OTQ047010

Rear sliding door

Unlock

Lock

WARNING

- Door lock mal-

function

If a power door lock ever fails to

function whilst you are in the vehi-

cle, try one or more of the following

techniques to exit:

• Operate the door unlock feature

repeatedly (both electronic and

manual) whilst simultaneously

pulling on the door handle.

• Operate the other door locks and

handles, front and rear.

• Lower a front window and use the

key to unlock the door from out-

side.

• Move to the cargo area and open

the tailgate. (if equipped)

Features of your vehicle

124

With central door lock switch

(if equipped)

Operate by depressing the central door

lock switch.

• When pushing down on the portion (1)

of the switch, all vehicle doors will lock.

• When pushing down on the portion (2)

of the switch, all vehicle doors will

unlock.

• If the key is in the ignition switch and

any front door is open, the doors will

not lock when the portion (1) of central

door lock switch is pressed.

OTQ047011R

WARNING

- Unlocked

vehicles

Leaving your vehicle unlocked can

invite theft or possible harm to you

or others from someone hiding in

your vehicle whilst you are gone.

Always remove the ignition key,

engage the parking brake, close all

windows and lock all doors when

leaving your vehicle unattended.

WARNING - Unattended

children

An enclosed vehicle can become

extremely hot, causing death or

severe injury to unattended chil-

dren or animals who cannot escape

the vehicle. Furthermore, children

might operate features of the vehi-

cle that could injure them, or they

could encounter other harm, possi-

bly from someone gaining entry to

the vehicle. Never leave children or

animals unattended in your vehicle.

WARNING -

Doors

• The doors should always be fully

closed and locked whilst the

vehicle is in motion to prevent

accidental opening of the door.

Locked doors will also discour-

age potential intruders when the

vehicle stops or slows.

• Be careful when opening doors

and watch for vehicles, motorcy-

cles, bicycles or pedestrians

approaching the vehicle in the

path of the door. Opening a door

when something is approaching

can cause damage or injury.

413

Features of your vehicle

Impact sensing door unlock sys-

tem (if equipped)

All doors will be automatically unlocked

when the impact is delivered to impact

sensors whilst the ignition switch ON.

However, the doors may not be unlocked

if mechanical problems occur with the

door lock system or battery.

Speed sensing door lock system

(if equipped)

When the speed of the vehicle keeps

above 25 mph (40 km/h) for 1 second, it

will automatically lock all doors. For acti-

vation of this fearture, we recommend

that you contact a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

✽

NOTICE

A HYUNDAI authorised repairer can

select some auto door lock/unlock fea-

tures as follows;

• Speed sensing auto door locking

• Auto door unlock when the ignition

key is removed from the ignition

switch

If you want to select a door lock/unlock

feature, we recommend that you consult

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Child-protector rear door lock

The child safety lock is provided to help

prevent children from accidentally open-

ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle.

The rear door safety locks should be

used whenever children are in the vehi-

cle.

1. Open the rear door.

2. Push the child safety lock located on

the front edge of the door to the lock

( ) position. When the child safety

lock is in the lock position, the rear

door will not open even though the

inner door handle is pulled.

3. Close the rear door.

To open the rear door, pull the outside

door handle (1).

Even though the doors may be unlocked,

the rear door will not open by pulling the

inner door handle until the rear door child

safety lock is unlocked ( ).

WARNING - Rear door

locks

If children accidentally open the

rear doors whilst the vehicle is in

motion, they could fall out and be

severely injured or killed. To pre-

vent children from opening the rear

doors from the inside, the rear door

safety locks should be used when-

ever children are in the vehicle.

OTQ047012

Features of your vehicle

144

Opening the tailgate

• The tailgate is locked or unlocked

when all doors are locked or unlocked

with the key, transmitter or central door

lock switch. (if equipped)

• The tailgate can also be locked and

unlocked with the key if the vehicle is

equipped with a key hole on the tail-

gate.

• If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened

by pressing the handle switch and

pulling the handle up. (Type A)

• If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened

by pulling the handle. (Type B)

✽

NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, door lock and

door mechanisms may not work proper-

ly due to freezing conditions.

If your vehicle is equipped with twin

swing type tail gates, you may fully open

(if equipped) as follows ;

1. Open the tail gate.

2. Remove the pin from the bracket hole

and insert the pin into the pin hole.

3. Open the tail gate fully.

TAILGATE

WARNING

The tailgate swings upward. Make

sure no objects or people are near

the rear of the vehicle when open-

ing the tailgate.

CAUTION

Make certain that you close the tail-

gate before driving your vehicle.

Possible damage may occur to the

tailgate lift cylinders and attached

hardware if the tailgate is not

closed prior to driving.

OTQ047212

OTQ047013

OTQ047013G

■ Type A

■ Type B

415

Features of your vehicle

4. After use, before closing the tail gate,

pull out the pin from the pin hole.

5. Align the checker arm hole and the tail

gate bracket hole, and insert the pin

into the bracket hole.

6. Close the tail gate.

Closing the tailgate

To close the tailgate, lower and push

down the tailgate firmly. Make sure that

the tailgate is securely latched.

WARNING - Exhaust

fumes

If you drive with the tailgate open,

you will draw dangerous exhaust

fumes into your vehicle which can

cause serious injury or death to

vehicle occupants.

If you must drive with the tailgate

open, keep the air vents and all win-

dows open so that additional out-

side air comes into the vehicle.

OTQ047213

CAUTION

Insert the pin into the bracket hole

before closing the tail gate. Or the

tail gate checker and/or vehicle

damage is possible and a danger-

ous situation may occur.

Features of your vehicle

164

Emergency tailgate safety release

(if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with the emer-

gency tailgate safety release lever locat-

ed on the bottom of the tailgate.

When someone is inadvertently locked in

the luggage compartment, if the lever is

pushed, the tailgate latch mechanism is

released and the tailgate is opened by

pushing rearward.

WARNING

• For emergencies, be fully aware

of the location of the emergency

tailgate safety release lever in

this vehicle and how to open the

tailgate if you are accidentally

locked in the luggage compart-

ment.

• No one should be allowed to

occupy the luggage compartment

of the vehicle at any time. The

luggage compartment is a very

dangerous location in the event

of a crash.

• Use the release lever for emer-

gencies only. Use extreme cau-

tion, especially whilst the vehicle

is in motion.

WARNING

- Rear cargo

area

Occupants should never ride in the

rear cargo area where no restraints

are available. To avoid injury in the

event of an accident or sudden

stops, occupants should always be

properly restrained.

OTQ047015

OTQ047015G

■ Type A

■ Type B

417

Features of your vehicle

(1) Driver’s door power window switch

(2) Front passenger’s door power win-

dow switch

(3) Window opening and closing

(4) Automatic power window down

(Driver’s window, if equipped)

(5) Rear seat window (Type A)

(6) Rear seat window (Type B)

✽

NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, power windows

may not work properly due to freezing

conditions.

WINDOWS

OTQ047016R

■ Type A ■ Type B

Features of your vehicle

184

Power windows (if equipped)

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position for power windows to operate.

Each door has a power window switch

that controls the door's window. The driv-

er has a power window lock switch which

can block the operation of passenger

windows. The power windows can be

operated for approximately 30 seconds

after the ignition key is removed or turned

to the ACC or LOCK position. However, if

the front doors are opened, the power

windows cannot be operated within the

30 second period after the ignition key

removal.

✽

NOTICE

Whilst driving, if you notice buffeting

and pulsation (wind shock) with either

side window open, you should open the

opposite window slightly to reduce the

condition.

Type A

Window opening and closing

(if equipped)

The driver’s door has a master power

window switch that controls all the win-

dows in the vehicle.

To open or close a window, press down

or pull up the front portion of the corre-

sponding switch to the first detent posi-

tion (3).

Type B

Auto down window

(Driver’s window, if equipped)

Depressing the power window switch

momentarily to the second detent posi-

tion (4) completely lowers the driver’s

window even when the switch is

released. To stop the window at the

desired position whilst the window is in

operation, pull up the switch momentarily

to the opposite direction of the window

movement.

OTQ047203R OTQ047204R

419

Features of your vehicle

Type C

Auto up/down window

(Driver’s window, if equipped)

Depressing or pulling up the power win-

dow switch momentarily to the second

detent position (4) completely lowers or

lifts the window even when the switch is

released. To stop the window at the

desired position whilst the window is in

operation, pull up or depress and release

the switch to the opposite direction of the

movement.

CAUTION

• To prevent possible damage to

the power window system, do not

open or close two windows or

more at the same time. This will

also ensure the longevity of the

fuse.

• Never try to operate the main

switch on the driver's door and

the individual door window

switch in opposing directions at

the same time. If this is done, the

window will stop and cannot be

opened or closed.

WARNING -

Windows

• NEVER leave the keys in your

vehicle with unsupervised chil-

dren, when the engine is running.

• NEVER leave any child unattend-

ed in the vehicle. Even very

young children may inadvertently

cause the vehicle to move, entan-

gle themselves in the windows,

or otherwise injure themselves or

others.

• Always double check to make

sure all arms, hands, head and

other obstructions are safely out

of the way before closing a win-

dow.

• Do not allow children to play with

the power windows. Serious

injury can result from uninten-

tional window operation by the

child.

• Do not extend face or arms out-

side through the window opening

whilst driving.

OTQ047204R-1

Features of your vehicle

204

If the power window is not operated cor-

rectly, the automatic power window sys-

tem must be reset as follows:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.

2. Close driver’s window and continue

pulling up on driver’s power window

switch for at least 1 second after the

window is completely closed.

Automatic reversal

If the upward movement of the window is

blocked by an object or part of the body,

the window will detect the resistance and

will stop upward movement. The window

will then lower approximately 11.8 in. (30

cm) to allow the object to be cleared.

If the window detects the resistance

whilst the power window switch is pulled

up continuously, the window will stop

upward movement then lower approxi-

mately 1 in. (2.5 cm). And if the power

window switch is pulled up continuously

again within 5 seconds after the window

is lowered by the automatic window

reversal feature, the automatic window

reversal will not operate.

✽

NOTICE

The automatic reverse feature for the

driver’s window is only active when the

“auto up” feature is used by fully

pulling up the switch. The automatic

reverse feature will not operate if the

window is raised using the halfway posi-

tion on the power window switch.

Manual windows (if equipped)

To raise or lower the window, turn the

window regulator handle clockwise or

counterclockwise.

WARNING

When opening or closing the win-

dows, make sure your passenger's

arms, hands and body are safely

out of the way.

3FDA2015

WARNING

Always check for obstructions

before raising any window to avoid

injuries or vehicle damage. If an

object less than 0.16 in. (4 mm) in

diameter is caught between the

window glass and the upper win-

dow channel, the automatic reverse

window may not detect the resist-

ance and will not stop and reverse

direction.

421

Features of your vehicle

Rear seat window

(Type A, if equipped)

To open the window, move the window

whilst pressing the handle the direction

of the arrow.

Rear seat window

(Type B, if equipped)

To open the windows, pull the rear por-

tion of the latch out. Swing the latch for-

ward and out, then lock it into the open

position by pushing outward until you

hear a click. To close the windows, pull

the handle inward. Then push the handle

rearward until you hear a click.

✽

NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, rear quarter

panel windows may not work properly

due to freezing conditions.

OTQ047017 OTQ047018

Features of your vehicle

224

Opening the bonnet

1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the

bonnet. The bonnet should pop open

slightly.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the

bonnet slightly, pull the secondary

latch (1) inside of the bonnet centre

and lift the bonnet (2).

3.Pull the support rod from the bonnet.

4.Hold the bonnet open with the support

rod.

BONNET

OTQ047019R

OTQ047021

WARNING - Hot parts

Grasp the support rod in the area

wrapped in rubber. The rubber will

help prevent you from being burned

by hot metal when the engine is

hot.

WARNING

Open the bonnet after turning off

the engine on a flat surface, shift-

ing the shift lever to the P(Park)

position for automatic transmis-

sion and to the 1st(First) gear or

R(Reverse) for manual transmis-

sion, and setting the parking brake.

OTQ046020

423

Features of your vehicle

Closing the bonnet

1. Before closing the bonnet, check the

following:

• All filler caps in engine compartment

must be correctly installed.

• Gloves, rags or any other com-

bustible material must be removed

from the engine compartment.

2. Return the support rod to its clip to

prevent it from rattling.

3. Lower the bonnet until it is about 1 ft.

(30 cm) above the closed position and

let it drop. Make sure that it locks into

place.

WARNING -

Bonnet

• Before closing the bonnet,

ensure that all obstructions are

removed from the bonnet open-

ing. Closing the bonnet with an

obstruction present in the bonnet

opening may result in property

damage or severe personal

injury.

• Do not leave gloves, rags or any

other combustible material in the

engine compartment. Doing so

may cause a heat-induced fire.

WARNING

• Always double check to be sure

that the bonnet is firmly latched

before driving away. If it is not

latched, the bonnet could fly

open whilst the vehicle is being

driven, causing a total loss of vis-

ibility, which might result in an

accident.

• The support rod must be inserted

completely into the hole provided

in the bonnet whenever you

inspect the engine compartment.

This will prevent the bonnet from

falling and possibly injuring you.

• Do not move the vehicle with the

bonnet in the raised position, as

vision is obstructed and the bon-

net could fall or be damaged.

Features of your vehicle

244

D100100AUN

Opening the fuel filler lid

The fuel filler lid must be opened from

inside the vehicle by pushing the fuel

filler lid opener button located on the dri-

ver’s door.

✽

NOTICE

If the fuel filler lid will not open because

ice has formed around it, tap lightly or

push on the lid to break the ice and

release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If

necessary, spray around the lid with an

approved de-icer fluid (do not use radi-

ator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a

warm place and allow the ice to melt.

1. Stop the engine.

2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the fuel

filler lid opener button.

3. Pull the fuel filler lid (1) out to fully

open.

4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel tank

cap (2) counterclockwise.

5. Refuel as needed.

FUEL FILLER LID

OTQ047022R

CAUTION

The left sliding door cannot be

opened when the fuel filler lid is

open. However, if the fuel filler lid is

opened after the door is opened

slightly, the left sliding door can be

slide rearward. Close the left sliding

door to prevent possible damage to

the door or the fuel filler lid.

OTQ045414

425

Features of your vehicle

Closing the fuel filler lid

1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until

it “clicks”. This indicates that the cap is

securely tightened.

2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it light-

ly and make sure that it is securely

closed.

WARNING - Refuelling

• If pressurised fuel sprays out, it

can cover your clothes or skin

and thus subject you to the risk

of fire and burns. Always remove

the fuel cap carefully and slowly.

If the cap is venting fuel or if you

hear a hissing sound, wait until

the condition stops before com-

pletely removing the cap.

• Do not "top off" after the nozzle

automatically shuts off when

refuelling.

• Always check that the fuel cap is

installed securely to prevent fuel

spillage in the event of an acci-

dent.

(Continued)

• Do not get back into a vehicle

once you have begun refuelling

since you can generate static

electricity by touching, rubbing

or sliding against any item or fab-

ric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)

capable of producing static elec-

tricity. Static electricity discharge

can ignite fuel vapours resulting

in rapid burning. If you must re-

enter the vehicle, you should

once again eliminate potentially

dangerous static electricity dis-

charge by touching a metal part

of the vehicle, away from the fuel

filler neck, nozzle or other petrol

source.

• When using an approved

portable fuel container, be sure to

place the container on the

ground prior to refuelling. Static

electricity discharge from the

container can ignite fuel vapours

causing a fire. Once refuelling

has begun, contact with the vehi-

cle should be maintained until

the filling is complete. Use only

approved portable plastic fuel

containers designed to carry and

store fuel.

(Continued)

WARNING - Refuelling

dangers

Automotive fuels are flammable

materials. When refuelling, please

note the following guidelines care-

fully. Failure to follow these guide-

lines may result in severe personal

injury, severe burns or death by fire

or explosion.

• Read and follow all warning at the

fuel station facility.

• Before refuelling note the loca-

tion of the Emergency Fuel Shut-

Off, if available, at the fuel station

facility.

• Before touching the fuel nozzle,

you should eliminate potentially

dangerous static electricity dis-

charge by touching another metal

part of the vehicle, a safe dis-

tance away from the fuel filler

neck, nozzle, or other gas source.

(Continued)

Features of your vehicle

264

Emergency fuel filer lid release

If the fuel filler lid does not open using

the remote fuel filler lid release, you can

open it manually. Unsnap and remove the

panel in the cargo area. Pull the handle

outward slightly.

(Continued)

• Do not use mobile phones whilst

refuelling. Electric current and/or

electronic interference from

mobile phones can potentially

ignite fuel vapours causing a fire.

• When refuelling, always shut the

engine off. Sparks produced by

electrical components related to

the engine can ignite fuel

vapours causing a fire. Once

refuelling is complete, check to

make sure the filler cap and filler

door are securely closed, before

starting the engine.

• DO NOT use matches or a lighter

and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit

cigarette in your vehicle whilst at

a fuel station especially during

refuelling. Automotive fuel is

highly flammable and can, when

ignited, result in fire.

• If a fire breaks out during refu-

elling, leave the vicinity of the

vehicle, and immediately contact

the manager of the fuel station

and then contact the local fire

department. Follow any safety

instructions they provide.

CAUTION

• Make sure to refuel your vehicle

according to the "Fuel require-

ments" suggested in section 1.

• If the fuel filler cap requires

replacement, please make sure

that you use parts designed for

replacement in your vehicle. An

incorrect fuel filler cap can result

in a serious malfunction of the

fuel system or emission control

system. For more detailed infor-

mation, we recommend that you

contact a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

• Do not spill fuel on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Any type

of fuel spilled on painted surfaces

may damage the paint.

• After refuelling, make sure the

fuel cap is installed securely to

prevent fuel spillage in the event

of an accident.

CAUTION

Do not pull the handle excessively,

otherwise the luggage area trim or

release handle may be damaged.

OTQ047024G

427

Features of your vehicle

If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,

you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the

sunroof control button located on the

overhead console.

The sunroof can only be opened, closed,

or tilted when the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof

may not work properly due to freezing

conditions.

• After the vehicle is washed or in a rain-

storm, be sure to wipe off any water that

is on the sunroof before operating it.

SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

OTQ047025

OTQ047026

Rear (if equipped)

Front

CAUTION - Sunroof

control button

Do not continue to move the sun-

roof control button after the sunroof

is fully opened, closed, or tilted.

Damage to the motor or system

components could occur.

CAUTION

Make sure the sunroof is fully

closed when leaving your vehicle. If

the sunroof is opened, rain or snow

may leak through the sunroof and

wet the interior as well as cause

theft.

CAUTION - Sunroof motor

damage

To prevent damage to the sunroof,

periodically remove any dirt that

may accumulate on the guide rail.

WARNING

• Never adjust the sunroof or sun-

shade whilst driving. This could

result in loss of control and an

accident that may cause death,

serious injury, or property dam-

age.

• If you would like to carry items on

the roof using a cross bar, do not

operate the sunroof.

• When carrying cargo on the roof,

do not load heavy items above

the sunroof or glass roof.

• Do not allow children to operate

the sunroof.

CAUTION

Do not extend any luggage out side

the sunroof whilst driving.

Features of your vehicle

284

Sunshade

When opening the sunroof, the sunshade

will also open. Once the sunroof is

closed, the sunshade can be manually

closed.

Sliding the sunroof

To operate the front sunroof

To open the front sunroof, press the sun-

roof OPEN button (1).

To close the front sunroof, press the sun-

roof CLOSE button (2).

When you press the button over 0.5 sec-

onds, the one- touch slide function (if

equipped) operates. To stop the one-

touch slide function, press the sunroof

OPEN button (1) or the sunroof CLOSE

button (2) regardless of pressing the but-

ton (1) or (2).

CAUTION

Close the sunroof when driving

through dusty roads. Dust may

cause a malfunction of the vehicle

system.

OTQ047030

OTQ047025

OTQ047026

Rear (if equipped)

429

Features of your vehicle

To operate the rear sunroof

To open the rear sunroof, press the sun-

roof OPEN button (3).

To close the rear sunroof, press the sun-

roof CLOSE button (4).

When you press the button over 0.5 sec-

onds, the one- touch slide function (if

equipped) operates. To stop the one-

touch slide function, press the sunroof

OPEN button (3) or the sunroof CLOSE

button (4) regardless of pressing the but-

ton (3) or (4).

The sunroof will stop once at the first

detent position (150mm from the second

detent position). Press again the sunroof

OPEN button (3) to open all the way. The

sunroof will slide until the second detent

position. Then, the sunroof operates

whilst pressing the button.

❈ Whilst driving with the sunroof in an

open, open the sunroof at the first

detent position. It can slightly reduce the

wind buffeting or pulsation noise com-

pared to the second detent position.

Tilting the sunroof

(for front sunroof)

To tilt the sunroof when the sunroof com-

pletely closed, press the TILT UP but-

ton(1). When you press the TULT UP but-

ton over 0.5 seconds, the one-touch slide

function (if equipped) operates.

To close the sunroof, press the CLOSE

button (2).

OTQ045029

CAUTION - Sunroof motor

damage

If you try to open the sunroof when

the temperature is below freezing

or when the sunroof is covered with

snow or ice, the glass or the motor

could be damaged.

Features of your vehicle

304

Automatic reversal (for rear sunroof)

When you press the sunroof CLOSE but-

ton (4) over 0.5 seconds, the one- touch

slide function (if equipped) operates. To

stop the one-touch slide function, press

the sunroof OPEN button (3) or the sun-

roof CLOSE button (4) regardless of

pressing the button (3) or (4).

If an object or part of the body is detect-

ed whilst the sunroof glass is closing

automatically (one-touch slide function),

it will reverse the direction, and then

open again as regular space. However,

when the detected resistance in the sun-

roof is below average standard or you

press and hold the sunroof CLOSE but-

ton (4). It is manually operated (NO one-

touch slide function).

The automatic reversal function does not

work.

OTQ047028

WARNING - Sunroof

• Be careful that no head, hands

and body parts are obstructed by

a closing sunroof.

• Do not extend the face, neck,

arms or body outside the sunroof

whilst driving.

• Make sure your hands and head

are safely out of the way before

closing a sunroof.

• The sunroof, which is made of

glass, may break if the sufficient

impact is applied. In this case, in

an accident, any improperly-belt-

ed occupant may be tossed out

of the vehicle through the sun-

roof, possibly resulting injury. To

minimise all the possible acci-

dent risk, all occupants must be

properly belted and, in case of a

child, be fastened in a proper

child restraint.

CAUTION

• Periodically remove any dirt that

may accumulate on the guide rail.

• If you drive with the sunroof

opened right after a car wash or

rain, water may get inside the

vehicle.

WARNING - Roof cargo

Do not operate the sun roof whilst

using the roof rack to transport

cargo. This may cause the cargo to

come loose and distract the driver.

431

Features of your vehicle

Resetting the sunroof

Sunroof needs to be reset if (in the fol-

lowings)

- Battery is discharged or disconnected

or the related fuse has been replaced

or disconnected.

- The one-touch sliding function of the

sunroof does not normally operate.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.

2. Close the sunshade and sunroof com-

pletely if opened.

3. Release the sunroof CLOSE button.

4. Press the sunroof CLOSE button

(about 10 seconds) until the sunroof

moves a little. Then, release the sun-

roof CLOSE button.

5. Press the sunroof CLOSE button

again within 5 seconds. The sunroof is

automatically initialized with the open-

ing and closing operation. Then,

release the sunroof CLOSE button.

* The front and the rear sunroof should

be reset separately.

✽

NOTICE

If you do not reset the sunroof, it may

not work properly.

Features of your vehicle

324

WARNING

• Never adjust the angle of the

steering wheel whilst driving. You

may lose steering control and

cause severe personal injury,

death or accidents.

• After adjusting, push the steering

wheel both up and down to be

certain it is locked in position.

Power steering

Power steering uses energy from the

engine to assist you in steering the vehi-

cle. If the engine is off or if the power

steering system becomes inoperative,

the vehicle may still be steered, but it will

require increased steering effort.

Should you notice any change in the

effort required to steer during normal

vehicle operation, we recommend that

the system be checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

✽

NOTICE

If the power steering drive belt breaks

or if the power steering pump malfunc-

tions, the steering effort will greatly

increase.

✽

NOTICE

If the vehicle is parked for extended

periods outside in cold weather (below

-10°C/14°F), the power steering may

require increased effort when the engine

is first started. This is caused by

increased fluid viscosity due to the cold

weather and does not indicate a mal-

function.

When this happens, increase the engine

RPM by depressing accelerator until the

RPM reaches 1,500 rpm then release or

let the engine idle for two or three min-

utes to warm up the fluid.

Adjustable steering column

The adjustable steering column permits

adjustment of the rake of the steering

wheel for the convenience of the driver.

The position of the steering wheel should

be adjusted for maximum comfort and

control whilst permitting a clear view of

the instrument panel.

STEERING WHEEL

CAUTION

Never hold the steering wheel

against a stop (extreme right or left

turn) for more than 5 seconds with

the engine running. Holding the

steering wheel for more than 5 sec-

onds in either position may cause

damage to the power steering

pump.

433

Features of your vehicle

To change the steering wheel angle, pull

down the lock-release lever (1), adjust

the steering wheel to the desired angle

(2), then pull up the lock-release lever to

lock the steering wheel in place. Be sure

to adjust the steering wheel to the

desired position before driving.

Heated steering wheel

(if equipped)

With the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion, pressing the heated steering wheel

button warms the steering wheel.

The indicator on the button will illuminate.

To turn the heated steering wheel off,

press the button once again. The indica-

tor on the button will turn off.

✽

NOTICE

The heated steering wheel will turn off

automatically approximately 30 minutes

after the heated steering wheel is turned

on.

OTQ047035R OTQ045257

CAUTION

Do not install any grip to operate

the steering wheel. This causes

damage to the heated steering

wheel system.

Features of your vehicle

344

Horn

To sound the horn, press the horn sym-

bol on your steering wheel.

Check the horn regularly to be sure it

operates properly.

✽

NOTICE

To sound the horn, press the area indi-

cated by the horn symbol on your steer-

ing wheel (see illustration). The horn

will operate only when this area is

pressed.

CAUTION

Do not strike the horn severely to

operate it, or hit it with your fist.

Do not press on the horn with a

sharp-pointed object.

OTQ047036

435

Features of your vehicle

Inside rearview mirror

Adjust the rearview mirror to centre on

the view through the rear window. Make

this adjustment before you start driving.

Day/night rearview mirror

Make this adjustment before you start

driving and whilst the day/night lever is in

the day position.

Pull the day/night lever toward you to

reduce glare from the headlights of vehi-

cles behind you during night driving.

Remember that you lose some rearview

clarity in the night position.

Electric chromic mirror (ECM)

(if equipped)

The electric rearview mirror automatical-

ly controls the glare from the headlights

of the car behind you in nighttime or low

light driving conditions. The sensor

mounted in the mirror senses the light

level around the vehicle, and automati-

cally controls the headlight glare from

vehicles behind you.

When the engine is running, the glare is

automatically controlled by the sensor

mounted in the rearview mirror.

Whenever the shift lever is shifted into

reverse (R), the mirror will automatically

go to the brightest setting in order to

improve the drivers view behind the vehi-

cle.

MIRRORS

WARNING - Rear visibility

Do not place objects in the rear

seat or cargo area which would

interfere with your vision out the

rear window.

OTQ047037G

CAUTION

When cleaning the mirror, use a

paper towel or similar material

dampened with glass cleaner. Do

not spray glass cleaner directly on

the mirror as that may cause the liq-

uid cleaner to enter the mirror hous-

ing.

Day

Night

WARNING

Do not modify the inside mirror and

do not install a wide mirror. It could

result in injury, during an accident

or deployment of the air bag.

Features of your vehicle

364

To operate the electric rearview mirror:

• Press the on/off button (1) to turn the

automatic dimming function on. The

mirror indicator light will illuminate.

Press the on/off button to turn the auto-

matic dimming function off. The mirror

indicator light will turn off.

• The mirror defaults to the ON position

whenever the ignition switch is turned

on.

Outside rearview mirror

Be sure to adjust mirror angles before

driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with both left-

hand and right-hand outside rearview

mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted

remotely with the remote switch (if

equipped). The mirror heads can be fold-

ed back to prevent damage during an

automatic car wash or when passing in a

narrow street.

OTQ027002G OTQ047038G/H

Indicator Sensor

WARNING -

Rearview mir-

rors

• The right outside rearview mirror

is convex. In some countries, the

left outside rearview mirror is

also convex. Objects seen in the

mirror are closer than they

appear.

• Use your interior rearview mirror

or direct observation to deter-

mine the actual distance of fol-

lowing vehicles when changing

lanes.

437

Features of your vehicle

Remote control (if equipped)

The electric remote control mirror switch

allows you to adjust the position of the

left and right outside rearview mirrors. To

adjust the position of either mirror, push

the switch (1) to R or L to select the right

side mirror or the left side mirror, then

press a corresponding point on the mirror

adjustment control to position the select-

ed mirror up, down, left or right.

After adjustment, put the switch into neu-

tral (centre) position to prevent the inad-

vertent adjustment.

OTQ047042R

CAUTION

If the mirror is jammed with ice, do

not adjust the mirror by force. Use

an approved spray de-icer (not radi-

ator antifreeze) to release the

frozen mechanism or move the

vehicle to a warm place and allow

the ice to melt.

WARNING

Do not adjust or fold the outside

rearview mirrors whilst the vehicle

is moving. This could result in loss

of control, and an accident which

could cause death, serious injury

or property damage.

CAUTION

• The mirrors stop moving when

they reach the maximum adjust-

ing angles, but the motor contin-

ues to operate whilst the switch is

depressed. Do not depress the

switch longer than necessary, the

motor may be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust the out-

side rearview mirror by hand.

Doing so may damage the parts.

CAUTION

Do not scrape ice off the mirror

face; this may damage the surface

of the glass. If ice should restrict

movement of the mirror, do not

force the mirror for adjustment. To

remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a

sponge or soft cloth with very warm

water.

Features of your vehicle

384

Folding the outside rearview mirror

Manual Type

To fold the outside rearview mirror, grasp

the housing of the mirror and then fold it

toward the rear of the vehicle.

Electric Type (if equipped)

To fold the outside rearview mirror,

depress the button.

To unfold it, depress the button again.

OEN046215/H OTQ049043R

CAUTION

In case of the electric type of out-

side rearview mirror, don’t fold it by

hand. It could cause the failure of

the motor.

CAUTION

The electric type outside rearview

mirror operates even though the

ignition switch is in the LOCK posi-

tion. However, to prevent unneces-

sary battery discharge, do not

adjust the mirrors longer than nec-

essary whilst the engine is not run-

ning.

439

Features of your vehicle

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

1. Tachometer

2. Turn signal indicators

3. Speedometer

4. Engine coolant temperature gauge

5. Warning and indicator lights

6. Shift position indicator

7. Odometer/Tripmeter

8. Fuel gauge

❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may dif-

fer from the illustration.

OTQ045413/OTQ045412/OTQ045400

■ Type A

■ Type B

■ Type C

Features of your vehicle

404

Instrument Cluster Control

Adjusting Instrument Cluster

Illumination (if equipped)

When the vehicle’s parking lights or

headlights are on, rotate the illumination

control knob to adjust the instrument

panel illumination intensity.

OTQ047046R

WARNING

Never adjust the instrument cluster

whilst driving. This could result in

loss of control and lead to an acci-

dent that may cause death, serious

injury, or property damage.

441

Features of your vehicle

Gauges

Speedometer (km or mile)

The speedometer indicates the forward

speed of the vehicle.

The speedometer is calibrated in miles

per hour and/or kilometers per hour.

OTQ045410

OTQ045408

km, km/h

OTQ045411

OTQ045409

mi, MPH

Features of your vehicle

424

Tachometer

The tachometer indicates the approxi-

mate number of engine revolutions per

minute (rpm).

Use the tachometer to select the correct

shift points and to prevent lugging and/or

over-revving the engine.

When the door is open, or if the engine is

not started within 1 minute, the tachome-

ter pointer may move slightly in ON posi-

tion with the engine OFF. This movement

is normal and will not affect the accuracy

of the tachometer once the engine is run-

ning.

Engine temperature gauge

This gauge shows the temperature of the

engine coolant when the ignition switch

is ON.

Do not continue driving with an overheat-

ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer

to “If the engine overheats” in section 6.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine within

the tachometer's RED ZONE.

This may cause severe engine dam-

age.

CAUTION

If the gauge pointer moves beyond

the normal range area toward the

“H” or “130” position, it indicates

overheating that may damage the

engine.

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap

when the engine is hot. The engine

coolant is under pressure and

could cause severe burns. Wait

until the engine is cool before

adding coolant to the reservoir.

OTQ045401

OTQ045403

Petrol

OTQ045402

Diesel

443

Features of your vehicle

Fuel gauge

The fuel gauge indicates the approxi-

mate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel

tank. The fuel tank capacity is given in

section 9. The fuel gauge is supplement-

ed by a low fuel warning light, which will

illuminate when the fuel tank is near

empty.

On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge

pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel

warning light may come on earlier than

usual due to the movement of fuel in the

tank.

WARNING

- Fuel gauge

Running out of fuel can expose

vehicle occupants to danger.

You must stop and obtain addition-

al fuel as soon as possible after the

warning light comes on or when the

gauge indicator comes close to the

“E” or “0” level.

CAUTION

Avoid driving with a very low fuel

level. If you run out of fuel, it could

cause the engine to misfire and

result in excessive loading of the

catalytic converter.

OTQ045404

OTQ045406

OTQ045405

OTQ045407

Except EuropeFor Europe

Features of your vehicle

444

Odometer/Tripmeter

Odometer (km or mi)

The odometer indicates the total dis-

tance the vehicle has been driven.

You will also find the odometer useful to

determine when periodic maintenance

should be performed.

✽

NOTICE

It is forbidden that alteration of the

odometer of any vehicle with the intent

to change the mileage registered on the

odometer. The alteration may void your

warranty coverage.

Tripmeter (km or mi)

TRIP A: Tripmeter A

TRIP B: Tripmeter B

The tripmeter indicates the distance of

individual trips selected by the driver.

Tripmeter A or B can be selected by

pressing the TRIP button for less than 1

second.

Tripmeter A or B can be reset to 0.0 by

pressing the TRIP button for 1 second or

more, and then releasing.

OTQ045318 OTQ045319

■ Type A ■ Type A

OTQ047047R

445

Features of your vehicle

Trip computer (if equipped)

The trip computer is a microcomputer-

controlled driver information system that

displays information related to driving,

including distance to empty, tripmeter

and average speed on the display when

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

\All stored driving information (except

odometer) is reset if the battery is dis-

connected. The odometer is always dis-

played until the display is turned off.

Push the TRIP button for less than 1 sec-

ond to select distance to empty, average

speed or tripmeter function as follows :

Odometer (km or mi)

The odometer Indicates the total dis-

tance that the vehicle has been driven

and should be used to determine when

periodic maintenance should be per-

formed.

- Odometer range : 0 ~ 999999 kilome-

ters or miles.

Average speed

Tripmeter

Distance to empty

Elapsed time*

Urea level*

* : if equipped

OTQ045323

OTQ045326

■ Type B

■ Type C

OTQ047047R

Features of your vehicle

464

Distance to empty (km or miles)

This mode indicates the estimated dis-

tance to empty based on the current fuel

in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel

delivered to the engine. When the

remaining distance is below 1 km (1

miles), “----” will be displayed and the dis-

tance to empty indicator will blink.

The meter’s working range is from 1 to

9999 km (1 to 9999 miles).

✽

NOTICE

• If the vehicle is not on level ground or

the battery power has been interrupt-

ed, the “Distance to empty” function

may not operate correctly.

The trip computer may not register

additional fuel if less than 6 litres (1.6

gallons) of fuel are added to the vehi-

cle.

• The fuel consumption and distance to

empty values may vary significantly

based on driving conditions, driving

habits, and condition of the vehicle.

• The distance to empty value is an esti-

mate of the available driving distance.

This value may differ from the actual

driving distance available.

Average speed (km/h or mph)

This mode calculates the average speed

of the vehicle since the last average

speed reset.

Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the

average speed keeps going whilst the

engine is running.

The meter's working range is from 0 to

999 km/h (0 to 999 mph).

OTQ045320

OTQ045304

■ Type B

■ Type C

OTQ045321

OTQ045324

■ Type B

■ Type C

447

Features of your vehicle

Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1

second, when the average speed is

being displayed, clears the average

speed to zero (---).

Tripmeter (km or miles)

This mode indicates the distance of indi-

vidual trip since the last tripmeter reset.

The meter's working range is from 0.0 to

999.9 km (miles).

Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1

second when the tripmeter is being dis-

played clears the tripmeter to zero (0.0).

OTQ045322

■ Type B

■ Type C

OTQ045301

OTQ045325

Features of your vehicle

484

Warnings and indicators

All warning lights are checked by turning

the ignition switch ON (do not start the

engine). If any light that does not illumi-

nate, we recommend that the system be

checked by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

After starting the engine, check to make

sure that all warning lights are off. If any

are still on, this indicates a situation that

needs attention. When releasing the

parking brake, the brake system warning

light should go off. The fuel warning light

will stay on if the fuel level is low.

Air bag warning light

(if equipped)

This warning light will illuminate for

approximately 6 seconds each time you

turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion. This light also comes on when the

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) is

not working properly. If the SRS air bag

warning light does not come on, or con-

tinuously remains on after operating for

about 6 seconds when you turned the

ignition switch to the ON position or start-

ed the engine, or if it comes on whilst

driving, we recommend that the system

be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

Anti-lock brake system

(ABS) warning light

(if equipped)

This light illuminates if the ignition switch

is turned ON and goes off in approxi-

mately 3 seconds if the system is operat-

ing normally.

If the ABS warning light remains on,

comes on whilst driving, or does not

come on when the ignition switch is

turned to the ON position, this indicates

that there may be a malfunction with the

ABS.

If this occurs, we recommend that the

system be checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

The normal braking system will still be

operational, but without the assistance of

the anti-lock brake system.

449

Features of your vehicle

Electronic brake force distribution (EBD)

system warning light

If two warning lights illuminate at the

same time whilst driving, your vehicle

may have a malfunction with the ABS

and EBD system.

In this case, your ABS and regular brake

system may not work normally. We rec-

ommend that the system be checked by

a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Seat belt warning

Seat belt warning light

As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt

warning light will blink for approximately

6 seconds each time you turn the ignition

switch ON regardless of belt fastening.

If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened after

the ignition switch is ON, the seat belt

warning light blinks again for approxi-

mately 6 seconds.

Seat belt warning chime

If the driver's seat belt is not fastened

when the ignition switch is turned ON or

if it is unfastened after the ignition switch

is ON, the seat belt warning chime will

sound for approximately 6 seconds. At

this time, if the seat belt is fastened, the

chime will stop at once.

Turn signal indicator

The blinking green arrows on the instru-

ment panel show the direction indicated

by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on

but does not blink, blinks more rapidly

than normal, or does not illuminate at all,

a malfunction in the turn signal system is

indicated. Your dealer should be consult-

ed for repairs.

High beam indicator

This indicator illuminates when the head-

lights are on and in the high beam posi-

tion or when the turn signal lever is pulled

into the Flash-to-Pass position.

■ Type A ■ Type B

WARNING

If the both ABS and brake warning

lights are on and stay on, your vehi-

cle’s brake system will not work

normally during sudden braking. In

this case, avoid high speed driving

and abrupt braking. We recommend

that the system be checked by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Features of your vehicle

504

Engine oil pressure

warning light

This warning light indicates the engine oil

pressure is low.

If the warning light illuminates whilst driv-

ing:

1. Drive safely to the side of the road and

stop.

2. With the engine off, check the engine

oil level. If the level is low, add oil as

required.

If the warning light remains on after

adding oil or if oil is not available, we rec-

ommend that you call a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

Engine oil level warning

light (Diesel engine,

if equipped)

When the engine oil is not enough, the

engine oil level warning light may be illu-

minated. If the warning light comes on,

check the engine oil level as soon as

possible and add engine oil as required.

Slowly pour the recommended the oil lit-

tle by little into a funnel. (Oil refill capaci-

ty: approximately 0.6 ~ 1.0 L)

Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer

to "Recommended lubricants and capac-

ities" in section 9.) Do not overfill the

engine oil to ensure the oil level is not

above F mark on the dipstick.

✽

NOTICE

• Cycle the ignition from OFF to ON 3

times within 5 seconds, the warning

light will go off immediately.

However, when you turn off the warn-

ing light without adding the engine oil,

the light may come on again.

• If you drive the vehicle after adding

the engine oil, the warning light will

go off within 1hour.

CAUTION

If the engine is not stopped imme-

diately after the engine oil pressure

warning light is illuminated, severe

damage could result.

CAUTION

If the oil pressure warning light

stays on whilst the engine is run-

ning, serious engine damage may

result. The oil pressure warning

light comes on whenever there is

insufficient oil pressure. In normal

operation, it should come on when

the ignition switch is turned on,

then go out when the engine is

started. If the oil pressure warning

light stays on whilst the engine is

running, there is a serious malfunc-

tion.

If this happens, stop the car as

soon as it is safe to do so, turn off

the engine and check the oil level. If

the oil level is low, fill the engine oil

to the proper level and start the

engine again. If the light stays on

with the engine running, turn the

engine off immediately. In any

instance where the oil light stays on

when the engine is running, we rec-

ommend that the system be

checked by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

451

Features of your vehicle

Parking brake & brake fluid warning

light

Parking brake warning

This light is illuminated when the parking

brake is applied with the ignition switch in

the START or ON position. The warning

light should go off when the parking

brake is released whilst engine is run-

ning.

The parking brake warning chime will

sound to remind you that the parking

brake is applied when you are driving

above 10 km/h (6 mph). Always release

the parking brake before you drive.

Low brake fluid level warning

If the warning light remains on, it may

indicate that the brake fluid level in the

reservoir is low.

If the warning light remains on:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.

2. With the engine stopped, check the

brake fluid level immediately and add

fluid as required. Then check all brake

components for fluid leaks.

3.Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are

found, the warning light remains on or

the brakes do not operate properly.

We recommend that you contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diago-

nal braking systems. This means you still

have braking on two wheels even if one

of the dual systems should fail. With only

one of the dual systems working, more

than normal pedal travel and greater

pedal pressure are required to stop the

car. Also, the car will not stop in as short

a distance with only a portion of the

brake system working. If the brakes fail

whilst you are driving, shift to a lower

gear for additional engine braking and

stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so.

To check bulb operation, check whether

the parking brake and brake fluid warning

light illuminates when the ignition switch

is in the ON position.

CAUTION

• If the light comes on continuous-

ly after adding the engine oil and

driving the vehicle for 1 hour,we

recommend that the system be

checked by an nearest authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• Even if this light does not come

on after the engine has started,

the engine oil should be checked

and supplied periodically.

■ Type A ■ Type B

WARNING

Driving the vehicle with a warning

light on is dangerous. If the brake

warning light remains on, we rec-

ommend that the system be

checked by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

Features of your vehicle

524

Low brake vacuum pressure warning

(diesel engine only, if equipped)

If the warning light remains on, it may

indicate that the brake vacuum pump has

any problem. Therefore you should avoid

high speed driving or sudden stop, and

you should depress the brake pedal

deeper and harder than usual in braking.

We recommend that the system be serv-

iced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Shift pattern indicator

(if equipped)

The indicator displays to show the auto-

matic transmission shift lever selection.

Manual transmission shift

indicator (if equipped)

This indicator informs you which gear is

desired whilst driving to save fuel.

For example

: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd

gear is desired (currently the shift

lever is in the 2nd gear).

: Indicates that shifting down to the

3rd gear is desired (currently the

shift lever is in the 4th gear).

✽

NOTICE

When the system is not working proper-

ly, up/down arrow indicator and gear is

not displayed.

Automatic transmission

shift indicator

(if equipped, For Europe)

In the Sports Mode, this indicator informs

which gear is desired whilst driving to

save fuel.

• Shifting up :

▲

• Shifting down :

▼

* : if equipped

For example

: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd

gear is desired (currently the shift

lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear).

: Indicates that shifting down to the

3rd gear is desired (currently the

shift lever is in the 4th gear).

When the system is not working proper-

ly, the indicator is not displayed.

WARNING

• Continuous braking whilst driv-

ing on steep or long downhill

may cause to descend the vacu-

um level in brake booster for a

time and turn on the warning

light. In this case, shift down the

transmission. If the warning light

illuminate continuously, stop the

vehicle in the safe location and

wait until the warning light goes

off.

• Driving the vehicle with a warn-

ing light on is dangerous. If the

brake warning light remains on,

we recommend that the system

be checked by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

453

Features of your vehicle

O/D OFF Indicator

(if equipped)

This indicator comes on when the O/D

system is deactivated.

Charging system warning

light

This warning light indicates a malfunction

of either the generator or electrical

charging system.

If the warning light comes on whilst the

vehicle is in motion:

1. Drive to the nearest safe location.

2. With the engine off, check the genera-

tor drive belt for looseness or break-

age.

3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob-

lem exists somewhere in the electrical

charging system. We recommend that

the system be checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

Tailgate open warning light

This warning light blinks when the tail-

gate is not closed securely with the igni-

tion in any position.

Door ajar warning light

This warning light illuminates when a

door is not closed securely with the igni-

tion in any position.

Immobiliser indicator

(if equipped)

This light illuminates when the immobilis-

er key is inserted and turned to the ON

position to start the engine.

At this time, you can start the engine.The

light goes out after the engine is running.

If this light blinks when the ignition switch

is in the ON position before starting the

engine, we recommend that the system

be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

O/D

OFF

Features of your vehicle

544

Low fuel level warning light

This warning light indicates the fuel tank

is nearly empty. When it comes on, you

should add fuel as soon as possible.

Driving with the fuel level warning light on

or with the fuel level below “E” or “0” can

cause the engine to misfire and damage

the catalytic converter.

Malfunction indicator (MIL)

(check engine light)

This indicator light is part of the Engine

Control System which monitors various

emission control system components. If

this light illuminates whilst driving, it indi-

cates that a potential malfunction has

been detected somewhere in the emis-

sion control system.

This light will also illuminate when the

ignition switch is turned to the ON posi-

tion, and will go out in a few seconds

after the engine is started. If it illuminates

whilst driving, or does not illuminate

when the ignition switch is turned to the

ON position, we recommend that the

system be checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

Generally, your vehicle will continue to be

drivable, but we recommend that the sys-

tem be checked by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

CAUTION

Prolonged driving with the Emission

Control System Malfunction

Indicator Light illuminated may

cause damage to the emission con-

trol systems which could effect dri-

vability and/or fuel economy.

CAUTION -

Petrol engine

If the Emission Control System

Malfunction Indicator Light illumi-

nates, potential catalytic converter

damage is possible which could

result in loss of engine power.

We recommend that the system be

inspected by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

455

Features of your vehicle

DPF warning light

(if equipped)

The warning message is displayed, as

above, when there is a DPF problem with

your vehicle, In this case, we recommend

that the DPF system be inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

For more details, refer to the "DPF sys-

tem" in chapter 7.

SCR warning light

(if equipped)

The warning message is displayed, as

above, when there is a SCR problem with

your vehicle, In this case, we recommend

that the SCR system be inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

For more details, refer to the "Low Urea

warning message" in chapter 7.

CAUTION - Diesel engine

(if equipped with DPF)

When the malfunction indicator

light is blinks, it may stop blinking

after driving the vehicle at more

than 60km/h (37 mph) or at more

than second gear with 1500 ~ 2500

engine rpm for a certain time (for

about 25 minutes).

If the malfunction indicator light

continues to be blinked in spite of

the procedure, we recommend that

the system be checked by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

If you continue to drive with the

malfunction indicator light blinking

for a long time, the DPF system can

be damaged and fuel consumption

can be worsen.

CAUTION -

Diesel engine

If the Emission Control System

Malfunction Indicator Light blinks,

some error related to the injection

quantity adjustment occurs which

could result in loss of engine power,

combustion noise and poor emis-

sion. We recommend that the system

be inspected by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

Features of your vehicle

564

ESP (ESC) indicator (Electronic

Stability Program) (if equipped)

The ESP (ESC) indicator will illuminate

when the ignition switch is turned ON,

but should go off after approximately 3

seconds. When the ESP (ESC) is on, it

monitors the driving conditions. Under

normal driving conditions, the ESP

(ESC) indicator will remain off. When a

slippery or low traction condition is

encountered, the ESP (ESC) will oper-

ate, and the ESP (ESC) indicator will

blink to indicate the ESP (ESC) is oper-

ating.

But, if the ESP (ESC) system malfunc-

tions the indicator illuminates and stays

on. We recommend that the system be

checked by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

✽

NOTICE

After reconnecting or recharging a dis-

charged battery, the ESP (ESC) indica-

tor may illuminate. In this case, turn the

steering wheel half way to the left and

right whilst the ignition switch is in the

ON position. Then, restart the engine

after the ignition is off. If the ESP (ESC)

indicator does not turn off, we recom-

mend that the system be checked by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

ESP (ESC) OFF indicator

(if equipped)

The ESP (ESC) OFF indicator will illumi-

nate when the ignition switch is turned

ON, but should go off after approximate-

ly 3 seconds. To switch to ESP (ESC)

OFF mode, press the ESP (ESC) OFF

button. The ESP (ESC) OFF indicator will

illuminate indicating the ESP (ESC) is

deactivated.

ESP

OFF

■ Type B■ Type A

457

Features of your vehicle

Cruise Indicator Light

(if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the cruise control system is

enabled.

For more details, refer to “Cruise Control

System” in chapter 5.

Cruise SET Indicator Light

(if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the cruise control speed is set.

For more details, refer to “Cruise Control

System” in chapter 5.

Glow indicator

(Diesel engine)

The indicator light illuminates when the

ignition switch is placed at the ON posi-

tion. The engine can be started after the

preheat indicator light goes off. The illu-

minating time varies with the water tem-

perature, air temperature and battery

condition.

✽

NOTICE

If the engine was not started within 10

seconds after the preheating is complet-

ed, turn the ignition switch once more to

the LOCK position during 10 seconds,

and then to the ON position, in order to

preheat again.

CAUTION

If the preheat indicator light contin-

ues to illuminate or flash on and off

after the engine has warmed up or

whilst driving, we recommend that

the system be checked by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CRUISE

SET

Features of your vehicle

584

Fuel filter warning light

(Diesel engine)

This warning light illuminates for 3 sec-

onds after the ignition switch is set to the

ON position and then it will go out. If it

lights up whilst the engine is running, it

indicates that water has accumulated

inside the fuel filter. If this happens,

remove the water from the fuel filter. For

more information, refer to “Fuel filter” in

section 7.

Overspeed warning

(if equipped)

Overspeed warning light

If you drive with the speed of 120 km/h or

more, the overspeed warning light will

blink. This is to prevent you from driving

your vehicle with overspeed.

Overspeed warning chime

If you drive with the speed of 120 km/h or

more, the overspeed warning chime will

sound for about 5 seconds. This is to pre-

vent you from driving your vehicle with

overspeed.

Key reminder warning chime

(if equipped)

If the driver’s door is opened whilst the

ignition key is left in the ignition switch

(ACC or LOCK position), the key

reminder warning chime will sound. This

is to prevent you from locking your keys

in the vehicle. The chime sounds until the

key is removed from the ignition switch or

the driver’s door is closed.

CAUTION

When the fuel filter warning light is

illuminated, engine power (vehicle

speed & idle speed) may decrease.

If you keep driving with the warning

light on, you can damage your vehi-

cle's engine parts and injection sys-

tem of the Common Rail. If this

occurs, we recommend that the

system be checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

120

km/h

459

Features of your vehicle

Low Tyre Pressure Warning

Light (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

• Once you set the ignition switch or

Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON

position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3 sec-

onds and then goes off.

• When one or more of your tyres are

significantly underinflated.

For more details, refer to “Tyre

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”

in chapter 6.

This warning light remains on after

blinking for approximately 60 seconds or

repeats blinking and off at the intervals

of approximately 3 seconds:

• When there is a malfunction with the

TPMS.

In this case, we recommend that you

have the vehicle inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer as soon

as possible.

For more details, refer to “Tyre

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”

in chapter 6.

WARNING - Safe Stopping

• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tyre damage

caused by external factors.

• If you notice any vehicle instabili-

ty, immediately take your foot off

the accelerator pedal, apply the

brakes gradually with light force,

and slowly move to a safe posi-

tion off the road.

Features of your vehicle

604

REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

The rear parking assist system assists

the driver during backward movement of

the vehicle by chiming if any object is

sensed within a distance of 47 in. (120

cm) behind the vehicle. This system is a

supplemental system and it is not intend-

ed to nor does it replace the need for

extreme care and attention of the driver.

The sensing range and objects

detectable by the rear parking assist sen-

sors are limited. Whenever reversing, pay

as much attention to what is behind you

as you would in a vehicle without a rear

parking assist system.

Operation of the rear parking

assist system

Operating condition

• This system will activate when revers-

ing with the ignition switch ON.

If the vehicle is moving at a speed over

3 mph (5 km/h), the system may not be

activated correctly.

• The sensing distance whilst the rear

parking assist system is in operation is

approximately 47 in. (120 cm).

• When more than two objects are

sensed at the same time, the closest

one will be recognized first.

Types of warning sound

• When an object is 47 in. to 32 in. (120

cm to 81 cm) from the rear bumper:

Buzzer beeps intermittently.

• When an object is 31 in. to 16 in. (80

cm to 41 cm) from the rear bumper:

Buzzer beeps more frequently.

• When an object is within 15 in. (40 cm)

of the rear bumper:

Buzzer sounds continuously.

OTQ047055

WARNING

The rear parking assist system is a

supplementary function only. The

operation of the rear parking assist

system can be affected by several

factors (including environmental

conditions). It is the responsibility

of the driver to always check the

area behind the vehicle before and

whilst reversing.

Sensors

461

Features of your vehicle

Non-operational conditions of

rear parking assist system

The rear parking assist system may

not operate properly when:

1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will

operate normally when the moisture

has been cleared.)

2. The sensor is covered with foreign

matter, such as snow or water, or the

sensor cover is blocked. (It will operate

normally when the material is removed

or the sensor is no longer blocked.)

3. Driving on uneven road surfaces

(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, gradi-

ent).

4. Objects generating excessive noise

(vehicle horns, loud motorcycle

engines, or truck air brakes) are within

range of the sensor.

5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.

6. Wireless transmitters or mobile

phones are within range of the sensor.

7. The sensor is covered with snow.

8. Trailer towing

The detecting range may decrease

when:

1. The sensor is stained with foreign mat-

ter such as snow or water. (The sens-

ing range will return to normal when

removed.)

2. Outside air temperature is extremely

hot or cold.

The following objects may not be rec-

ognized by the sensor:

1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,

chains or small poles.

2. Objects which tend to absorb the sen-

sor frequency such as clothes, spongy

material or snow.

3. Undetectable objects smaller than 40

in. (1 m) in height and narrower than 6

in. (14 cm) in diameter.

Rear parking assist system pre-

cautions

• The rear parking assist system may

not sound sequentially depending on

the speed and shapes of the objects

detected.

• The rear parking assist system may

malfunction if the vehicle bumper

height or sensor installation has been

modified or damaged. Any non-factory

installed equipment or accessories

may also interfere with the sensor per-

formance.

• The sensor may not recognize objects

less than 15 in. (40 cm) from the sen-

sor, or it may sense an incorrect dis-

tance. Use caution.

• When the sensor is frozen or stained

with snow, dirt, or water, the sensor

may be inoperative until the stains are

removed using a soft cloth.

• Do not push, scratch or strike the sen-

sor. Sensor damage could occur.

Features of your vehicle

624

✽

NOTICE

This system can only sense objects with-

in the range and location of the sensors;

It can not detect objects in other areas

where sensors are not installed. Also,

small or slim objects, such as poles or

objects located between sensors may not

be detected by the sensors.

Always visually check behind the vehi-

cle when reversing.

Be sure to inform any drivers of the

vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the

system regarding the systems capabili-

ties and limitations.

Self-diagnosis

If you don’t hear an audible warning

sound or if the buzzer sounds intermit-

tently when shifting the gear to the R

(Reverse) position, this may indicate a

malfunction in the rear parking assist sys-

tem. If this occurs, we recommend that

the system be checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

WARNING

Pay close attention when the vehi-

cle is driven close to objects on the

road, particularly pedestrians, and

especially children. Be aware that

some objects may not be detected

by the sensors, due to the object’s

distance, size or material, all of

which can limit the effectiveness of

the sensor. Always perform a visu-

al inspection to make sure the vehi-

cle is clear of all obstructions

before moving the vehicle in any

direction.

WARNING

Your new vehicle warranty does not

cover any accidents or damage to

the vehicle or injuries to its occu-

pants due to a rear parking assist

system malfunction. Always drive

safely and cautiously.

463

Features of your vehicle

The rearview camera will activate when

the back-up light is ON with the ignition

switch ON and the shift lever in the R

(Reverse) position.

1. Vehicle width

2. 100 cm from the rear bumper

3. 50 cm from the rear bumper

4. 300 cm from the rear bumper

✽

NOTICE

The warning "Warning ! Check sur-

roundings for safety " will appear on the

rearview display when the rearview

camera is activated.

The hazard warning flasher should be

used whenever you find it necessary to

stop the car in a hazardous location.

When you must make such an emer-

gency stop, always pull off the road as far

as possible.

The hazard warning lights are turned on

by pushing in the hazard switch. This

causes all turn signal lights to blink. The

hazard warning lights will operate even

though the key is not in the ignition

switch.

To turn the hazard warning lights off,

push the switch a second time.

REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING

• This system is a supplementary

function only. It is the responsi-

bility of the driver to always

check the inside/outside rearview

mirror and the area behind the

vehicle before and whilst backing

up because there is a dead zone

that cannot be seen through the

camera.

• Always keep the camera lens

clean. If the lens is covered with

foreign matter, the camera may

not operate normally.

OTQ045415

OTQ055210R

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

OTQ045267R

Features of your vehicle

644

Battery saver function

• The purpose of this feature is to pre-

vent the battery from being dis-

charged. The system automatically

turns off the parking lights when the

driver removes the ignition key and

opens the driver-side door.

• With this feature, the parking lights will

be turned off automatically if the driver

parks on the side of road at night.

If necessary, to keep the lights on

when the ignition key is removed, per-

form the following:

1) Open the driver-side door.

2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON

again using the light switch on the

steering column.

Lighting control

The light switch has a Headlight and a

Parking light position.

To operate the lights, turn the knob at the

end of the control lever to one of the fol-

lowing positions:

(1) OFF position

(2) Parking light position

(3) Headlight position

(4) Auto light position (if equipped)

Parking light position ( )

When the light switch is in the parking

light position (1st position), the tail,

license and instrument panel lights are

ON.

LIGHTING

CAUTION

If the driver gets out of the vehicle

through other doors (except dri-

ver’s door), the battery saver func-

tion does not operate. Therefore, it

causes the battery to be dis-

charged. In this case, make sure to

turn off the lamp before getting out

of the vehicle.

OTQ045245R

OTQ045246R

465

Features of your vehicle

Headlight position ( )

When the light switch is in the headlight

position (2nd position) the head, tail,

license and instrument panel lights are

ON.

✽

NOTICE

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position to turn on the headlights.

AUTO light position (if equipped)

When the light switch is in the AUTO

position, the parking (position) light and

headlights will be turned ON or OFF

automatically depending on the amount

of light outside the vehicle.

Even with the AUTO light feature in oper-

ation, it is recommended to manually turn

ON the lights when driving at night or in

a fog, or when you enter dark areas,

such as tunnels and parking facilities.

OTQ045247R

CAUTION

• Do not cover or spill anything on

the sensor (1) located on the

instrument panel.

• Do not clean the sensor using a

window cleaner, the cleanser may

leave a light film which could

interfere with sensor operation.

• If your vehicle has window tint or

other types of metallic coating on

the front windscreen, the AUTO

light system may not work proper-

OTQ045244R

Features of your vehicle

664

High - beam operation

To turn on the high beam headlights,

push the lever away from you. Pull it back

for low beams.

The high-beam indicator will light when

the headlight high beams are switched

on. To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged, do not leave the lights on for a

prolonged time whilst the engine is not

running.

To flash the headlights, pull the lever

towards you. It will return to the normal

(low beam) position when released. The

headlight switch does not need to be on

to use this flashing feature.

Turn signals and lane change sig-

nals

The ignition switch must be on for the

turn signals to function. To turn on the

turn signals, move the lever up or down

(A). Green arrow indicators on the instru-

ment panel indicate which turn signal is

operating.

They will self-cancel after a turn is com-

pleted. If the indicator continues to flash

after a turn, manually return the lever to

the OFF position.

To signal a lane change, move the turn

signal lever slightly and hold it in position

(B). The lever will return to the OFF posi-

tion when released.

OTQ045249R OTQ045256ROTQ045248R

WARNING

Do not use high beam when there

are other vehicles. Using high

beam could obstruct the other dri-

ver's vision.

467

Features of your vehicle

If an indicator stays on and does not

flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the

turn signal bulbs may be burned out and

will require replacement.

✽

NOTICE

If an indicator flash is abnormally quick

or slow, a bulb may be burned out or

have a poor electrical connection in the

circuit.

Front fog light (if equipped)

Fog lights are used to provide improved

visibility when visibility is poor due to fog,

rain or snow, etc. The fog lights will turn

on when fog light switch is pressed after

the parklight is turned on.

To turn off the fog lights, press the switch

again.

Rear fog light (if equipped)

To turn the rear fog lights on, turn the

headlight switch to the headlight on posi-

tion and press the rear fog light switch

(light on switch will illuminate).

The rear fog lights turn on when the rear

fog switch is pressed after the front fog

switch is turned to ON and the headlight

switch to the parklight position. (if

equipped)

To turn the rear fog lights off, press the

rear fog light switch again or turn the

headlight switch to the OFF position.

OTQ047132ROTQ047056R

CAUTION

When in operation, the fog lights

consume large amounts of vehicle

electrical power. Only use the fog

lights when visibility is poor.

Features of your vehicle

684

Daytime running light

(if equipped)

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make

it easier for others to see the front of your

vehicle during the day. DRL can be help-

ful in many different driving conditions,

and it is especially helpful after dawn and

before sunset.

The DRL system will make the head-

lights turn OFF when:

1. The parklight switch is ON.

2. Engine stops.

Headlight levelling device

(if equipped)

Manual type

To adjust the headlight beam level

according to the number of the passen-

gers and the loading weight in the lug-

gage area, turn the beam levelling

switch.

The higher the number of the switch

position, the lower the headlight beam

level. Always keep the headlight beam at

the proper levelling position, or head-

lights may dazzle other road users.

Listed below are the examples of proper

switch settings. For loading conditions

other than those listed below, adjust the

switch position so that the beam level

may be the nearest as the condition

obtained according to the list.

Loading condition

Driver only

Driver + Front passenger

+ 4th row passenger

Full passengers

(including driver)

Full passengers (including

driver) + Maximum per-

missible loading

Driver + Maximum per-

missible loading

Switch position

Wagon Van

OTQ047133R

469

Features of your vehicle

A : Wiper speed control

· – Single wipe

· 0 – Off

· --- – Intermittent wipe

(if equipped)

· 1 – Low wiper speed

· 2 – High wiper speed

B : Intermittent wipe time adjustment

C : Wash with brief wipes*

D : Rear wiper/washer control*

· – Spraying washer fluid

· – Continuous wipe

· 0 – Off

· – Wash with brief wipes

* : if equipped

WIPERS AND WASHERS

OTQ048902/OTQ049902/OTQ048909/OTQ049909

Windscreen wiper/washer Rear window wiper/washer

(if equipped)

Type B

Type A

Type B

Type A

Features of your vehicle

704

Windscreen wipers

Operates as follows when the ignition

switch is turned ON.

: For a single wiping cycle, push the

lever upward and release it with the

lever in the 0 position. The wipers

will operate continuously if the lever

is pushed upward and held.

0 : Wiper is not in operation.

--- : Wiper operates intermittently at the

same wiping intervals. Use this

mode in a light rain or mist. To vary

the speed setting, turn the speed

control knob.

1 : Normal wiper speed

2 : Fast wiper speed

✽

NOTICE

If there is heavy accumulation of snow

or ice on the windscreen, defrost the

windscreen for about 10 minutes, or

until the snow and/or ice is removed

before using the windscreen wipers to

ensure proper operation.

If you do not remove the snow and/or ice

before using the wiper and washer, it

may damage the wiper and washer sys-

tem.

✽

NOTICE

• When you operate the wipers, if your

vehicle has a problem in any part of

the wiper operation system, the wiper

may operate in the 1 mode regardless

of the wiper switch position. In this

case, we recommend that the system

be checked by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

• When the ignition key is removed, the

wiper blade sometimes may move to

properly position slightly for reducing

the deterioration of the windscreen

wipers.

Windscreen washers

In the 0 position, pull the lever gently

toward you to spray washer fluid on the

windscreen and to run the wipers 1-3

cycles.

Use this function when the windscreen is

dirty.

The spray and wiper operation will con-

tinue until you release the lever.

If the washer does not work, check the

washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not

sufficient, you will need to add appropri-

ate non-abrasive windscreen washer

fluid to the washer reservoir.

The reservoir filler neck is located in the

front of the engine compartment on the

driver side.

CAUTION

To prevent possible damage to the

washer pump, do not operate the

washer when the fluid reservoir is

empty.

471

Features of your vehicle

Rear Window Wiper and Washer

(if equipped)

Turn the switch to desired position to

operate the rear wiper and washer.

- Wash with brief wipes

- Normal wiper operation

0 - Wiper is not in operation

- Spraying washer fluid and wiping

✽

NOTICE

Do not operate the washer continuously

for more than 15 seconds or when the

fluid reservoir is empty; this could dam-

age the system. Do not operate the wiper

when the window is dry; this can result

in scratching as well as premature wiper

blade wear. For the same reason, do not

operate the washer when the washer

fluid reservoir is empty.

WARNING

Do not use the washer in freezing

temperatures without first warming

the windscreen with the defrosters;

the washer solution could freeze on

contact with the windscreen and

obscure your vision.

CAUTION

• To prevent possible damage to

the wipers or windscreen, do not

operate the wipers when the

windscreen is dry.

• To prevent damage to the wiper

blades, do not use petrol,

kerosene, paint thinner, or other

solvents on or near them.

• To prevent damage to the wiper

arms and other components, do

not attempt to move the wipers

manually.

• To prevent possible damage to

the wipers and washer system,

use anti-freezing washer fluids in

the winter season or cold weath-

er.

Features of your vehicle

724

Map lamp (if equipped)

• : Push the switch to turn the

map lamp on or off. This light

produces a spot beam for con-

venient use as a map lamp at

night or as a personal lamp for

the driver and the front pas-

senger.

• DOOR : In the DOOR position, the light

comes on when any door is

opened regardless of the igni-

tion switch position. When

doors are unlocked by the

transmitter, the light comes on

for approximately 30 seconds

as long as any door is not

open. The light goes out grad-

ually after approximately 30

seconds if the door is closed.

However, if the ignition switch

is ON or all doors are locked,

the light will turn off immedi-

ately.

If a door is opened with the

ignition switch in the ACC or

LOCK position, the light stays

on for about 20 minutes.

However, if a door is opened

with the ignition switch in the

ON position, the light stays on

continuously.

• ROOM : In the ROOM position, the light

stays on at all times.

INTERIOR LIGHT

CAUTION

Do not use the interior lights for

extended periods when the engine

is not running.

It may cause battery discharge.

OTQ047060

OTQ047060G

Type B

Type A

WARNING

Do not use the interior lights when

driving in the dark. Accidents could

happen because the view may be

obscured by interior lights.

473

Features of your vehicle

Room lamp (Rear, if equipped)

• : Push the switch to turn the

rear room lamp on or off.

➀ : Push the switch to turn the

map lamp on or off. This light

produces a spot beam for

convenient use as a map

lamp at night or as a person-

al lamp for the rear passen-

ger.

➁ DOOR : In the DOOR position, the

light comes on when any

door is opened regardless of

the ignition switch position.

➂ ROOM : In the ROOM position, the

light stays on at all times.

OTQ047061

OTQ047201

Type C

OTQ047062

Type A

Type B

OTQ047206

CAUTION

Do not leave the switch in this posi-

tion for an extended period of time

when the vehicle is not running.

Features of your vehicle

744

➃ MOOD : Push the switch to turn the

mood lamp on when the

room lamp is off. Once the

mood lamp is on, each time

you press the button the

colour of the light will change.

The mood lamp will turn off

when the button is pressed

again after the last colour or

when the mood lamp button

is pressed for approximately

4 seconds or when the

ROOM, DOOR or DIMMER

button is pressed.

➄ DIMMER : Whenever you push this

button when the room lamp

is turned on, the brightness

of the room lamp will

change within 3 level.

✽

NOTICE

If you want to defrost and defog on the

front windscreen, refer to “Windscreen

Defrosting and Defogging” in this sec-

tion.

Rear window defroster

The defroster heats the window to

remove frost, fog and thin ice from the

rear window, whilst engine is running.

To activate the rear window defroster,

press the rear window defroster button

located in the centre facia switch panel.

The indicator on the rear window

defroster button illuminates when the

defroster is ON.

If there is heavy accumulation of snow on

the rear window, brush it off before oper-

ating the rear defroster.

The rear window defroster automatically

turns off after approximately 20 minutes

or when the ignition switch is turned off (if

equipped). To turn off the defroster, press

the rear window defroster button again.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the conduc-

tors bonded to the inside surface of

the rear window, never use sharp

instruments or window cleaners

containing abrasives to clean the

window.

DEFROSTER (IF EQUIPPED)

OTQ045265

475

Features of your vehicle

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OTQ045250/OTQ045251

1. Front temperature control button (knob)

2. Rear temperature control button (knob)

3. Front fan speed control knob

4. Rear fan speed control knob/

Rear climate control selection knob*

5. Front windscreen defroster button

6. Rear window defroster button

7. Mode selection button

8. Air conditioning button*

9. Air intake control button

* : if equipped

■

Type A

Front climate control

■

Type B

CAUTION

Operating the blower when the

ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion could cause the battery to dis-

charge. Operate the blower when

the engine is running.

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

Features of your vehicle

764

OTQ045252/OTQ045253/OTQ047067

1. Front temperature control button (knob)

2. Front fan speed control knob

3. Front windscreen defroster button

4. Rear window defroster button

5. Mode selection button

6. Air intake control button

7. Rear fan speed control knob*

8. Rear temperature control* and

mode selection knob*

* : if equipped

■

Type C

■

Type D

CAUTION

Operating the blower when the

ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion could cause the battery to dis-

charge. Operate the blower when

the engine is running.

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

Rear climate control (if equipped)

477

Features of your vehicle

Heating and air conditioning

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired position.

For improving the effectiveness of

heating and cooling;

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the

air conditioning system (if equipped)

on.

OTQ046228R

Features of your vehicle

784

Mode selection

The mode selection buttons control the

direction of the air flow through the venti-

lation system.

Air can be directed to the floor, dash-

board outlets, or windscreen.

Face-Level (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body

and face. Additionally, each outlet can be

controlled to direct the air discharged

from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, D, C, F)

Air flow is directed towards the face and

the floor.

Floor-Level (C, F, A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor, with a small amount of the air being

directed to the windscreen and side win-

dow defrosters.

Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, F, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor

and the windscreen with a small amount

directed to the side window defrosters.

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed

separately using the horizontal thumb-

wheel. To close the vent, rotate it left to

the maximum position. To open the vent,

rotate it right to the desired position.

Also, you can adjust the direction of air

delivery from these vents using the vent

control lever as shown.

OTQ045229 OTQ047071

479

Features of your vehicle

Temperature control

The temperature control button (knob)

allows you to control the temperature of

the airflow in the vehicle.

To change the temperature (Type A, B) :

• Press the (red) switch to increase

temperature.

• Press the (blue) switch to decrease

temperature.

The temperature status will be displayed

at the above switch panel as a indicator.

To change the temperature (Type C, D) :

• Turn the knob to the right for warm and

hot air or left for cooler air

Air intake control

The air intake control is used to select

the outside (fresh) air position or recircu-

lated air position.

To change the air intake control position,

press the control button.

OTQ045230

■ Type A ■ Type B

OTQ045232

OTQ045233

■ Type A, B

■ Type C, D

OTQ045236

Features of your vehicle

804

Type A, B

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air

position selected, air from

the passenger compart-

ment will be drawn through

the heating system and

heated or cooled according

to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh) air

position selected, air enters

the vehicle from outside and

is heated or cooled accord-

ing to the function selected.

Type C, D

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air

position selected, air from

the passenger compart-

ment will be drawn through

the heating system and

heated or cooled according

to the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh) air

position selected, air enters

the vehicle from outside and

is heated or cooled accord-

ing to the function selected.

✽

NOTICE

Prolonged operation of the heater in the

recirculated air position (without air

conditioning selected) may cause fogging

of the windscreen and side windows and

the air within the passenger compart-

ment may become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air con-

ditioning with the recirculated air posi-

tion selected will result in excessively dry

air in the passenger compartment.

WARNING

• Continue using the climate con-

trol system in the recirculated air

position may allow humidity to

increase inside the vehicle which

may fog the glass and obscure

visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the

air conditioning or heating sys-

tem on. It may cause serious

harm or death due to a drop in the

oxygen level and/or body temper-

ature.

• Continue using the climate control

system in the recirculated air posi-

tion can cause drowsiness or

sleepiness, and loss of vehicle

control. Set the air intake control

to the outside (fresh) air position

as much as possible whilst driv-

481

Features of your vehicle

Fan speed control

The ignition switch must be in the ON

position for fan operation.

The fan speed control knob allows you to

control the fan speed of the air flowing

from the ventilation system. To change

the fan speed, turn the knob to the right

for higher speed or left for lower speed.

Setting the fan speed control knob to the

“0” position turns off the fan.

To turn off the blowers

To turn off the blowers, turn the fan

speed control knob to the "0" position.

Air conditioning (if equipped)

Press the A/C button to turn the air con-

ditioning system on (indicator light will

illuminate). Press the button again to turn

the air conditioning system off.

OTQ045260 OTQ045234 OTQ045261

■ Type A, B

Features of your vehicle

824

Rear heating and air conditioning

(Type A, B) (if equipped)

The temperature, fan speed and mode of

the rear climate control system can be

controlled independently regardless of the

front climate control system operation.

Turn the rear climate control selection

knob to the “R” and set the rear tempera-

ture, fan speed and mode to the desired

position.

However, the front climate control system

should be operated together for rear air

conditioning;

1. Set the front fan speed to the desired

position.

2. Push the air conditioning button.

3. Set the rear temperature, fan speed

and mode to the desired position.

Rear vents

The vent can be adjusted by rotating the

thumb wheel.

✽

NOTICE

If all the vents are closed, it may cause

some noise. Always open 2 vents or

more.

Rear temperature control

To change the air temperature in the rear

passenger compartment, turn the knob

to the right for warm and hot air or left for

cooler air.

OTQ047076 OTQ047077

OTQ045231

In the front seat

OTQ047079

In the rear seat

483

Features of your vehicle

The rear mode is selected automatically

by selecting the rear temperature control.

• : Rear air blows from the upper

vents on the rear side ceiling.

• : Rear air blows from the upper

vents on the rear side ceiling and

the lower vents on the floor.

• : Rear air blows from the lower

vents on the floor.

Rear fan speed control

To change the fan speed, turn the knob

to the right for higher speed or left for

lower speed.

To turn off the fan, turn the knob to the 0

position.

System operation

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn

the air conditioning system (if equipped)

on.

• If the windscreen fogs up, set the mode

to the position.

OTQ047095

In the front seat

OTQ047080

In the rear seat

Features of your vehicle

844

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from

entering the car through the ventilation

system, temporarily set the air intake

control to the recirculated air position.

Be sure to return the control to the

fresh air position when the irritation

has passed to keep fresh air in the

vehicle. This will help keep the driver

alert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling system is

drawn in through the grilles just ahead

of the windscreen. Care should be

taken that these are not blocked by

leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the wind-

screen, set the air intake control to the

fresh air position and fan speed to the

desired position, turn on the air condi-

tioning system, and adjust the temper-

ature control to desired temperature.

Air conditioning (if equipped)

HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are

filled with environmentally friendly

R-134a refrigerant.

1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-

tioning button.

2. Set the mode to the position.

3. Set the air intake control to the outside

air or recirculated air position.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-

perature control to maintain maximum

comfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired, set

the temperature control to the extreme

left position, then set the fan speed

control to the highest speed.

✽

NOTICE

• When using the air conditioning sys-

tem, monitor the temperature gauge

closely whilst driving up hills or in

heavy traffic when outside tempera-

tures are high. Air conditioning sys-

tem operation may cause engine over-

heating. Continue to use the blower

fan but turn the air conditioning sys-

tem off if the temperature gauge indi-

cates engine overheating.

• When opening the windows in humid

weather air conditioning may create

water droplets inside the vehicle.

Since excessive water droplets may

cause damage to electrical equipment,

air conditioning should only be run

with the windows closed.

485

Features of your vehicle

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct

sunlight during hot weather, open the

windows for a short time to let the hot

air inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of the

windows on rainy or humid days,

decrease the humidity inside the vehi-

cle by operating the air conditioning

system.

• During air conditioning system opera-

tion, you may occasionally notice a

slight change in engine speed as the

air conditioning compressor cycles.

This is a normal system operation

characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system every

month only for a few minutes to ensure

maximum system performance.

• When using the air conditioning sys-

tem, you may notice clear water drip-

ping (or even puddling) on the ground

under the passenger side of the vehi-

cle. This is a normal system operation

characteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning system

in the recirculated air position provides

maximum cooling, however, continual

operation in this mode may cause the

air inside the vehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you may

occasionally notice a misty air flow

because of rapid cooling and humid air

intake. This is a normal system opera-

tion characteristics.

Fuel-fired Heater (If Equipped)

This fuel-fired heater supplies additional

heat to the interior compartment with a

low fuel consumption to compensate the

heat provided by engine alone.

The following 3 conditions should be

meet at the same time for automatic

operation of the fuel-fired heater.

• Engine runs.

• Ambient temperature is lower than 5°C.

• Coolant temperature is lower than

68°C.

A cleaning process of the fuel-fired

heater will be performed automatically

when the heater is not operated due to

increase of coolant temperature and igni-

tion off.

During cleaning process, supplied fuel in

the heater will be burnt completely and

any smoke will be expelled. It is a neces-

sary process for next operation and dura-

bility of the heater and takes about 1~3

minutes.

Features of your vehicle

864

✽

NOTICE

• The following symptoms will occur

and it is normal.

- A white smoke may come out from

the fuel-fired heater exhaust pipe

during operation of the heater.

However, when an excessive black

smoke is discharged, the fuel-fired

heater should be inspected.

- A “buk-buk” noise from the heater is

a noise to form flame for combus-

tion.

- When the heater is operated at full

load, a “Wooing” noise occurs.

- When shutting off the engine during

heater operation, a “Wing” noise

occurs to perform the cleaning

process.

• When refuelling, stop operation of the

fuel-fired heater by shutting off the

engine.

Climate control air filter

(if equipped)

The climate control air filter installed

behind the glove box filters the dust or

other pollutants that come into the vehi-

cle from the outside through the heating

and air conditioning system. If dust or

other pollutants accumulate in the filter

over a period of time, the air flow from the

air vents may decrease, resulting in

moisture accumulation on the inside of

the windscreen even when the outside

(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-

pens, we recommend that the climate

control air filter be replaced by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

✽

NOTICE

• Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the car is being driven in severe

conditions such as dusty or rough

roads, more frequent air conditioner

filter inspections and changes are

required.

• When the air flow rate suddenly

decreases, we recommend that the

system be checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

1LDA5047

Outside air

Recirculated

air

Climate control

air filter

Blower

Evaporator

core

Heater core

487

Features of your vehicle

Checking the amount of air con-

ditioner refrigerant and compres-

sor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low,

the performance of the air conditioning is

reduced. Overfilling also has a negative

impact on the air conditioning system.

Therefore, we recommend that the sys-

tem be inspected by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

✽

NOTICE

It is important when servicing the air

conditioning system that the correct

type and amount of oil and refrigerant is

used. Otherwise, damage to the com-

pressor and abnormal system operation

may occur.

WARNING

Improper service may cause seri-

ous injury to the person performing

the service. For more detailed infor-

mation, we recommend that you

contact a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

Features of your vehicle

884

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OTQ045254/OTQ045255/OTQ047067

1. Front temperature control button (knob)

2. Rear temperature control button (knob)

3. Front fan speed control knob

4. Rear fan speed control knob/

Rear climate control selection knob

5. Front windscreen defroster button

6. Rear window defroster button

7. AUTO (automatic control) button

8. Front blower OFF button

9. Mode selection button

10. Air conditioning button

11. Air intake control button

12. A/C display

13. Rear fan speed control knob*

14. Rear temperature control* and mode

selection knob*

* : if equipped

■

Type B

CAUTION

Operating the blower when the

ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion could cause the battery to dis-

charge. Operate the blower when

the engine is running.

Front climate control

■

Type A

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

Rear climate control (if equipped)

489

Features of your vehicle

Automatic heating and air condi-

tioning

1 Press the AUTO button.

The modes, fan speeds, air intake and

air-conditioning will be controlled auto-

matically by setting the temperature.

2. Set the temperature control button to

the desired temperature.

✽

NOTICE

• To turn the automatic operation off,

select any button or switch of the fol-

lowing:

- Mode selection button

- Air conditioning button

- Front windscreen defroster button

(Press the button one more time to

deselect the front windscreen

defroster function. The 'AUTO' sign

will illuminate on the information

display once again.)

- Air intake control button

- Fan speed control switch

The selected function will be con-

trolled manually whilst other func-

tions operate automatically.

• For your convenience and to improve

the effectiveness of the climate con-

trol, use the AUTO button and set the

temperature to 22°C/71°F (23°C/73°F

- Except Europe).

OTQ045239

OTQ045231

■ Type A ■ Type B

Features of your vehicle

904

✽

NOTICE

Never place anything over the sensor

located on the instrument panel to

ensure better control of the heating and

cooling system.

Manual heating and air condition-

ing

The heating and cooling system can be

controlled manually by pressing buttons

or turning knob(s) other than the AUTO

button. In this case, the system works

sequentially according to the order of

buttons or knob(s) selected.

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired position.

For improving the effectiveness of

heating and cooling;

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the

air conditioning system on.

Press the AUTO button in order to con-

vert to full automatic control of the sys-

tem.

Mode selection

The mode selection button controls the

direction of the air flow through the venti-

lation system.

The air flow outlet port is converted as

follows:

Refer to the illustration in the “Manual cli-

mate control system”.

OTQ045263OTQ046084

491

Features of your vehicle

Face-Level

Air flow is directed toward the upper body

and face. Additionally, each outlet can be

controlled to direct the air discharged

from the outlet.

Bi-Level

Air flow is directed towards the face and

the floor.

Floor-Level

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor, with a small amount of the air being

directed to the windscreen and side win-

dow defrosters.

Floor/Defrost-Level

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor

and the windscreen with a small amount

directed to the side window defrosters.

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed

separately using the thumbwheel.

Also, you can adjust the direction of air

delivery from these vents using the vent

control lever as shown.

OTQ047071R

Features of your vehicle

924

Temperature control

The temperature control button (knob)

allows you to control the temperature of

the airflow in the vehicle.

To change the temperature :

• Press the (red) switch to increase

temperature.

• Press the (blue) switch to decrease

temperature.

The temperature status will be displayed

at the above switch panel as a indicator.

Air intake control

The air intake control is used to select

the outside (fresh) air position or recircu-

lated air position.

To change the air intake control position,

press the control button.

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air

position selected, air from

the passenger compart-

ment will be drawn through

the heating system and

heated or cooled according

to the function selected.

❈ According to the outside temperature if

the recirculation air position is on for a

long time, the air intake position will auto-

matically change to the outside(fresh) air

position to ventilate the inside air.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh) air

position selected, air enters

the vehicle from outside

and is heated or cooled

according to the function

selected.

OTQ045264

OTQ045230

■ Type A ■ Type B

493

Features of your vehicle

✽

NOTICE

Prolonged operation of the heater in the

recirculated air position (without air

conditioning selected) may cause fog-

ging of the windscreen and side windows

and the air within the passenger com-

partment may become stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air con-

ditioning with the recirculated air posi-

tion selected will result in excessively dry

air in the passenger compartment.

Fan speed control

The fan speed control knob allows you to

control the fan speed of the airflow in the

vehicle.

To change the fan speed:

• Turn the knob to the right (+) to

increase fan speed.

• Turn the knob to the left (-) to decrease

fan speed.

To turn off the fan speed, press the OFF

button.

WARNING

• Continue using the climate con-

trol system in the recirculated air

position may allow humidity to

increase inside the vehicle which

may fog the glass and obscure

visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the

air conditioning or heating sys-

tem on. It may cause serious

harm or death due to a drop in the

oxygen level and/or body temper-

ature.

• Continue using the climate control

system in the recirculated air

position can cause drowsiness or

sleepiness, and loss of vehicle

control. Set the air intake control

to the outside (fresh) air position

as much as possible whilst driv-

OTQ045235

Features of your vehicle

944

Air conditioning

Press the A/C button to turn the air con-

ditioning system on (indicator light will

illuminate).

Press the button again to turn the air

conditioning system off.

OFF mode (for 1st)

Press the front blower OFF button to turn

off the front air climate control system.

However, you can still operate the mode

and air intake buttons as long as the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position.

Rear heating and air conditioning

(if equipped)

The temperature, fan speed and mode of

the rear climate control system can be

controlled independently regardless of the

front climate control system operation.

Turn the rear climate control selection

knob to the “R” and set the rear tempera-

ture, fan speed and mode to the desired

position.

However, the front climate control system

should be operated together for rear air

conditioning;

1. Set the front fan speed to the desired

position.

2. Push the air conditioning button.

3. Set the rear temperature, fan speed

and mode to the desired position.

OTQ045240 OTQ047076OTQ045238

495

Features of your vehicle

Rear vents

The vent can be adjusted by rotating the

thumb wheel.

✽

NOTICE

If all the vents are closed, it may cause

some noise. Always open 2 vents or

more.

Rear temperature control

To change the air temperature in the rear

passenger compartment, turn the knob

to the right for warm and hot air or left for

cooler air.

The rear mode is selected automatically

by selecting the rear temperature control.

• : Rear air blows from the upper

vents on the rear side ceiling.

• : Rear air blows from the upper

vents on the rear side ceiling and

the lower vents on the floor.

• : Rear air blows from the lower

vents on the floor.

OTQ047077

OTQ045231

In the front seat

OTQ047079

In the rear seat

Features of your vehicle

964

Rear fan speed control

To change the fan speed, turn the knob

to the right for higher speed or left for

lower speed.

To turn off the fan, turn the knob to the 0

position.

System operation

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn

the air conditioning system (if

equipped) on.

• If the windscreen fogs up, set the mode

to the

or position.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from

entering the car through the ventilation

system, temporarily set the air intake

control to the recirculated air position.

Be sure to return the control to the

fresh air position when the irritation

has passed to keep fresh air in the

vehicle. This will help keep the driver

alert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling system is

drawn in through the grilles just ahead

of the windscreen. Care should be

taken that these are not blocked by

leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the wind-

screen, set the air intake control to the

fresh air position and fan speed to the

desired position, turn on the air condi-

tioning system, and adjust the temper-

ature control to desired temperature.

OTQ047095

In the front seat

OTQ047080

In the rear seat

497

Features of your vehicle

Air conditioning (if equipped)

HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are

filled with environmentally friendly

R-134a refrigerant.

1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-

tioning button.

2. Set the mode to the position.

3. Set the air intake control to the outside

air or recirculated air position.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-

perature control to maintain maximum

comfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired, set

the temperature control to the extreme

left position, then set the fan speed

control to the highest speed.

✽

NOTICE

• When using the air conditioning sys-

tem, monitor the temperature gauge

closely whilst driving up hills or in

heavy traffic when outside tempera-

tures are high. Air conditioning sys-

tem operation may cause engine over-

heating. Continue to use the blower

fan but turn the air conditioning sys-

tem off if the temperature gauge indi-

cates engine overheating.

• When opening the windows in humid

weather air conditioning may create

water droplets inside the vehicle.

Since excessive water droplets may

cause damage to electrical equipment,

air conditioning should only be run

with the windows closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct

sunlight during hot weather, open the

windows for a short time to let the hot

air inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of the

windows on rainy or humid days,

decrease the humidity inside the vehi-

cle by operating the air conditioning

system.

• During air conditioning system opera-

tion, you may occasionally notice a

slight change in engine speed as the

air conditioning compressor cycles.

This is a normal system operation

characteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system every

month only for a few minutes to ensure

maximum system performance.

• When using the air conditioning sys-

tem, you may notice clear water drip-

ping (or even puddling) on the ground

under the passenger side of the vehi-

cle. This is a normal system operation

characteristic.

Features of your vehicle

984

• Operating the air conditioning system

in the recirculated air position provides

maximum cooling, however, continual

operation in this mode may cause the

air inside the vehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you may

occasionally notice a misty air flow

because of rapid cooling and humid air

intake. This is a normal system opera-

tion characteristics.

Fuel-fired Heater (If equipped)

This fuel-fired heater supplies additional

heat to the interior compartment with a

low fuel consumption to compensate the

heat provided by engine alone.

The following 3 conditions should be

meet at the same time for automatic

operation of the fuel-fired heater.

• Engine runs.

• Ambient temperature is lower than 5°C.

• Coolant temperature is lower than

68°C.

A cleaning process of the fuel-fired

heater will be performed automatically

when the heater is not operated due to

increase of coolant temperature and igni-

tion off.

During cleaning process, supplied fuel in

the heater will be burnt completely and

any smoke will be expelled. It is a neces-

sary process for next operation and dura-

bility of the heater and takes about 1~3

minutes.

✽

NOTICE

• The following symptoms will occur

and it is normal.

- A white smoke may come out from

the fuel-fired heater exhaust pipe

during operation of the heater.

However, when an excessive black

smoke is discharged, the fuel-fired

heater should be inspected.

- A “buk-buk” noise from the heater is

a noise to form flame for combus-

tion.

- When the heater is operated at full

load, a “Wooing” noise occurs.

- When shutting off the engine during

heater operation, a “Wing” noise

occurs to perform the cleaning

process.

• When refuelling, stop operation of the

fuel-fired heater by shutting off the

engine.

499

Features of your vehicle

Climate control air filter

(if equipped)

The climate control air filter installed

behind the glove box filters the dust or

other pollutants that come into the vehi-

cle from the outside through the heating

and air conditioning system. If dust or

other pollutants accumulate in the filter

over a period of time, the air flow from the

air vents may decrease, resulting in

moisture accumulation on the inside of

the windscreen even when the outside

(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-

pens, we recommend that the climate

control air filter be replaced by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

✽

NOTICE

• Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the car is being driven in severe

conditions such as dusty or rough

roads, more frequent air conditioner

filter inspections and changes are

required.

• When the air flow rate suddenly

decreases, we recommend that the

system be checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

Checking the amount of air con-

ditioner refrigerant and compres-

sor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low,

the performance of the air conditioning is

reduced. Overfilling also has a negative

impact on the air conditioning system.

Therefore, we recommend that the sys-

tem be inspected by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

✽

NOTICE

It is important when servicing the air

conditioning system that the correct

type and amount of oil and refrigerant is

used. Otherwise, damage to the com-

pressor and abnormal system operation

may occur.

WARNING

Improper service may cause seri-

ous injury to the person performing

the service. For more detailed infor-

mation, we recommend that you

contact a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

1LDA5047

Outside air

Recirculated

air

Climate control

air filter

Blower

Evaporator

core

Heater core

Features of your vehicle

1004

• For maximum defrosting, set the tem-

perature control to the extreme

right/hot position and the fan speed

control to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desired whilst

defrosting or defogging, set the mode

to the floor-defrost position.

• Before driving, clear all snow and ice

from the windscreen, rear window, out-

side rear view mirrors, and all side win-

dows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the bonnet

and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve

heater and defroster efficiency and to

reduce the probability of fogging up the

inside of the windscreen.

Manual climate control system

To defog inside windscreen

1. Select any fan speed except “0” posi-

tion.

2. Select desired temperature.

3. Select the or position.

4. If the position is selected, the out-

side (fresh) air and air conditioning will

be selected automatically.

If the air conditioning and outside (fresh)

air position are not selected automatical-

ly, press the corresponding button manu-

ally.

WINDSCREEN DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

OTQ045268

WARNING

- Windscreen

heating

Do not use the or position

during cooling operation in

extremely humid weather. The dif-

ference between the temperature of

the outside air and that of the wind-

screen could cause the outer sur-

face of the windscreen to fog up,

causing loss of visibility. In this

case, set the mode selection knob

or button to the position and

fan speed control knob or button to

the lower speed.

4101

Features of your vehicle

To defrost outside windscreen

1. Set the fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position.

2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot

position.

3. Select the position.

4. The outside (fresh) air and air condi-

tioning will be selected automatically.

Automatic climate control system

To defog inside windscreen

1. Select desired fan speed.

2. Select desired temperature.

3. Press the defroster button ( ).

4. The air-conditioning will turn on

according to the detected ambient

temperature, outside (fresh) air posi-

tion and higher fan speed will be

selected automatically.

If the air-conditioning, outside (fresh) air

position and higher fan speed are not

selected automatically, adjust the corre-

sponding button or knob manually.

If the position is selected, lower fan

speed is controlled to higher fan speed.

OTQ045270OTQ045269

Features of your vehicle

1024

To defrost outside windscreen

1. Set fan speed to the highest position.

2. Set temperature to the extreme hot

(HI) position.

3. Press the defroster button ( ).

4. The air-conditioning will turn on

according to the detected ambient

temperature and outside (fresh) air

position will be selected automatically.

If the position is selected, lower fan

speed is controlled to higher fan speed.

Defogging logic (if equipped)

To reduce the possibility of fogging up

the inside of the windscreen, the air

intake or air conditioning are controlled

automatically according to certain condi-

tions such as position. To cancel or

return the defogging logic, do the follow-

ing.

Manual climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.

2. Turn the mode selection knob to the

defrost position ( ).

3. Push the air intake control button at

least 5 times within 3 seconds.

The indicator light in the air intake control

button will blink 3 times with 0.5 second

of interval. It indicates that the defogging

logic is canceled or returned to the pro-

grammed status.

If the battery has been discharged or dis-

connected, it resets to the defog logic

status.

OTQ045271 OTQ045277

4103

Features of your vehicle

Automatic climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.

2. Press the defroster button ( ).

3. Whilst pressing the air conditioning

button (A/C), press the air intake con-

trol button at least 5 times within 3 sec-

onds.

The indicator on the air intake button

blinks 3 times with 0.5 seconds of inter-

val. It indicates that the defogging logic is

canceled or returned to the programmed

status.

OTQ045272

Features of your vehicle

1044

These compartments can be used to

store small items required by the driver

or passengers.

Glove box

To open the glove box, pull the handle

and the glove box will automatically

open. Close the glove box after use.

Sunglass holder (if equipped)

To open the sunglass holder, press the

cover and the holder will slowly open.

Place your sunglasses in the compart-

ment door with the lenses facing out.

Push to close.

STORAGE COMPARTMENT

OTQ047108OTQ047107/H

WARNING

To reduce the risk of injury in an

accident or sudden stop, always

keep the glove box door closed

whilst driving.

WARNING - Flammable

materials

Do not store cigarette lighters,

propane cylinders, or other flamma-

ble/explosive materials in the vehi-

cle. These items may catch fire

and/or explode if the vehicle is

exposed to hot temperatures for

extended periods.

CAUTION

• To avoid possible theft, do not

leave valuables in the storage

compartment.

• Always keep the storage com-

partment covers closed whilst

driving. Do not attempt to place

so many items in the storage

compartment that the storage

compartment cover can not close

securely.

CAUTION

Do not keep food in the glove box

for a long time.

4105

Features of your vehicle

Multi box (if equipped)

To open the cover, pull the handle down.

Close the cover after use.

Cool box (if equipped)

You can keep beverage cans or other

items cool using the open/close lever of

the vent installed in the multi box.

1. Turn on the fan and set the tempera-

ture control to the desired position.

OTQ047109/H

WARNING

• Do not keep objects except sun-

glass inside the sunglass holder.

Such objects can be thrown from

the holder in the event of a sud-

den stop or an accident, possibly

injuring the passengers in the

vehicle.

• Do not open the sunglass holder

whilst the vehicle is moving. The

rear view mirror of the vehicle

can be blocked by an open sun-

glass holder.

• Do not put the glasses forcibly

into a sunglass holder to prevent

breakage or deformation of

glasses. It may cause personal

injury if you try to open it forcibly

when the glasses are jammed in

holder.

OTQ045081R

Features of your vehicle

1064

2. Set the mode control to the face (

) or bi-level ( ) position.

3. Turn the open/close lever of the vent

installed in the multi box to the open

position.

4. When the cool box is not used, turn

the lever to its closed position.

For improving the effectiveness of the

cool box, do as follows;

1. Set the temperature to the cold

(extreme left) position for cool air.

Turn on the air conditioning system for

cooler air.

2. Set the fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position.

3. Set the mode to the face ( ) posi-

tion.

✽

NOTICE

If some items in the cool box block the

vent, the cooling effectiveness of the cool

box is reduced.

WARNING

Do not put the perishable food in

the cool box because it may not be

able to maintain the necessary con-

sistent temperature to keep the

food fresh.

4107

Features of your vehicle

Cigarette lighter

For the cigarette lighter to work, the igni-

tion switch must be in the ACC position

or the ON position.

To open the cover, press the cover and it

will slowly open.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the

way into its socket. When the element

has heated, the lighter will pop out to the

“ready” position.

Ashtray

INTERIOR FEATURES

CAUTION

We recommend that you use parts

for replacement from a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

The use of plug-in accessories

(shavers, hand-held vacuums, and

coffee pots, etc.) may damage the

socket or cause electrical failure.

WARNING

• Do not hold the lighter in after it

is already heated because it will

overheat.

• If the lighter does not pop out

within 30 seconds, remove it to

prevent overheating.

• Do not insert foreign objects into

the socket of the cigarette lighter.

It may damage the cigarette

lighter.

OTQ047110R

WARNING - Ashtray use

• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtrays

as waste receptacles.

• Putting lit cigarettes or matches in

an ashtray with other combustible

materials may cause a fire.

OTQ047111R

1VQA2187

Rear (if equipped)

Front

Features of your vehicle

1084

Front

To open the cover, press the cover and it

will slowly open. To clean the ashtray, the

plastic receptacle should be removed by

lifting the plastic ash receptacle upward

and pulling it out.

Rear (if equipped)

To use the ashtray, open the cover.

To remove the ashtray to empty or clean,

pull it up and out.

Cup holder

WARNING

- Hot liquids

• Do not place uncovered cups of

hot liquid in the cup holder whilst

the vehicle is in motion. If the hot

liquid spills, you burn yourself.

Such a burn to the driver could

lead to loss of control of the vehi-

cle.

• To reduce the risk of personal

injury in the event of sudden stop

or collision, do not place uncov-

ered or unsecured bottles, glass-

es, cans, etc., in the cup holder

whilst the vehicle is in motion.

OTQ047112R

OTQ047113

Front

Centre seat

OTQ044114

Rear

(if equipped)

WARNING

Keep cans or bottles out of direct

sun light and do not put them in a

vehicle that is heated up. It may

explode.

CAUTION

When putting the drinking water on

the front or the centre seat cup

holder, the liquid may flow into the

external input terminal (if equipped)

by sudden braking, so be sure to

close the lid of the drinking water.

4109

Features of your vehicle

Front

To open the cover, press the knob on the

cover and it will slowly open.

Place a cup or small beverage can after

pulling out the blade (1).

Centre seat/Rear (if equipped)

Cups or small beverage cans may be

placed in the cup holders.

Sunvisor

Use the sunvisor to shield direct light

through the front or side windows.

To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.

To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull

it downward, unsnap it from the bracket

(1) and swing it to the side (2).

To use the vanity mirror (if equipped), pull

down the visor and slide the mirror cover

(3).

Adjust the sunvisor forward or backward

(4, if equipped).

The ticket holder (5) is provided for hold-

ing a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)

CAUTION - Vanity mirror

lamp (if equipped)

Close the vanity mirror cover

securely and return the sunvisor to

its original position after use. If the

vanity mirror is not closed securely,

the lamp will stay on and could

result in battery discharge and pos-

sible sunvisor damage.

OTQ047115R

* : if equipped

Features of your vehicle

1104

Power outlet (if equipped)

The power outlet is designed to provide

power for mobile telephones or other

devices designed to operate with vehicle

electrical systems. The devices should

draw less than 10 amps with the engine

running.

Digital clock (if equipped)

Whenever the battery terminals or relat-

ed fuses are disconnected, you must

reset the time.

When the ignition switch is in the ACC or

ON position, the clock buttons operate as

follows:

OTQ047116R

WARNING

Do not put a finger or a foreign ele-

ment (pin, etc.) into a power outlet

and do not touch with a wet hand.

You may get an electric shock.

OTQ047119

WARNING

Do not adjust the clock whilst driv-

ing. You may lose your steering

control and cause an accident that

results in severe personal injury or

death.

CAUTION

• Use the power outlet only when

the engine is running and remove

the accessory plug after use.

Using the accessory plug for pro-

longed periods of time with the

engine off could cause the bat-

tery to discharge.

• Only use 12V electric accessories

which are less than 10A in elec-

tric capacity.

• Adjust the air-conditioner or

heater to the lowest operating

level when using the power outlet.

• Close the cover when not in use.

• Some electronic devices can

cause electronic interference

when plugged into a vehicle’s

power outlet. These devices may

cause excessive audio static and

malfunctions in other electronic

systems or devices used in your

vehicle.

4111

Features of your vehicle

Hour (1)

Pressing the H button with your finger, a

pencil or similar object will advance the

time displayed by one hour.

Minute (2)

Pressing the M button with your finger, a

pencil or similar object will advance the

time displayed by one minute.

Reset (3)

To clear away minutes, press the R but-

ton with your finger, a pencil or similar

object. Then the clock will be set precise-

ly on the hour.

For example, if the R button is pressed

whilst the time is between 9:01 and 9:29,

the display will be reset to 9:00.

9:01 ~ 9:29 display changed to 9:00

9:30 ~ 9:59 display changed to 10:00

Display conversion (if equipped)

To change the 12 hour format to the 24

hour format, press the R button until the

display blinks.

For example, if the R button is pressed

whilst the time is 10:15 p.m., the display

will be changed to 22:15.

Clothes hanger (if equipped)

OTQ047122

CAUTION

Do not hang heavy clothes, since

those may damage the hook.

WARNING

Do not hang other objects except

clothes. In an accident it may cause

vehicle damage or personal injury.

Features of your vehicle

1124

Floor mat anchor(s) (if equipped)

When using a floor mat on the front floor

carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor

mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps

the floor mat from sliding forward.

WARNING

The following must be observed

when installing ANY floor mat to

the vehicle.

• Ensure that the floor mats are

securely attached to the vehicle’s

floor mat anchor(s) before driving

the vehicle.

• Do not use ANY floor mat that

cannot be firmly attached to the

vehicle’s floor mat anchors.

• Do not stack floor mats on top of

one another (e.g. all-weather rub-

ber mat on top of a carpeted floor

mat). Only a single floor mat

should be installed in each posi-

tion.

IMPORTANT – Your vehicle was

manufactured with driver’s side

floor mat anchors that are

designed to securely hold the

floor mat in place. To avoid any

interference with pedal operation,

HYUNDAI recommends that the

HYUNDAI floor mat designed for

use in your vehicle be installed.

OXM049228

OCM039200N

Type A

Type C

Type B

4113

Features of your vehicle

✽

NOTICE

• If you install an aftermarket HID

head lamp, your vehicle’s audio and

electronic device may malfunction.

• Prevent chemicals such as perfume,

cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner

and air freshener from contacting the

interior parts because they may cause

damage or discoloration.

Antenna

Roof antenna (if equipped)

Your car uses a roof antenna to receive

both AM and FM broadcast signals. This

antenna is a removable type. To remove

the antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To

install the antenna, turn it clockwise.

AUDIO SYSTEM

CAUTION

• Before entering a place with a low

height clearance or a car wash,

remove surely the antenna by

rotating it counterclockwise. If

not, the antenna may be dam-

aged.

• When reinstalling your antenna, it

is important that it is fully tight-

ened. But it could be removed

when parking the vehicle or when

loading cargo on the roof rack.

• When cargo is loaded on the roof

rack, do not place the cargo near

the antenna pole to ensure proper

reception.

OHM048154L

Features of your vehicle

1144

Steering wheel audio control

(if equipped)

The steering wheel audio remote control

button is installed to promote safe driv-

ing.

VOLUME (VOL +/-) (1)

• Press the lever upward (+) to increase

the volume.

• Press the lever downward (-) to

decrease the volume.

SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)

The SEEK/PRESET button has different

functions based on the system mode. For

the following functions the button should

be pressed for 0.8 seconds or more.

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK select

button.

CD/USB mode

It will function as the FF/REW button.

If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed

for less than 0.8 second, it will work as

follows in each mode.

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STATION

buttons.

CD/USB/ iPod mode

It will function as TRACK UP/DOWN but-

ton.

MODE (3)

Press the button to change audio source.

FM (1~2)

➟ AM ➟ CD ➟ USB/AUX ➟

FM...

MUTE (4)

Press the button to mute the sound.

Detailed information for audio control

buttons are described in the following

pages in this section.

OTQ045124

CAUTION

Do not operate audio remote con-

trol buttons simultaneously.

4115

Features of your vehicle

AUX, USB (if equipped)

If your vehicle has an aux and/or USB

(universal serial bus) port, you can use

an aux port to connect audio devices and

an USB port to plug in an USB.

✽

NOTICE

When using a portable audio device

connected to the power outlet, noise may

occur during playback. If this happens,

use the power source of the portable

audio device.

How vehicle audio works

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast

from transmitter towers located around

your city. They are intercepted by the

radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal

is then received by the radio and sent to

your vehicle speakers.

When a strong radio signal has reached

your vehicle, the precise engineering of

your audio system ensures the best pos-

sible quality reproduction. However, in

some cases the signal coming to your

vehicle may not be strong and clear.

This can be due to factors, such as the

distance from the radio station, close-

ness of other strong radio stations or the

presence of buildings, bridges or other

large obstructions in the area.

OTQ045211R

JBM001

FM reception

Features of your vehicle

1164

AM broadcasts can be received at

greater distances than FM broadcasts.

This is because AM radio waves are

transmitted at low frequencies. These

long, low frequency radio waves can fol-

low the curvature of the earth rather than

travelling straight out into the atmos-

phere. In addition, they curve around

obstructions so that they can provide bet-

ter signal coverage.

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high

frequencies and do not bend to follow the

earth's surface. Because of this, FM

broadcasts generally begin to fade at

short distances from the station. Also,

FM signals are easily affected by build-

ings, mountains, or other obstructions.

These can result in certain listening con-

ditions which might lead you to believe a

problem exists with your radio. The fol-

lowing conditions are normal and do not

indicate radio trouble:

• Fading - As your vehicle moves away

from the radio station, the signal will

weaken and sound will begin to fade.

When this occurs, we suggest that you

select another stronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or

large obstructions between the trans-

mitter and your radio can disturb the

signal causing static or fluttering noises

to occur. Reducing the treble level may

lessen this effect until the disturbance

clears.

JBM002

AM (MW, LW) reception

JBM004JBM003

FM radio station

4117

Features of your vehicle

• Station Swapping - As a FM signal

weakens, another more powerful sig-

nal near the same frequency may

begin to play. This is because your

radio is designed to lock onto the clear-

est signal. If this occurs, select another

station with a stronger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals

being received from several directions

can cause distortion or fluttering. This

can be caused by a direct and reflect-

ed signal from the same station, or by

signals from two stations with close

frequencies. If this occurs, select

another station until the condition has

passed.

Using a mobile phone or a two-way

radio

When a mobile phone is used inside the

vehicle, noise may be produced from the

audio system. This does not mean that

something is wrong with the audio equip-

ment. In such a case, use the mobile

phone at a place as far as possible from

the audio equipment.

CAUTION

When using a communication sys-

tem such as a mobile phone or a

radio set inside the vehicle, a sepa-

rate external antenna must be fitted.

When a mobile phone or a radio set

is used with an internal antenna

alone, it may interfere with the vehi-

cle's electrical system and adversely

affect safe operation of the vehicle.

WARNING

Do not use a mobile phone whilst

driving. Stop at a safe location to

use a mobile phone.

JBM005

Features of your vehicle

1184

Caring for disc

• If the temperature inside the car is too

high, open the car windows to ventilate

before using the system.

• It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMA

files without permission. Use CDs that

are created only by lawful means.

• Do not apply volatile agents, such as

benzene and thinner, normal cleaners

and magnetic sprays made for ana-

logue disc onto CDs.

• To prevent the disc surface from get-

ting damaged, hold CDs by the edges

or the centre hole only.

• Clean the disc surface with a piece of

soft cloth before playback (wipe it from

the centre to the outside edge).

• Do not damage the disc surface or

attach pieces of sticky tape or paper.

• Make certain only CDs are inserted

into the CD player (Do not insert more

than one CD at a time).

• Keep CDs in their cases after use to

protect them from scratches or dirt.

• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-

RW CDs, certain CDs may not operate

normally according to manufacturing

companies or making and recording

methods. In such circumstances, con-

tinued use may cause malfunctions to

your audio system.

✽

NOTICE -

Playing an

Incompatible Copy

Protected Audio CD

Some copy protected CDs, which do not

comply with international audio CD

standards (Red Book), may not play on

your car audio. Please note that inabili-

ties to properly play a copy protected

CD may indicate that the CD is defec-

tive, not the CD player.

✽

NOTICE

Order of playing files (folders) :

1. Song playing order : to sequen-

tially.

2. Folder playing order :

❈

If no song file is contained in the folder,

that folder is not displayed.

4119

Features of your vehicle

WARNING

• Do not stare at the screen whilst

driving. Staring at the screen for

prolonged periods of time could

lead to traffic accidents.

• Do not disassemble, assemble, or

modify the audio system. Such

acts could result in accidents,

fire, or electric shock.

• Using the phone whilst driving

may lead to a lack of attention of

traffic conditions and increase

the likelihood of accidents. Use

the phone feature after parking

the vehicle.

• Heed caution not to spill water or

introduce foreign objects into the

device. Such acts could lead to

smoke, fire, or product malfunc-

tion.

(Continued)

• Driving whilst distracted can

result in a loss of vehicle control

that may lead to an accident,

severe personal injury, and death.

The driver’s primary responsibili-

ty is in the safe and legal opera-

tion of a vehicle, and use of any

handheld devices, other equip-

ment, or vehicle systems which

take the driver’s eyes, attention

and focus away from the safe

operation of a vehicle or which

are not permissible by law should

never be used during operation

of the vehicle.

(Continued)

• Please refrain from use if the

screen is blank or no sound can be

heard as these signs may indicate

product malfunction. Continued

use in such conditions could lead

to accidents (fires, electric shock)

or product malfunctions.

• Do not touch the antenna during

thunder or lightening as such acts

may lead to lightning induced elec-

tric shock.

• Do not stop or park in parking-

restricted areas to operate the

product. Such acts could lead to

traffic accidents.

• Use the system with the vehicle

ignition turned on. Prolonged use

with the ignition turned off could

result in battery discharge.

(Continued)

Features of your vehicle

1204

(Continued)

• Turn on the car ignition before

using this device. Do not operate

the audio system for long periods

of time with the ignition turned off

as such operations may lead to

battery discharge.

• Do not subject the device to

severe shock or impact. Direct

pressure onto the front side of

the monitor may cause damage to

the LCD or touch screen.

• When cleaning the device, make

sure to turn off the device and

use a dry and smooth cloth.

Never use tough materials, chem-

ical cloths, or solvents (alcohol,

benzene, thinners, etc.) as such

materials may damage the device

panel or cause colour/quality

deterioration

(Continued)

• Do not place beverages close to

the audio system. Spilling bever-

ages may lead to system mal-

function.

• In case of product malfunction,

please contact your place of pur-

chase or After Service centre.

• Placing the audio system within

an electromagnetic environment

may result in noise interference.

• Prevent caustic solutions such as

perfume and cosmetic oil from

contacting the dashboard because

they may cause damage or discol-

oration.

CAUTION

• Operating the device whilst driv-

ing could lead to accidents due to

a lack of attention to external sur-

roundings. First park the vehicle

before operating the device.

• Adjust the volume to levels that

allow the driver to hear sounds

from outside of the vehicle.

Driving in a state where external

sounds cannot be heard may lead

to accidents.

• Pay attention to the volume set-

ting when turning the device on.

A sudden output of extreme vol-

ume upon turning the device on

could lead to hearing impairment.

(Adjust the volume to a suitable

levels before turning off the

device.)

(Continued)

4121

Features of your vehicle

✽

NOTICE -

USING THE USB

DEVICE

• To use an external USB device, make

sure the device is not connected when

starting up the vehicle. Connect the

device after starting up.

• If you start the engine when the USB

device is connected, it may damage

the USB device. (USB flashdrives are

very sensitive to electric shock.)

• If the engine is started up or turned

off whilst the external USB device is

connected, the external USB device

may not work.

• The System may not play inauthentic

MP3 or WMA files.

1) It can only play MP3 files with the

compression rate between 8Kbps ~

320Kbps.

2) It can only play WMA music files

with the compression rate between

8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.

• Take precautions for static electricity

when connecting or disconnecting the

external USB device.

• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not

recognizable.

(Continued)

• Depending on the condition of the

external USB device, the connected

external USB device can be unrecog-

nizable.

• When the formatted byte/sector set-

ting of External USB device is not

either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE, then

the device will not be recognized.

• Use only a USB device formatted to

FAT 12/16/32.

• USB devices without USB I/F authen-

tication may not be recognizable.

• Make sure the USB connection termi-

nal does not come in contact with the

human body or other objects.

• If you repeatedly connect or discon-

nect the USB device in a short period

of time, it may break the device.

• You may hear a strange noise when

connecting or disconnecting a USB

device.

(Continued)

• If you disconnect the external USB

device during playback in USB mode,

the external USB device can be dam-

aged or may malfunction. Therefore,

disconnect the external USB device

when the audio is turned off or in

another mode. (e.g, Radio, CD)

• Depending on the type and capacity of

the external USB device or the type of

the files stored in the device, there is a

difference in the time taken for recog-

nition of the device.

• Do not use the USB device for purpos-

es other than playing music files.

• Playing videos through the USB is not

supported.

• Use of USB accessories such as recharg-

ers or heaters using USB I/F may lower

performance or cause trouble.

(Continued)

Features of your vehicle

1224

(Continued)

• If you use devices such as a USB hub

purchased separately, the vehicle’s

audio system may not recognize the

USB device. In that case, connect the

USB device directly to the multimedia

terminal of the vehicle.

• If the USB device is divided by logical

drives, only the music files on the

highest-priority drive are recognized

by car audio.

• Devices such as MP3 Player/ Mobile

phone/Digital camera can be unrecog-

nizable by standard USB I/F can be

unrecognizable.

• Charging through the USB may not

be supported in some mobile devices.

• USB HDD or USB types liable to con-

nection failures due to vehicle vibra-

tions are not supported. (i-stick type)

• Some non-standard USB devices

(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can be

unrecognizable.

(Continued)

• Some USB flash memory readers

(such as CF, SD, micro SD, etc.) or

external-HDD type devices can be

unrecognizable.

• Music files protected by DRM (DIGI-

TAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are

not recognizable.

• The data in the USB memory may be

lost whilst using this audio. Always

back up important data on a personal

storage device.

• Please avoid using USB

memory products which

can be used as key chains

or mobile phone acces-

sories as they could cause

damage to the USB jack. Please make

certain only to use plug type connector

products.

4123

Features of your vehicle

✽

NOTICE -

USING THE iPod

DEVICE

• Some iPod

models may not support

communication protocol and files may

not properly play.

Supported iPod

models:

- iPod

Mini

- iPod

4th (Photo) ~ 6th (Classic)

generation

- iPod

Nano 1st~4th generation

- iPod

Touch 1st~2nd generation

• The order of search or playback of

songs in the iPod

can be different

from the order searched in the audio

system.

• If the iPod

disabled due to its own

malfunction, reset the iPod

. (Reset:

Refer to iPod

manual)

• An iPod

may not operate normally

on low battery.

(Continued)

• Some iPod

devices, such as the

iPhone

, can be connected through

the Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

interface. The device must have audio

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology capa-

bility (such as for stereo headphone

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology ). The

device can play, but it will not be con-

trolled by the audio system.

• To use iPod

features within the

audio, use the cable provided upon

purchasing an iPod

d device.

• Skipping or improper operation may

occur depending on the characteris-

tics of your iPod

/iPhone

device.

• If your iPhone

is connected to both

the Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

and USB, the sound may not be prop-

erly played. In your iPhone

, select

the Dock connector or Bluetooth

Wireless Technology to change the

sound output (source).

(Continued)

• When connecting

iPod

with the

iPod

Power Cable, insert the connec-

tor to the multimedia socket complete-

ly. If not inserted completely, communi-

cations between

iPod

and audio may

be interrupted.

• When adjusting the sound effects of

the

iPod

and the audio system, the

sound effects of both devices will over-

lap and might reduce or distort the

quality of the sound.

• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer

function of an

iPod

when adjusting

the audio system’s volume, and turn

off the equalizer of the audio system

when using the equalizer of an

iPod

• When not using

iPod

with car audio,

detach the

iPod

cable from iPod

Otherwise,

iPod

may remain in

accessory mode, and may not work

properly.

Features of your vehicle

1244

✽

NOTICE -

USING THE

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

MOBILE PHONE

• Do not use a mobile phone or perform

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology settings

(e.g. pairing a phone) whilst driving.

• Some Bluetooth

Wireless Technology -

enabled phones may not be recognized by

the system or fully compatible with the

system.

• Before using Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology related features of the

audio system, refer your phone’s User’s

Manual for phone-side Bluetooth

Wireless Technology operations.

• The phone must be paired to the audio

system to use Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology related features.

• You will not be able to use the hands-

free feature when your phone (in the

car) is outside of the mobile service area

(e.g. in a tunnel, in a underground, in a

mountainous area, etc.).

(Continued)

• If the mobile phone signal is poor or

the vehicles interior noise is too loud, it

may be difficult to hear the other per-

son’s voice during a call.

• Do not place the phone near or inside

metallic objects, otherwise communi-

cations with Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology system or mobile service

stations can be disturbed.

• Whilst a phone is connected through

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology your

phone may discharge quicker than

usual for additional Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology-related operations.

• Some mobile phones or other devices

may cause interference noise or mal-

function to audio system. In this case,

store the device in a different location

may resolve the condition.

• Phone contact names should be saved

in English or they may not be displayed

correctly.

(Continued)

• If Priority is set upon vehicle

ignition(IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth

Wireless Technology phone will be

automatically connected.

Even if you are outside, the Bluetooth

Wireless Technology phone will be

automatically connected once you are

in the vicinity of the vehicle.

If you do not want automatic

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology con-

nection, turn the Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology feature off.

• The hands-free call volume and quali-

ty may differ depending on the mobile

phone type.

• Bluetooth

Wireless Technology features

can be used only when the mobile phone

has been paired and connected with the

device. For more information on pairing

and connecting Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology enabled mobile phones,

refer to the “Phone Setup” section.

(Continued)

4125

Features of your vehicle

(Continued)

• When a Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

mobile phone is connected, a ( ) icon

will appear at the top of the screen. If

a ( ) icon is not displayed, this indi-

cates that a Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology enabled device has not

been connected. You must connect the

device before use. For more informa-

tion on Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

mobile phones, refer to the “Phone

Setup” section.

• Pairing and connecting a Bluetooth

Wireless Technology enabled mobile

phone will work only when the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology option

within your mobile phone has been

turned on. (Methods of turning on the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

enabled feature may differ depending

on the mobile phone.)

(Continued)

• In some mobile phones, starting the

ignition whilst talking through

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

enabled handsfree call will result in

the call becoming disconnected.

(Switch the call back to your mobile

phone when starting the ignition.)

• Some features may not be supported in

some Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

mobile phone and devices.

• Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

enabled operation may be unstable

depending on the communication state.

• Placing the audio system within an

electromagnetic environment may

result in noise interference.

Features of your vehicle

1264

■

CD Player (For EUROPE)

4127

Features of your vehicle

SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND

FUNCTIONS

❈ Display and settings may differ

depending on the selected audio.

Audio Head Unit (For EUROPE)

1. (EJECT)

• Ejects the disc.

• Changes to FM/AM mode.

• Each time the key is pressed,the mode

is changed in order of FM1

➟ FM2 ➟

FMA ➟ AM ➟ AMA.

(for DAB model)

FM1

➟ FM2 ➟ FMA ➟ DAB1 ➟ DAB2

➟ AM.

• Changes to CD, USB(iPod

), AUX, My

Music, BT Audio mode.

• Each time the key is pressed, the mode

is changed in order of CD, USB(iPod

AUX, My Music, BT Audio.

4. (if equipped)

• Operates Phone Screen

❈ When a phone is not connected, the

connection screen is displayed.

• Radio Mode : Automatically searches

for broadcast frequencies.

• CD, USB, iPod

My Music modes

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-

onds): Moves to next or previous

song (file)

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8

seconds): Rewinds or fast-forwards

the current song.

6. POWER/VOL knob

• Power Knob: Turns power On/ Off by

pressing the knob

• Volume Knob: Sets volume by turn-

ing the knob left/right

7. ~ (Preset)

• Radio Mode: Saves frequencies (chan-

nels) or receives saved frequencies

(channels)

• CD, USB, iPod

, My Music mode

- : Repeat

- : Random

• In the Radio, Media, Setup, and Menu

pop up screen, the number menu is

selected.

RDM

RPT

SEEK

TRACK

PHONE

MEDIA

RADIO

Features of your vehicle

1284

• Each time the button is shortly pressed

(under 0.8 seconds), sets screen Off

➟

Screen On ➟ Screen Off

❈ Audio operation is maintained and

only the screen will be turned Off. In

the screen Off state, press any key to

turn the screen On again.

• Radio Mode

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8sec-

onds): TA On/Off

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8sec-

onds): Previews each broadcast for 5

seconds each.

• Media mode

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8sec-

onds): Previews each song (file) for

10 seconds each.

❈ Press and holding the key again to

continue listening to the current song

(file).

10.

• Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-

onds) : Moves to the Display, Sound,

Clock, Phone, System setting modes

• Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-

onds) : Move to the Time setting screen

11.

• Displays menus for the current mode.

❈ iPod

List : Move to parent category

12.

• MP3 CD, USB mode : Folder Search

13. TUNE knob

• Radio mode : Changes frequency by

turning the knob left/right

• CD, USB, iPod

, My Music mode:

Searches songs (files) by turning the

knob left/right

❈ When the desired song is displayed,

press the knob to play the song.

• Moves focus in all selection menus and

selects menus

FOLDER

SETUP

CLOCK

SCAN

4129

Features of your vehicle

■

CD Player (Except EUROPE)

Features of your vehicle

1304

SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND

FUNCTIONS

❈ Display and settings may differ

depending on the selected audio.

Audio Head Unit (Except EUROPE)

1. (EJECT)

• Ejects the disc.

• Changes to FM/AM mode.

• Each time the key is pressed,the mode

is changed in order of FM1

➟ FM2 ➟

AM.

• Changes to CD, USB(iPod

), AUX, My

Music, BT Audio mode.

• Each time the key is pressed, the mode

is changed in order of CD, USB(iPod

AUX, My Music, BT Audio.

4. (if equipped)

• Operates Phone Screen

❈ When a phone is not connected, the

connection screen is displayed.

• Radio Mode : Automatically searches

for broadcast frequencies.

• CD, USB, iPod

, My Music modes

- Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-

onds): Moves to next or previous song

(file)

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-

onds): Rewinds or fast-forwards the

current song.

6. PWR/VOL knob

• Power Knob: Turns power On/ Off by

pressing the knob

• Volume Knob: Sets volume by turn-

ing the knob left/right

7. ~ (Preset)

• Radio Mode: Saves frequencies (chan-

nels) or receives saved frequencies

(channels)

• CD, USB, iPod

, My Music mode

- : Repeat

- : Random

• In the Radio, Media, Setup, and Menu

pop up screen, the number menu is

selected.

RDM

RPT

SEEK

TRACK

PHONE

MEDIA

RADIO

4131

Features of your vehicle

• Each time the button is shortly pressed

(under 0.8 seconds), sets screen Off

➟

Screen On ➟ Screen Off

❈ Audio operation is maintained and

only the screen will be turned Off. In

the screen Off state, press any key to

turn the screen On again.

• Radio Mode

- Press the key (under 0.8 seconds):

Previews each broadcast for 5 sec-

onds each

• CD, USB, My Music mode

- Press the key (under 0.8 seconds):

Previews each song (file) for 10 sec-

onds each

❈ Press the key again to continue listen-

ing to the current song (file).

10.

• Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-

onds) : Moves to the Display, Sound,

Clock, Phone, System setting modes

• Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-

onds) : Move to the Time setting screen

11.

• Displays menus for the current mode.

❈ iPod

List : Move to parent category

12.

• MP3 CD, USB mode : Folder Search

13. TUNE knob

• Radio mode : Changes frequency by

turning the knob left/right

• CD, USB, iPod

, My Music mode:

Searches songs (files) by turning the

knob left/right

❈ When the desired song is displayed,

press the knob to play the song.

• Moves focus in all selection menus and

selects menus

FOLDER

SETUP

CLOCK

SCAN

DISP

Features of your vehicle

1324

SETUP (For EUROPE)

Display Settings

Press the key Select [Display]

through TUNE knob or key

Select menu through TUNE knob

Mode Pop up

[Mode Pop up] Changes . selec-

tion mode

• During On state, press the or

key to display the mode

change pop up screen.

• When the pop up screen is displayed,

use the TUNE knob or keys ~

to select the desired mode.

Scroll text

[Scroll text] Set /

• : Maintains scroll

• : Scrolls only one (1) time.

Song Info

When playing an MP3 file, select the

desired display info from ‘Folder/File’ or

‘Album/Artist/Song’.

Off

MEDIA

RADIO

RPT

SETUP

CLOCK

4133

Features of your vehicle

Sound Settings

Press the key Select [Sound]

through TUNE knob or key

Select menu through TUNE knob

Audio Settings (For Van)

This menu allows you to set the ‘Bass,

Middle, Treble’ and the Sound Balance.

Select [Audio Settings] Select menu

through TUNE knob Turn TUNE

knob left/right to set

• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the sound

tone.

• Balance : Moves the sound balance.

• Default : Restores default settings.

❈ Return : Whilst adjusting values, re-

pressing the TUNE knob will

restore the parent menu.

Audio Settings (For Wagon)

This menu allows you to set the ‘Bass,

Middle, Treble’ and the Sound Fader and

Balance.

Select [Audio Settings] Select menu

through TUNE knob Turn TUNE

knob left/right to set

• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the sound

tone.

• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound fader

and balance.

• Default : Restores default settings.

❈ Return : Whilst adjusting values, re-

pressing the TUNE knob will

restore the parent menu.

Speed Dependent Volume Control

This feature is used to automatically con-

trol the volume level according to the

speed of the vehicle.

Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set in

[On/Off] of

TUNE

knob

RDM

SETUP

CLOCK

Features of your vehicle

1344

Clock Settings

Press the key Select [Clock]

through TUNE knob or key

Select menu through TUNE knob

Clock Settings

This menu is used to set the time.

Select [Clock Settings] Set through

TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

❈ Adjust the number currently in focus to

set the [hour] and press the tune knob

to set the [minute].

Day Settings

This menu is used to set the date

(DD.MM.YYYY).

Select [Day Settings] Set through

TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

❈ Adjust the number currently in focus to

make the settings and press the tune

knob to move to the next setting. (Set

in order of Day/Month/Year)

Time Format

This function is used to set the 12/24

hour time format of the audio system.

Select [Time Format] Set 12Hr / 24Hr

through TUNE knob

Clock Display when Power is OFF

Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off) Set /

through TUNE knob

• : Displays time/date on screen

• : Turn off.

Automatic RDS Time

This option is used to automatically set

the time by synchronizing with RDS.

Select [Automatic RDS Time] Set

/ through TUNE knob

• : Turn on Automatic Time

• : Turn off.

Off

SETUP

CLOCK

4135

Features of your vehicle

System Settings

Press the key Select [System]

through tune knob or key Select

menu through TUNE knob

Memory Information

(If equipped)

Displays currently used memory and

total system memory.

Select [Memory Information] OK

The currently used memory is displayed

on the left side whilst the total system

memory is displayed on the right side.

Language

This menu is used to set the display and

voice recognition language.

Select [Language] Set through

TUNE knob

❈ The system will reboot after the lan-

guage is changed.

❈ Language support by region

SETUP

CLOCK

Features of your vehicle

1364

SETUP (Except EUROPE)

Display Settings

Press the key Select [Display]

through TUNE knob or key

Select menu through TUNE knob

Mode Pop up

[Mode Pop up] Changes . selec-

tion mode

• During On state, press the or

key to display the mode

change pop up screen.

• When the pop up screen is displayed,

use the TUNE knob or keys ~

to select the desired mode.

Text Scroll

[Text Scroll] Set /

• : Maintains scroll

• : Scrolls only one (1) time.

Media Display

When playing an MP3 file, select the

desired display info from ‘Folder/File’ or

‘Album/Artist/Song’.

Sound Settings

Press the key Select [Sound]

through TUNE knob or key

Select menu through TUNE knob.

RDM

SETUP

CLOCK

Off

MEDIA

RADIO

RPT

SETUP

CLOCK

4137

Features of your vehicle

Sound Settings (For Van)

This menu allows you to set the ‘Bass,

Middle, Treble’ and the Sound Balance.

Select [Sound Settings] Select menu

through TUNE knob Turn TUNE

knob left/right to set

• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the sound

tone.

• Balance : Moves the sound balance.

• Default : Restores default settings.

❈ Return : Whilst adjusting values, re-

pressing the TUNE knob will

restore the parent menu.

Sound Settings (For Wagon)

This menu allows you to set the ‘Bass,

Middle, Treble’ and the Sound Fader and

Balance.

Select [Sound Settings] Select menu

through TUNE knob Turn TUNE

knob left/right to set

• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the sound

tone.

• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound fader

and balance.

• Default : Restores default settings.

❈ Return : Whilst adjusting values, re-

pressing the TUNE knob will

restore the parent menu.

Speed Dependent Volume Control

This feature is used to automatically con-

trol the volume level according to the

speed of the vehicle.

Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set in

[On / Off] of TUNE knob

Features of your vehicle

1384

Clock Settings

Press the key Select [Clock]

through TUNE knob or key

Select menu through TUNE knob

Clock Settings

This menu is used to set the time.

Select [Clock Settings] Set through

TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

❈ Adjust the number currently in focus to

set the [hour] and press the tune knob

to set the [minute].

Calendar Settings

This menu is used to set the date

(YYYY.MM.DD).

Select [Calendar Settings] Set through

TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

❈ Adjust the number currently in focus to

make the settings and press the tune

knob to move to the next setting. (Set

in order of Year/Month/Day)

Time Format

This function is used to set the 12/24 hour

time format of the audio system.

Select [Time Format] Set 12Hr / 24Hr

through

TUNE

knob

Clock Display when Power is OFF

Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off)

Set /

through TUNE knob

• : Displays time/date on screen

• : Turn off.

Off

SETUP

CLOCK

4139

Features of your vehicle

System Settings

Press the key Select [System]

Memory Information

(if equipped)

Displays currently used memory and

total system memory.

Select [Memory Information] OK

The currently used memory is displayed

on the left side whilst the total system

memory is displayed on the right side.

SETUP

CLOCK

Features of your vehicle

1404

Phone Settings

Press the key Select [Phone]

(For EUROPE)

Press the key Select [Phone]

(Except EUROPE)

Pair Phone

Select [Pair Phone] Set through

TUNE knob

➀ Search for device names as displayed

on your mobile phone and connect.

➁ Input the passkey displayed on the

screen. (Passkey : 0000)

❈ The device name and passkey will be

displayed on the screen for up to 3

minutes. If pairing is not completed

within the 3 minutes, the mobile phone

pairing process will automatically be

canceled.

➂ Pairing completion is displayed.

❈ In some mobile phones, pairing will

automatically be followed by connec-

tion.

❈ It is possible to pair up to five

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology enabled mobile

phones.

SETUP

CLOCK

SETUP

CLOCK

CAUTION

To pair a Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology enabled mobile phone,

authentication and connection

processes are first required. As a

result, you cannot pair your mobile

phone whilst driving the vehicle.

First park your vehicle before use.

4141

Features of your vehicle

Phone List

The names of up to 5 paired phones will

be displayed.

A [ ] is displayed in front of the currently

connected phone.

Select the desired name to setup the

selected phone.

• Connecting a phone

Select [Phone List] Select mobile phone

through TUNE knob Select [Connect

Phone]

➀ Select a mobile phone that is not cur-

rently connected.

➁ Connect the selected mobile phone.

➂ Connection completion is displayed.

❈ If a phone is already connected, dis-

connect the currently connected

phone and select a new phone to con-

nect.

• Disconnecting a connected phone

Select [Phone List] Select mobile phone

through TUNE knob Select [Disconnect

Phone]

➀ Select the currently connected mobile

phone.

➁ Disconnect the selected mobile

phone.

➂ Disconnection completion is dis-

played.

Features of your vehicle

1424

• Changing connection sequence (Priority)

This is used to change the order (priori-

ty) of automatic connection for the paired

mobile phones.

Select [Phone List] Select [Priority]

through TUNE knob Select No. 1

Priority mobile phone

➀ Select [Priority].

➁ From the paired phones, select the

phone desired for No.1 priority.

➂ The changed priority sequence is dis-

played.

❈ Once the connection sequence (prior-

ity) is changed, the new no. 1 priority

mobile phone will be connected.

- When the no. 1 priority cannot be con-

nected: Automatically attempts to con-

nect the most recently connected

phone.

- Cases when the most recently con-

nected phone cannot be connected:

Attempts to connect in the order in

which paired phones are listed.

- The connected phone will automati-

cally be changed to No. 1 priority.

• Delete

Select [Phone List] Select mobile phone

through TUNE knob Select [Delete]

➀ Select the desired mobile phone.

➁ Delete the selected mobile phone.

➂ Deletion completion is displayed.

❈ When attempting to delete a currently

connected phone, the phone is first

disconnected.

CAUTION

• When you delete a mobile phone,

the mobile phone contacts will

also be erased.

• For stable Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology communication, delete

the mobile phone from the audio

and also delete the audio from your

mobile phone.

4143

Features of your vehicle

Phone book Download

(For EUROPE)

This feature is used to download phone

book and call histories into the audio sys-

tem.

Select [Phone book Download] Select

through TUNE knob.

Contacts Download

(Except EUROPE)

This feature is used to download con-

tacts and call histories into the audio sys-

tem.

Select [Contacts Download] Select

through TUNE knob

Auto Download

When connecting a mobile phone, it is

possible to automatically download new

Contacts and Call Histories.

Select [Auto Download] Set /

through TUNE knob

Audio Streaming

Songs (files) saved in your

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology enabled mobile

phone can be played through the audio

system.

Select [Audio Streaming] Set /

through TUNE knob

Outgoing Volume

This is used to set the volume of your

voice as heard by the other party whilst

on a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

enabled handsfree call.

Select [Outgoing Volume] Set volume

through TUNE knob

❈ Whilst on a call, the volume can be

changed by using the key.

SEEK

TRACK

Off

CAUTION

• The download feature may not be

supported in some mobile phones.

• If a different operation is per-

formed whilst Contacts are being

downloaded, downloading will be

discontinued. Contacts already

downloaded will be saved.

• When downloading new Contacts,

delete all previously saved

Contacts before staring download.

CAUTION

• The download feature may not be

supported in some mobile phones.

• If a different operation is per-

formed whilst phone book is

being downloaded, downloading

will be discontinued. Phone book

already downloaded will be saved.

• When downloading new phone

book, delete all previously saved

phone book before starting down-

load.

CAUTION

The Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

audio streaming feature may not be

supported in some mobile phones.

Features of your vehicle

1444

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology System Off

This feature is used when you do not

wish to use the

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology system.

Select [Bluetooth System Off] Set

through TUNE knob

❈ If a phone is already connected, dis-

connect the currently connected

phone and turn the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology system off.

Using the

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology System

To use

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

when the system is currently off, follow

these next steps.

• Turning On

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology through the Key

Press the key Screen Guidance

❈ Moves to the screen where

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology func-

tions can be used and displays guid-

ance.

• Turning On

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology through the Key

Press the key Select [Phone]

➀ A screen asking whether to turn on

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology will be

displayed.

➁ On the screen, select to turn on

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology and

display guidance.

❈ If the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology sys-

tem is turned on, the system will auto-

matically try to connect the most

recently connected

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology mobile phone.

YES

SETUP

CLOCK

SETUP

CLOCK

PHONE

CAUTION

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

connection may become intermit-

tently disconnected in some mobile

phones. Follow these next steps to

try again.

1) Turn the Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology function within the

mobile phone ON/OFF and try to

connect again.

2) Turn the mobile phone power

ON/OFF and try to connect

again.

3) Completely remove the mobile

phone battery, reboot, and then

try to connect again.

4) Reboot the audio system and try

to connect again

5) Delete all paired devices in your

mobile phone and the audio sys-

tem and pair again for use.

4145

Features of your vehicle

RADIO (For EUROPE)

Changing RADIO mode

SEEK

Press the key

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 sec-

onds) : Changes the frequency.

• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8

seconds) : Automatically searches for

the next frequency.

Preset SEEK

Press the ~ key

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 sec-

onds) : Plays the frequency saved in the

corresponding key.

• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8

seconds) : Pressing and holding the

desired key from ~ will

save the currently playing broadcast to

the selected key and sound a BEEP.

SCAN

Press the key

• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8

seconds) : The broadcast frequency

increases and previews each broadcast

for 5 seconds each. After scanning all

frequencies, returns and plays the cur-

rent broadcast frequency.

SCAN

SEEK

TRACK

Features of your vehicle

1464

Selecting through manual

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to adjust

the frequency.

Traffic Announcement (TA)

Shortly pressing the key (under

0.8 seconds) : Set / TA Traffic

Announcement) mode.

Within key are the A.Store (Auto

Store) and Info functions.

AST (Auto Store)

Press the key Set [ AST]

through TUNE knob or key.

Select AST (Auto Store) to save frequen-

cies with superior reception to presets

~ . If no frequencies are

received, then the most recently received

frequency will be broadcast.

❈ Saves only to the Preset memory

~ of FMA or AMA mode.

AF (Alternative Frequency)

Press the key Set [ AF]

through TUNE knob or key.

The Alternative Frequency option can be

turned On/Off.

Region

Press the key Set [ Region]

through TUNE knob or key.

The Region option can be turned On/Off.

News

Press the key Set [ News]

through TUNE knob or key.

The News option can be turned On/Off.

Info Volume

Info Volume refers to the sound volume

upon receiving News or Traffic information.

The info volume can be controlled by turn-

ing the VOL knob left/right whilst a news

or traffic broadcast is playing.

❈ AF, Region, and News are RDS Radio

menus.

RDM

RPT

OffOn

SCAN

4147

Features of your vehicle

DAB RADIO (For DAB Model)

❈ RADIO may differ depending on the

selected audio.

Changing RADIO mode

Press the Key to change the

mode in order of FM1

➟ FM2 ➟ FMA ➟

DAB1 ➟ DAB2 ➟ AM.

SEEK

Press the key

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 sec-

onds) : Changes the station.

• Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-

onds) : Change the Ensemble.

Ensemble

Press the key

• Search the Ensemble. Use the Tune

knob to select the desired Ensemble

and select stations within the Ensemble.

Preset SEEK

Press the ~ key

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 sec-

onds) : Plays the station saved in the

corresponding key.

• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8

seconds) : Pressing and holding the

desired key from ~ will save

the currently playing station to the select-

ed key and sound a BEEP.

FOLDER

SEEK

TRACK

RADIO

Features of your vehicle

1484

SCAN

Press the key

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 sec-

onds) : TA On/Off

• Pressing and holding the key(over 0.8

seconds) : The broadcast station

increases and previews each broad-

casts for 5 seconds each. After scan-

ning all stations, returns and plays the

current broadcast station.

Selecting through manual search

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to select

the station.

Within key are the Service.F

(Service Following) And L-Band func-

tions.

Service Following

Press the key Set [

Service.F] through TUNE knob or

key.

When the DAB signal is weak, the

Service Following feature will automati-

cally convert to the identical FM broad-

cast when such a broadcast is available.

L-Band

Press the key Set [ L-Band]

through TUNE knob or key.

DAB Broadcasts include BAND III and L-

BAND according to the Range. BAND III

is always set as the default whilst the L-

BAND feature can be turned on to search

for L-BAND broadcasts when in regions

where L-BAND broadcasts are available.

RDM

RPT

SCAN

4149

Features of your vehicle

RADIO (Except EUROPE)

Changing RADIO mode

SEEK

Press the key

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 sec-

onds) : Changes the frequency.

• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8

seconds) : Automatically searches for

the next frequency.

Preset SEEK

Press the ~ key

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 sec-

onds) : Plays the frequency saved in the

corresponding key.

• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8

seconds) : Pressing and holding the

desired key from ~ will

save the currently playing broadcast to

the selected key and sound a BEEP.

SCAN

Press the key

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 sec-

onds) : The broadcast frequency

increases and previews each broadcast

for 5 seconds each. After scanning all

frequencies, returns and plays the cur-

rent broadcast frequency.

• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8

seconds) : Previews the broadcasts

saved in Preset ~ for 5 sec-

onds each.

SCAN

SEEK

TRACK

Features of your vehicle

1504

Selecting through manual search

Turn the TUNE knob left/right to adjust

the frequency.

Within key are the A.Store (Auto

Store) and Info functions.

A.Store (Auto Store)

Press the key Set [ A.Store]

through TUNE knob or key.

Select A.Store (Auto Store) to save fre-

quencies with superior reception to pre-

sets ~ . If no frequencies are

received, then the most recently received

frequency will be broadcast.

RPT

4151

Features of your vehicle

BASIC METHOD OF USE :

Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB /

iPod

/ My Music

Press the key to change the

mode in order of CD

➟ USB(iPod

) ➟

AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.

The folder/file name is displayed on the

screen.

<USB>

❈ The CD is automatically played when

a CD is inserted.

❈ The USB music is automatically

played when a USB is connected.

Repeat

Whilst song (file) is playing

(RPT) key

Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod

, My

Music mode: RPT on screen

• To repeat one song (Shortly pressing

the key (under 0.8 seconds)) : Repeats

the current song.

MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on

screen

• To repeat folder (pressing twice) :

repeats all files within the current folder.

❈ Press the key again to turn off

repeat.

RPT

MEDIA

Features of your vehicle

1524

Random

Whilst song (file) is playing

(RDM) key

Audio CD, My Music mode: RDM on

screen

• Random (Shortly pressing the key ) :

Plays all songs in random order.

MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on

screen

• Folder Random (Shortly pressing the

key) : Plays all files within the current

folder in random order.

MP3 CD, USB mode: RDM on screen

• Random (pressing twice) : Plays all files

in random order.

iPod

mode: RDM on screen

• Random (press the key) : Plays all files

in random order.

❈ Press the key again to turn off

random.

Changing Song/File

Whilst song (file) is playing

key

• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the cur-

rent song from the beginning.

❈ If the key is pressed again

within 1 second, the previous song is

played.

• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8

seconds) : Rewinds the song.

Whilst song (file) is playing

key

• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the next

song.

• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8

seconds) : Fast forwards the song.

Scan (For EUROPE)

Whilst song (file) is playing key

• Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8

seconds) : Scans all songs for 10 sec-

onds starting from the next song.

❈ Pressing and holding the key

again to turn off.

Scan (Except EUROPE)

Whilst song (file) is playing key

• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 sec-

onds) : Scans all songs from the next

song for 10 seconds each.

❈ Press the key again to turn

off.

❈ The SCAN function is not supported in

iPod

mode.

SCAN

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

RDM

4153

Features of your vehicle

Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB

Mode

Whilst file is playing

(Folder Up) key

• Searches the next folder.

Whilst file is playing

(Folder Down) key

• Searches the parent folder.

❈ If a folder is selected by pressing the

TUNE knob, the first file within the

selected folder will be played.

Searching Songs (File)

• Turning TUNE knob : Searches for

songs (files)

• Pressing TUNE knob : Plays select-

ed song (file).

MENU : Audio CD

Press the Audio CD mode key to

set the Repeat, Random, Information

features.

Repeat

Press the key Set [ RPT]

through the TUNE knob or key

to repeat the current song.

❈ Press RPT again to turn off.

Random

Press the key Set [ RDM]

through the TUNE knob or key

to randomly play songs within the current

folder.

❈ Press RDM again to turn off.

Information

Press the key Set [ Info]

through the TUNE knob or key

to display information of the current song.

❈ Press the key to turn off info

display.

RDM

RPT

FOLDER

Features of your vehicle

1544

MENU : MP3 CD / USB

Press the MP3 CD mode key to

set the Repeat, Folder Random, Folder

Repeat, All Random, Information, and

Copy features.

Repeat

Press the key Set [ RPT]

through the TUNE knob or

key to repeat the current song.

❈ Press RPT again to turn off.

Folder Random

Press the key Set [ F.RDM]

through the TUNE knob or key

to randomly play songs within the current

folder.

❈ Press F.RDM again to turn off.

Folder Repeat

Press the key Set [ F.RPT]

through the TUNE knob or key

to repeat songs within the current folder.

❈ Press F.RPT again to turn off.

All Random

Press the key Set [ A.RDM]

through the TUNE knob or key

to randomly play all songs within the CD.

❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.

Information

Press the key Set [ Info]

through the TUNE knob or key

to display information of the current song.

❈ Press the key to turn off info

display.

Copy

Press the key Set [ Copy]

through the TUNE knob or key.

This is used to copy the current song into

My Music. You can play the copied Music

in My Music mode.

❈ If another key is pressed whilst copy-

ing is in progress, a pop up asking you

whether to cancel copying is dis-

played.

❈ If another media is connected or

inserted (USB, CD, iPod

, AUX) whilst

copying is in progress, copying is can-

celed.

❈ Music will not be played whilst copying

is in progress.

RDM

RPT

4155

Features of your vehicle

MENU : iPod

In iPod

mode, press the key to set

the Repeat, Random, Information and

Search features.

Repeat

Press the key Set [ RPT]

through the TUNE knob or

key to repeat the current song.

❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Random

Press the key Set [ RDM]

through the TUNE knob or

key.

Plays all songs within the currently play-

ing category in random order.

❈ Press RDM again to turn off.

Information

Press the key Set [ Info]

through the TUNE knob or key.

Displays information of the current song.

❈ Press the key to turn off info

display.

Press the key Set [ Search]

through the TUNE knob or key.

Displays iPod

category list.

❈ Searching iPod

category is

key pressed, move to parent category.

RDM

RPT

Features of your vehicle

1564

MENU : My Music Mode

(If equipped)

In My Music mode, press the key

to set the Repeat, Random, Information,

Delete, Delete All, and Delete Selection

features.

Repeat

Press the key Set [ RPT]

through the TUNE knob or

key.

Repeats the currently playing song.

❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.

Random

Press the key Set [ RDM]

through the TUNE knob or

key.

Plays all songs in random order.

❈ Press RDM again to turn random off.

Information

Press the key Set [ Info]

through the TUNE knob or key.

Displays information of the current song.

❈ Press the key to turn off info

display.

Delete

Press the key Set [ Delete]

through the TUNE knob or key.

Deletes currently playing file.

In the play screen, pressing delete will

delete the currently playing song.

Deletes file from list.

➀ Select the file you wish to delete by

using the TUNE knob.

➁ Press the key and select the

delete menu to delete the selected

file.

RDM

RPT

4157

Features of your vehicle

Delete All

Press the key Set [ Del.All]

through the TUNE knob or key.

Deletes all songs of My Music.

Delete Selection

Press the key Set [ Del.Sel]

through the TUNE knob or key.

Songs within My Music are selected and

deleted.

➀ Select the songs you wish to delete

from the list.

➁ After selecting, press the key

and select the delete menu.

✽

NOTICE - Using the My

Music

• Even if memory is available, a maxi-

mum of 6,000 songs can be stored.

• The same song can be copied up to

1,000 times.

• Memory info can be checked in the

System menu of Setup.

AUX

AUX is used to play external MEDIA cur-

rently connected with the AUX terminal.

AUX mode will automatically start when

an external device is connected with the

AUX terminal.

If an external device is connected, you

can also press the key to change

to AUX mode.

❈ AUX mode cannot be started unless

there is an external device connected

to the AUX terminal.

✽

NOTICE -

USING THE AUX

Fully insert the AUX cable into the AUX

terminal for use.

MEDIA

Features of your vehicle

1584

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology AUDIO

(If equipped)

What is

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology?

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology allows

devices to be connected in a short dis-

tance, including hands-free devices,

stereo headsets, wireless remote con-

trollers, etc. For more information, visit

the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology web-

site at www

.Bluetooth.com

Before using

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology audio features

•

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology audio

may not be supported depending on the

compatibility of your

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology mobile phone.

• In order to use

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology audio, you must first pair

and connect the

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology mobile phone.

• The Bluetooth

word mark and logos are

registered trademarks owned by

Bluetooth

SIG, Inc. and any use of such

marks is under license. Other trade-

marks and trade names are those of

their respective owners. A Bluetooth

enabled cell phone is required to use

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

•

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology audio

can be used only when the [Audio

Streaming] of Phone is turned On.

❈ Setting

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology Audio Streaming : Press

the key Select [Phone]

through the tune knob Select [Audio

Streaming] through the TUNE

knob Set /

Starting

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology Audio

• Press the key to change the

mode in order of CD

➟ USB ➟ AUX ➟

My Music ➟ BT Audio.

• If BT Audio is selected,

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology audio will start

playing.

❈ Audio may not automatically start

playing in some mobile phones.

MEDIA

OffOn

SETUP

CLOCK

4159

Features of your vehicle

Using the

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology audio features

• Play / Pause

Press the TUNE knob to play and

pause the current song.

❈ The title / artist info may not be sup-

ported in some mobile phone.

When it is not supported, no title / no

artist will be displayed.

• Previous / Next song

Press

to play

previous or next song.

❈ The previous song / next song / play /

pause functions may not be supported

in some mobile phones.

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

Features of your vehicle

1604

PHONE (If equipped)

Before using the

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology phone features

• In order to use

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology phone, you must first pair

and connect the

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology mobile phone.

• If the mobile phone is not paired or con-

nected, it is not possible to enter Phone

mode. Once a phone is paired or con-

nected, the guidance screen will be dis-

played.

• If Priority is set upon vehicle ignition

(IGN/ACC ON), the

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology phone will be automatically

connected. Even if you are outside, the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology phone

will be automatically connected once

you are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If

you do not want automatic

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology phone connec-

tion, set the

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology power to OFF.

Making a call using the Steering

wheel remote controller

❈ The actual feature in the vehicle may

differ from the illustration.

1. VOLUME button : Raises or lowers

speaker volume.

2. MUTE button : Mutes the microphone

during a call.

3. button : Places and transfers calls.

4. button : Ends calls or cancels fun-

tions.

• Check call history and making call

➀ Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds) the

key on the steering remote con-

troller.

➁ The call history list will be displayed

on the screen.

➂ Press the key again to connect a

call to the selected number.

• Redialing the most recently called num-

ber

➀ Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds) the

key on the steering remote con-

troller.

➁ The most recently called number is

redialed.

4161

Features of your vehicle

Phone MENU (For EUROPE)

Press the key to display three

menus (Call History, Phone Book, Phone

Setup).

Call History

Press the key Set [ History]

through the TUNE knob or

key.

The call history is displayed and can be

used to select a number and make a call.

If call history does not exist, a screen ask-

ing whether to download call history is

displayed. (The download feature may not

be supported in some mobile phones)

Phone Book

Press the key Set [ P. Book]

through the TUNE knob or

key.

The phone book is displayed and can be

used to select a number and make a call.

❈ If more than one number is saved to

one contact, then a screen showing

the mobile phone number, Home and

office number is displayed. Select the

desired number to make the call.

❈ If phone book do not exist, a screen ask-

ing whether to download phone book is

displayed. (The download feature may

not be supported in some mobile

phones)

Phone Setup

Press the key Set [ Setup]

through the TUNE knob or key.

The

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

mobile phone setup screen is displayed.

For more information, refer to “Phone

Setup”.

PHONE

RDM

PHONE

RPT

PHONE

Features of your vehicle

1624

Phone MENU (Except EUROPE)

Press the key to display three

menus (Call History, Contacts, Phone

Setup).

Call History

Press the key Set [ History]

through the TUNE knob or

key.

The call history is displayed and can be

used to select a number and make a call.

If call history does not exist, a screen ask-

ing whether to download call history is

displayed. (The download feature may not

be supported in some mobile phones)

Contacts

Press the key Set [ Contacts]

through the TUNE knob or

key.

The Contacts are displayed and can be

used to select a number and make a call.

❈ If more than one number is saved to

one contact, then a screen showing

the mobile phone number, Home and

office number is displayed. Select the

desired number to make the call.

❈ If Contacts do not exist, a screen ask-

ing whether to download Contacts is

displayed. (The download feature may

not be supported in some mobile

phones)

Phone Setup

Press the key Set [ Setup]

through the TUNE knob or key.

The

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

mobile phone setup screen is displayed.

For more information, refer to “Phone

Setup”.

PHONE

RDM

PHONE

RPT

PHONE

4163

Features of your vehicle

■

AUDIO

Features of your vehicle

1644

SYSTEM CONTROLLERS AND

FUNCTIONS

Audio Head Unit

1. (EJECT)

Eject the CD

2. Button

Turns to FM mode and toggles FM1 and

FM2 when the button is pressed each

time

3. Button

Pressing the button selects the

AM band. AM Mode is displayed on the

LCD.

4. Button

• Changes to USB(iPod

), AUX mode.

• Each time the key is pressed, the mode

is changed in order of USB(iPod

AUX.

5. Button

• When the button is pressed,

it increases the band frequency to auto-

matically select channel. Stops at the

previous frequency if no channel is

found.

• When the button is pressed, it

decreases the band frequency to auto-

matically select channel. Stops at the

previous frequency if no channel is

found.

6. Button & Knob

• Turns the audio system on/off when the

ignition switch is on ACC or ON.

• If the knob is turned clockwise/counter-

clockwise, the volume will increase

/decrease.

VOLUMEPOWER

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

MEDIA

4165

Features of your vehicle

7. PRESET Buttons

• Press ~ buttons less

than 0.8 seconds to play the station

saved in each button.

• Press ~ buttons more

than 0.8 seconds or longer to save the

current station to the respective button

with a beep.

8. Button

• Radio Mode

- Press the key (under 0.8 seconds) :

Previews each broadcast for 5 seconds

each.

- Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-

onds) : Previews the broadcasts saved

in Preset ~ for 5 sec-

onds each.

❈ Press the key again to contin-

ue listening to the currently selected

channel.

• USB, iPod mode

- Press the key (under 0.8 seconds) :

Previews each song (file) for 10 sec-

onds each

❈ Press the key again to contin-

ue listening to the current song (file).

9. Button (For Van)

Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-

onds) : Moves to the Scroll, Media, Audio

setting modes.

• Scroll : Scroll (On/Off)

• Media : MP3 playing information

(Folder /File, Artist/Title)

• Audio : Audio setup control (Bass/

Treble/Balance)

- BASS Control : To increase the BASS,

rotate the knob clockwise, whilst to

decrease the BASS, rotate the knob

counterclockwise.

- TREBLE Control : To increase the

TREBLE, rotate the knob clockwise,

whilst to decrease the TREBLE, rotate

the knob counterclockwise.

- BALANCE Control : Rotate the knob

clockwise to emphasize right speaker

sound(left speaker sound will be atten-

uated). When the control knob is

turned counter clockwise, left speaker

sound will be emphasized(right speak-

er sound will be attenuated).

Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-

onds) : Move to the Time setting screen.

SETUP

CLOCK

SCAN

Features of your vehicle

1664

9. Button (For Wagon)

Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-

onds) : Moves to the Scroll, Media, Audio

setting modes.

• Scroll : Scroll (On/Off)

• Media : MP3 playing information (Folder/

File, Artist/Title)

• Audio : Audio setup control (Bass/Treble/

Fader/Balance)

- BASS Control : To increase the BASS,

rotate the knob clockwise, whilst to

decrease the BASS, rotate the knob

counterclockwise.

- TREBLE Control : To increase the TRE-

BLE, rotate the knob clockwise, whilst

to decrease the TREBLE, rotate the

knob counterclockwise.

- FADER Control : Turn the knob clock-

wise to emphasize rear speaker

sound(front speaker sound will be

attenuated). When the control knob is

turned counterclockwise, front speaker

sound will be emphasized(rear speaker

sound will be attenuated).

- BALANCE Control : Rotate the knob

clockwise to emphasize right speaker

sound(left speaker sound will be atten-

uated). When the control knob is turned

counter clockwise, left speaker sound

will be emphasized(right speaker sound

will be attenuated).

Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-

onds) : Move to the Time setting screen.

10. Button

Displays menus for A.Store (Auto Store)

mode.

• A.Store (Auto Store) : Turn on auto seek

and store the Frequencies.

11. Button

• Search and move between folders

12. Knob

Turn this control whilst listening to a radio

channel to manually adjust frequency.

Turn clockwise to increase frequency

and counterclockwise to decrease fre-

quency.

TUNE

FOLDER

SETUP

CLOCK

4167

Features of your vehicle

BASIC METHOD OF USE : CD

1. Button

If the CD is loaded, turns to CD mode. If

no CD, it displays “No Media” for 3 sec-

onds and returns to the previous mode.

2. Button

• Press key for less than 0.8

seconds to play from the beginning of

current song.

• Press key for less than 0.8

seconds and press again within 1 sec-

ond to play the previous song.

• Press key for 0.8 seconds or

longer to initiate reverse direction high

speed sound search of current song.

• Press key for less than 0.8

seconds to play the next song.

• Press key for 0.8 seconds or

longer to initiate forward direction high

speed sound search of current song.

3. Button (REPEAT)

Press this key for less than 0.8 seconds

to activate 'RPT' mode and more than

0.8 seconds to activate 'FLD RPT' mode.

• RPT : Only a track (file) is repeatedly

played back.

• FLD RPT (MP3/WMA Only) : Only files

in a folder are repeatedly played back.

4. Button (RANDOM)

Press this key for less than 0.8 seconds

to activate ‘RDM’ mode and more than

0.8 seconds to activate ‘ALL RDM’ mode.

• FLD.RDM : Only files/tracks in a fold-

er/disc are played back in a random

sequence.

• A.RDM (MP3/WMA Only) : All files in a

disc are played back in the random

sequence.

RDM

RPT

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

MEDIA

Features of your vehicle

1684

5. Button

Play each song in the CD for 10 seconds.

To cancel SCAN Play, press this key

again.

6. Button

Displays menus for the current mode.

• RPT : Repeats the current song.

• F.RDM : Plays all song within current

Folder in random order.

• F.RPT : Repeats all song within current

Folder.

• A.RDM : Plays all song within all Folders

in random order.

• Info : Displays information of the current

song.

7. Button

• Press key to move to child

folder of the current folder and display

the first song in the folder.

• Press key to move to parent

folder of the current folder and display

the first song in the folder.

8. Button

Press the key to play the select

song.

ENTER

FOLDER

SCAN

4169

Features of your vehicle

BASIC METHOD OF USE : USB

1. Button

• Press the button for less

than 0.8 seconds to play from the

beginning of the current song.

Press the button for less than 0.8 sec

onds and press it again within 2 second

to move to and play the previous song.

Press the button for 0.8 seconds or

longer to play the song in reverse direc-

tion in fast speed.

• Press the button for less

than 0.8 seconds to move to the next

song. Press the button for 0.8 seconds

or longer to play the song in forward

direction in fast speed.

2. Button (REPEAT)

Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-

onds to activate ‘RPT’ mode and more

than 0.8 seconds to activate ‘FLD.RPT’

mode.

• RPT : Only a file is repeatedly played

back.

• ‘FLD.RPT’ : All files in a folder are

repeatedly played back.

3. Button (RANDOM)

Press this button for less than 0.8 sec-

onds to activate ‘FLD.RDM’ mode and

more than 0.8 seconds to activate

‘A.RDM’ mode.

• FLD.RDM : Only files in a folder are

played back in a random sequence.

• A.RDM : All files in a USB memory are

played back in the random sequence.

4. Button

• Press button to move to

child folder of the current folder and dis-

play the folder.

Press / knob to move to

the folder displayed. It will play the first

song in the folder.

• Press button to move to

parent folder display the folder. Press

/ knob to move to the

folder displayed.

ENTERTUNE

FOLDER

ENTERTUNE

FOLDER

RDM

RPT

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

Features of your vehicle

1704

5. Button

Plays each song in the USB device for 10

seconds.

To cancel SCAN Play, press this button

again.

6. Knob & Button

• Turn this knob clockwise to browse

songs after current song, or counter

clockwise to browse songs before cur-

rent song. To play the displayed song,

press the knob.

7. Button

Displays menus for the current mode.

• RPT : Repeats the current song.

• F.RDM : Plays all song within current

Folder in random order.

• F.RPT : Repeats all song within current

Folder.

• A.RDM : Plays all song within all Folders

in random order.

• Info : Displays information of the current

song.

ENTERTUNE

SCAN

4171

Features of your vehicle

BASIC METHOD OF USE : iPod

❋ iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc.

1. Button

• Press the button for less

than 0.8 seconds to play from the

beginning of the song currently played.

Press the button for less than 0.8 sec-

onds and press it again within 3 second

to move to and play the previous track.

Press the button for 0.8 seconds or

longer to play the song in reverse direc-

tion in fast speed.

• Press the button for less

than 0.8 seconds to move to the next

track.

Press the button for 0.8 seconds or

longer to play the song in forward direc-

tion in fast speed.

2. Button (RAPEAT)

Repeats the song currently played.

3. Button (RANDOM)

• Press this button to shuffle order of all

songs in current category.

• To cancel RANDOM Play, press this

button again.

4. Button

(MENU)

• RPT : Repeats the current song.

• RDM : Plays all songs within the cur-

rently playing category in random order.

• INFO : Displays information of the cur-

rent song.

• Search : Moves to the upper category

from currently played category of the

iPod. To move to (play) the category

(song) displayed, press knob.

You will be able to search through the

lower category of the selected category.

The order of iPod’s category is Playlist,

Artist, Albums, Genres, Songs,

Composers.

TUNE

RDM

RPT

SEEK

TRACK

SEEK

TRACK

Knob & Button

When you rotate the knob clockwise, it

will display the songs (category) ahead

of the song currently played (category in

the same level).

Also, when you rotate the knob counter-

clockwise, it will display the songs (cate-

gory) before the song currently played

(category in the same level).

To listen to the song displayed in the

song category, press the button to play

the selected song.

AUX

This feature is used to play external

MEDIA currently connected with the AUX

terminal.

AUX mode will automatically start when

an external device becomes connected.

If an external device is already connect-

ed, you can also press the key to

change to AUX mode.

❈ AUX mode cannot be started unless

there is an external device connected

to the AUX terminal.

AUX

ENTERTUNE

4 172

Features of your vehicle

Before driving / 5-3

Key positions / 5-5

Starting the engine / 5-7

Manual transmission / 5-10

Automatic transmission / 5-13

Brake system / 5-20

Cruise control system / 5-31

Locking differential / 5-37

Economical operation / 5-38

Special driving conditions / 5-40

Winter motoring / 5-45

Trailer towing / 5-49

Vehicle weight / 5-58

Driving your vehicle

WARNING

- ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!

Engine exhaust gases are potentially lethal. If at any time engine exhaust gas is detected within the passenger compartment,

move the vehicle to an open area and open all windows.

• Never inhale exhaust gas.

Exhaust gases contain Carbon Monoxide which is colourless and odourless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause

unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

• Exhaust System Maintenance.

Ensure that the exhaust system is maintained in good condition and is free from excessive corrosion and damage which may

result in leakage. If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath

side of the car, we recommend that the system be checked by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

• Confined Areas.

Do not run the engine in confined spaces, allowing the engine to idle in a garage, even when the doors are open is danger-

ous practice. Only start the engine immediately prior to moving the vehicle out of the garage.

• Prolonged Idling.

If it is necessary to allow the vehicle to idle for prolonged periods, ensure that the heating system air intake control is set to

the "Fresh" position, the blower is set to high speed operation and that the vehicle is standing in an open area.

To ensure correct operation of the heater system, the air intake grilles at the base of the windscreen must not be obstructed by

snow leaves etc..

Driving your vehicle

Before entering vehicle

• Ensure that all windows, mirrors and

lamps are clean.

• Check condition of all tyres.

• Ensure that no fluid leaks are evident.

• Ensure that the area around the vehi-

cle is clear before driving off.

Necessary inspections

Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine

coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid

should be checked on a regular basis,

with the exact interval depending on the

fluid. Further details are provided in

Section 7, “Maintenance”.

Before starting

• Close and lock all doors.

• Position the seat so that all controls are

easily reached.

• Adjust the inside and outside rearview

mirrors.

• Be sure that all lights work.

• Check all gauges.

• Check the operation of warning lights

when the ignition switch is turned to

the ON position.

• Release the parking brake and make

sure the brake warning light goes out.

For safe operation, be sure you are famil-

iar with your vehicle and its equipment.

BEFORE DRIVING

WARNING

Driving whilst distracted can result

in a loss of vehicle control, that

may lead to an accident, severe

personal injury, and death. The dri-

ver’s primary responsibility is in

the safe and legal operation of a

vehicle, and use of any handheld

devices, other equipment, or vehi-

cle systems which take the driver’s

eyes, attention and focus away

from the safe operation of a vehicle

or which are not permissible by law

should never be used during oper-

ation of the vehicle.

WARNING

All passengers must be properly

belted whenever the vehicle is mov-

ing. Refer to “Seat belts” in section

3 for more information on their

proper use.

WARNING

Always check the surrounding

areas near your vehicle for people,

especially children, before putting a

car into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

Driving your vehicle

WARNING

- Driving under

the influence of alcohol or

drugs

Drinking and driving is dangerous.

Drunk driving is the number one

contributor to the highway death

toll each year. Even a small amount

of alcohol will affect your reflexes,

perceptions and judgement.

Driving whilst under the influence

of drugs is as dangerous or more

dangerous than driving drunk.

You are much more likely to have a

serious accident if you drink or

take drugs and drive.

If you are drinking or taking drugs,

don’t drive. Do not ride with a driv-

er who has been drinking or taking

drugs. Choose a designated driver

or call a cab.

WARNING

When you intend to park or stop the

vehicle with the engine on, be care-

ful not to depress the accelerator

pedal for a long period of time. It

may overheat the engine or exhaust

system and cause fire.

Driving your vehicle

Illuminated ignition switch

(if equipped)

Whenever a front door is opened, the

ignition switch will be illuminated for your

convenience, provided the ignition switch

is not in the ON position. The light will go

off immediately when the ignition switch

is turned on or go off after about 30 sec-

onds when the door is closed.

Ignition switch position

LOCK

The steering wheel locks to protect

against theft. The ignition key can be

removed only in the LOCK position.

When turning the ignition switch to the

LOCK position, push the key inward at

the ACC position and turn the key toward

the LOCK position.

ACC (Accessory)

The steering wheel is unlocked and elec-

trical accessories are operative.

✽

NOTICE

If difficulty is experienced in turning the

ignition switch to the ACC position, turn

the key whilst turning steering wheel

right and left to release the tension.

The warning lights can be checked

before the engine is started. This is the

normal running position after the engine

is started.

Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the

engine is not running to prevent battery

discharge.

START

Turn the ignition switch to the START

position to start the engine. The engine

will crank until you release the key; then

it returns to the ON position. The brake

warning lamp can be checked in this

position.

KEY POSITIONS

OTQ057001 OTQ057002

Driving your vehicle

WARNING

- Ignition switch

• Never turn the ignition switch to

LOCK or ACC whilst the vehicle

is moving. This would result in

loss of directional control and

braking function, which could

cause an accident.

• The anti-theft steering column

lock is not a substitute for the

parking brake. Before leaving the

driver’s seat, always make sure

the shift lever is engaged in P

(Park) for the automatic transmis-

sion and set the parking brake

fully and shut the engine off.

Unexpected and sudden vehicle

movement may occur if these

precautions are not taken.

• Never reach for the ignition

switch, or any other controls

through the steering wheel whilst

the vehicle is in motion.The pres-

ence of your hand or arm in this

area could cause a loss of vehicle

control, an accident and serious

bodily injury or death.

(Continued)

• Do not place any movable objects

around the driver’s seat as they

may move whilst driving, inter-

fere with the driver and lead to an

accident.

Driving your vehicle

STARTING THE ENGINE

Starting the petrol engine

1. Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

2. Manual Transmission - Depress the

clutch pedal fully and shift the trans-

mission into Neutral. Keep the clutch

pedal and brake pedal depressed

whilst turning the ignition switch to the

start position.

Automatic Transmission - Place the

transmission shift lever in P (Park).

Depress the brake pedal fully.

You can also start the engine when

the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)

position.

3. Turn the ignition switch to START and

hold it there until the engine starts (a

maximum of 10 seconds), then

release the key.

It should be started without depressing

the accelerator.

4.Do not wait for the engine to warm up

whilst the vehicle remains stationary.

Start driving at moderate engine

speeds. (Steep accelerating and decel-

erating should be avoided.)

WARNING

• Always wear appropriate shoes

when operating your vehicle.

Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski

boots,etc.) may interfere with

your ability to use the brake and

accelerator pedal, and the clutch

(if equipped).

• Do not start the vehicle with the

accelerator pedal depressed. The

vehicle can move and lead to an

accident.

• Wait until the engine rpm is nor-

mal. The vehicle may suddenly

move if the brake padel is

released when the rpm is high.

CAUTION

If the engine stalls whilst you are in

motion, do not attempt to move the

shift lever to the P (Park) position. If

traffic and road conditions permit,

you may put the shift lever in the N

(Neutral) position whilst the vehicle

is still moving and turn the ignition

switch to the START position in an

attempt to restart the engine.

CAUTION

• Do not engage the starter for

more than 10 seconds. If the

engine stalls or fails to start, wait

5 to 10 seconds before re-engag-

ing the starter. Improper use of

the starter may damage it.

• Do not turn the ignition switch to

the START position with the

engine running. It may damage

the starter.

Driving your vehicle

Starting the diesel engine

To start the diesel engine when the

engine is cold, it has to be pre-heated

before starting the engine and then have

to be warmed up before starting to drive.

1. Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

2. Manual Transmission - Depress the

clutch pedal fully and shift the trans-

mission into Neutral. Keep the clutch

pedal and brake pedal depressed

whilst turning the ignition switch to the

start position.

Automatic Transmission - Place the

transmission shift lever in P(park).

Depress the brake pedal fully.

You can also start the engine when the

shift lever is in the N(neutral) position.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion to pre-heat the engine. Then the

glow indicator light will illuminate.

4. If the glow indicator light goes out, turn

the ignition switch to the START posi-

tion and hold it there until the engine

starts (a maximum of 10 seconds),

then release the key.

✽

NOTICE

If the engine were not started within 10

seconds after the preheating is complet-

ed, turn the ignition switch once more to

the LOCK position during 10 seconds,

and then to the ON position, in order to

preheat again.

✽

NOTICE - Diesel Engine

If the accelerator is pressed for a long

time whilst standing still, the engine

power will be limited to prevent the

exhaust parts from overheating.

W-60

Glow indicator light

Driving your vehicle

Starting and stopping the engine for tur-

bocharger intercooler

1. Do not race or accelerate the engine

immediately after starting.

If the engine is cold, idle for several

seconds before sufficient lubrication is

ensured in the turbocharger unit.

2. After high speed or extended driving,

requiring a heavy engine load, run the

engine on idle condition about 1

minute before turning it off.

This idle time will allow the tur-

bocharger to cool prior to shutting the

engine off.

CAUTION

Do not turn the engine off immedi-

ately after it has been subjected to

a heavy load. Doing so may cause

severe damage to the engine or tur-

bocharger unit.

Driving your vehicle

105

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)

Manual transmission operation

The manual transmission has 5 (or 6, if

equipped) forward gears.

This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift

knob. The transmission is fully synchro-

nised in all forward gears so shifting to

either a higher or a lower gear is easily

accomplished.

Press the clutch pedal down fully whilst

shifting, then release it slowly.

If your vehicle is equipped with an igni-

tion lock switch, the engine will not start

when starting the engine without

depressing the clutch pedal. (if equipped)

The gearshift lever must be returned to

the neutral position before shifting into R

(Reverse).

Make sure the vehicle is completely

stopped before shifting into R (Reverse).

Never operate the engine with the

tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.

CAUTION

• When downshifting from fifth

gear to fourth gear, caution

should be taken not to inadver-

tently press the gear shift lever

sideways in such a manner that

second gear is engaged. Such a

drastic downshift may cause the

engine speed to increase to the

point that the tachometer will

enter the red-zone. Such over-

revving of the engine may possi-

bly cause engine damage.

• Do not downshift more than 2

gears or downshift the gear when

the engine is running at high

speed (5,000 RPM or higher).

Such a downshifting may damage

the engine, clutch and the trans-

mission.

OTQ057004/OCM050003

The ring (1) must be pulled up whilst

moving the shift lever.

The shift lever can be moved without

pulling the ring (1).

■ Type A

■ Type B

511

Driving your vehicle

• During cold weather, shifting may be

difficult until the transmission lubricant

is warmed up. This is normal and not

harmful to the transmission.

• If you've come to a complete stop and

it's hard to shift into 1st or R(Reverse),

leave the shift lever at N(Neutral) posi-

tion and release the clutch. Press the

clutch pedal back down, and then shift

into 1st or R(Reverse) gear position.

Using the clutch

The clutch should be pressed all the way

to the floor before shifting, then released

slowly. The clutch pedal should always be

fully released whilst driving. Do not rest

your foot on the clutch pedal whilst driv-

ing. This can cause unnecessary wear.

Do not partially engage the clutch to hold

the car on an incline. This causes unnec-

essary wear. Use the foot brake or park-

ing brake to hold the car on an incline. Do

not operate the clutch pedal rapidly and

repeatedly.

Downshifting

When you must slow down in heavy traf-

fic or whilst driving up steep hills, down-

shift before the engine starts to labour.

Downshifting reduces the chance of

stalling and gives better acceleration

when you again need to increase your

speed. When the vehicle is travelling

down steep hills, downshifting helps

maintain safe speed and prolongs brake

life.

CAUTION

• To avoid premature clutch wear

and damage, do not drive with

your foot resting on the clutch

pedal. Also, don’t use the clutch

to hold the vehicle stopped on an

uphill grade, whilst waiting for a

traffic light, etc.

• Do not use the shift lever as a

handrest during driving, as this

can result in premature wear of

the transmission shift forks.

• To prevent possible damage to

the clutch system, do not start

with the 2nd (second) gear

engaged except when you start

on a slippery road.

WARNING

• Before leaving the driver’s seat,

always set the parking brake fully

and shut the engine off. Then

make sure the transmission is

shifted into 1st gear when the

vehicle is parked on a level or

uphill grade, and shifted into R

(Reverse) on a downhill grade.

Unexpected and sudden vehicle

movement can occur if these pre-

cautions are not followed in the

order identified.

• If your vehicle has a manual

transmission not equipped with a

ignition lock switch, it may move

and cause a serious accident

when starting the engine without

depressing the clutch pedal

whilst the parking brake is

released and the shift lever not in

the N(Neutral) position.

• Do not use the engine brake

(shifting from a high gear to

lower gear) rapidly on slippery

roads. The vehicle may slip caus-

ing an accident.

Driving your vehicle

125

Good driving practices

• Never take the car out of gear and

coast down a hill. This is extremely

hazardous. Always leave the car in

gear.

• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause

them to overheat and malfunction.

Instead, when you are driving down a

long hill, shift to a lower gear. When

you do this, engine braking will help

slow the car.

• Slow down before shifting to a lower

gear. This will help avoid over-revving

the engine, which can cause damage.

• Slow down when you encounter cross

winds. This gives you much better con-

trol of your car.

• Be sure the car is completely stopped

before you attempt to shift into reverse.

The transmission can be damaged if

you do not. To shift into reverse,

depress the clutch, move the shift lever

to neutral, wait 3 seconds, then shift to

the reverse position.

• Exercise extreme caution when driving

on a slippery surface. Be especially

careful when braking, accelerating or

shifting gears. On a slippery surface,

an abrupt change in vehicle speed can

cause the drive wheels to lose traction

and the vehicle to go out of control.

WARNING

• Always buckle-up! In a collision,

an unbelted occupant is signifi-

cantly more likely to be seriously

injured or killed than a properly

belted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when corner-

ing or turning.

• Do not make quick steering

wheel movements, such as sharp

lane changes or fast, sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatly

increased if you lose control of

your vehicle at highway speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs if

two or more wheels drop off the

roadway and the driver over-

steers to reenter the roadway.

• In the event your vehicle leaves

the roadway, do not steer sharply.

Instead, slow down before pulling

back into the travel lanes.

• Never exceed posted speed lim-

its.

513

Driving your vehicle

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The shift lever can be moved without depressing the lock release button.

O/D button

Type A

Lock release button prevents shift lever

movement without first depressing the

button.

Lock release button prevents shift lever

movement without first depressing the

button.

Automatic mode

Sports mode

Depress the brake pedal and lock release button when shifting, if your vehicle is

equipped with shift lock system

The lock release button must be depressed whilst moving the shift lever.

OTQ057006R/OTQ057006R-1

Type B

Driving your vehicle

145

Automatic transmission operation

The automatic transmission has 5 (or 4)

forward speeds and one reverse speed.

The individual speeds are selected auto-

matically, depending on the position of

the shift lever.

✽

NOTICE

The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if

the battery has been disconnected, may

be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal

condition, and the shifting sequence will

adjust after shifts are cycled a few times

by the TCM (Transmission Control

Module) or PCM (Powertrain Control

Module).

For smooth operation, depress the brake

pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a

forward or reverse gear.

WARNING - Automatic

transmission

• Always check the surrounding

areas near your vehicle for peo-

ple, especially children, before

shifting a car into D (Drive) or R

(Reverse).

• Before leaving the driver’s seat,

always make sure the shift lever

is in the P (Park) position; then

set the parking brake fully and

shut the engine off. Unexpected

and sudden vehicle movement

can occur if these precautions

are not followed in the order iden-

tified.

• Do not use the engine brake

(shifting from a high gear to

lower gear) rapidly on slippery

roads.

The vehicle may slip causing an

accident.

CAUTION

• To avoid damage to your trans-

mission, do not accelerate the

engine in R (Reverse) or any for-

ward gear position with the

brakes on.

• When stopped on an incline, do

not hold the vehicle stationary

with engine power. Use the serv-

ice brake or the parking brake.

• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P

(Park) into D (Drive), or R

(Reverse) when the engine is

above idle speed.

515

Driving your vehicle

Transmission ranges

The indicator in the instrument cluster

displays the shift lever position when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop before

shifting into P (Park). This position locks

the transmission and prevents the drive

wheels from rotating.

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle

backward.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transmission are not

engaged. The vehicle will roll freely even

on the slightest incline unless the parking

brake or service brakes are applied.

CAUTION

The transmission may be damaged

if you shift into P (Park) whilst the

vehicle is in motion.

CAUTION

Always come to a complete stop

before shifting into or out of R

(Reverse); you may damage the

transmission if you shift into R

whilst the vehicle is in motion,

except as explained in “Rocking the

vehicle” in this section.

WARNING

• Shifting into P (Park) whilst the

vehicle is in motion will cause the

drive wheels to lock which will

cause you to lose control of the

vehicle.

• Do not use the P (Park) position

in place of the parking brake.

Always make sure the shift lever

is latched in the P (Park) position

and set the parking brake fully.

• Never leave a child unattended in

a vehicle.

WARNING

Do not drive with the shift lever in N

(Neutral).

The engine brake will not work and

lead to an accident.

Driving your vehicle

165

D (Drive)

This is the normal forward driving posi-

tion. The transmission will automatically

shift through a 5 (or 4)-gear sequence,

providing the best fuel economy and

power.

For extra power when passing another

vehicle or climbing grades, depress the

accelerator fully, at which time the trans-

mission will automatically downshift to

the next lower gear.

✽

NOTICE

Always come to a complete stop before

shifting into D (Drive).

2 (Second Gear, if equipped)

Use 2 (Second Gear) for more power

when climbing hills and for increased

braking when going down hills. This posi-

tion also helps reduce wheel spin on slip-

pery surfaces. When the shift lever is

placed in 2 (Second Gear), the transmis-

sion will automatically shift from first to

second gear.

L (Low, if equipped)

Move the shift lever to this position in

hard pulling situations and for climbing

steep grades.

O/D (Over Drive) system

(if equipped)

Pressing the O/D system button cancels

and engages the overdrive system.

When the O/D system is cancelled, the

O/D OFF indicator illuminates and the

transmission gear range is limited to 1st

through 3rd.

OTQ057007R

CAUTION

Do not exceed the recommended

maximum speeds in 2 (Second

Gear) or L (Low). Operating the

vehicle at speeds above the maxi-

mum recommended, for 2 (Second

Gear) or L (Low) may cause exces-

sive heat to develop which could

result in damage to or failure of the

automatic transmission.

517

Driving your vehicle

The transmission will not shift to 4th gear

until the O/D system button is pressed

again to release the switch.

When driving down a sloping road with

the transmission in O/D (4th), you can

decrease the vehicle speed without using

the brakes by pressing the O/D button.

When the ignition is switched OFF, O/D

OFF mode is automatically cancelled.

O/D OFF Indicator

This indicator light illuminates in the

instrument panel when the O/D mode is

cancelled.

Sports mode (if equipped)

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in

motion, sports mode is selected by push-

ing the shift lever from the D (Drive) posi-

tion into the manual gate. To return to D

(Drive) range operation, push the shift

lever back into the main gate.

In sports mode, moving the shift lever

backwards and forwards will allow you to

make gearshifts rapidly. In contrast to a

manual transmission, the sports mode

allows gearshifts with the accelerator

pedal depressed.

Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to

shift up one gear.

Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once

to shift down one gear.

✽

NOTICE

• In sports mode, the driver must exe-

cute upshifts in accordance with road

conditions, taking care to keep the

engine speed below the red zone.

• In sports mode, only the 5 forward

gears can be selected. To reverse or

park the vehicle, move the shift lever

to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position

as required.

• In sports mode, downshifts are made

automatically when the vehicle slows

down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear

is automatically selected.

• In sports mode, when the engine rpm

approaches the red zone shift points

are varied to upshift automatically.

• To maintain the required levels of

vehicle performance and safety, the

system may not execute certain

gearshifts when the shift lever is oper-

ated.

• When driving on a slippery road,

push the shift lever forward into the

+(up) position. This causes the trans-

mission to shift into the 2nd gear

which is better for smooth driving on

a slippery road. Push the shift lever to

the -(down) side to shift back to the 1st

gear.

OTQ057007R-1

+ (UP)

- (DOWN)

Sports mode

Driving your vehicle

185

Good driving practices

• Never move the gear shift lever from P

(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other posi-

tion with the accelerator pedal

depressed.

• Never move the gear shift lever into P

(Park) when the vehicle is in motion.

• Be sure the car is completely stopped

before you attempt to shift into R

(Reverse).

• Never take the car out of gear and

coast down a hill. This may be

extremely hazardous. Always leave the

car in gear when moving.

• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can

cause them to overheat and malfunc-

tion. Instead, when you are driving

down a long hill, shift to a lower gear.

When you do this, engine braking will

help slow the car.

• Slow down before shifting to a lower

gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may

not be engaged.

• Always use the parking brake. Do not

depend on placing the transmission in

P (Park) to keep the car from moving.

• Exercise extreme caution when driving

on a slippery surface. Be especially

careful when braking, accelerating or

shifting gears. On a slippery surface,

an abrupt change in vehicle speed can

cause the drive wheels to lose traction

and the vehicle to go out of control.

• Optimum vehicle performance and

economy is obtained by smoothly

depressing and releasing the accelera-

tor pedal.

WARNING

• Always buckle-up! In a collision,

an unbelted occupant is signifi-

cantly more likely to be seriously

injured or killed than a properly

belted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when corner-

ing or turning.

• Do not make quick steering

wheel movements, such as sharp

lane changes or fast, sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatly

increased if you lose control of

your vehicle at highway speeds.

(Continued)

• Loss of control often occurs if

two or more wheels drop off the

roadway and the driver over-

steers to reenter the roadway.

• In the event your vehicle leaves

the roadway, do not steer sharply.

Instead, slow down before pulling

back into the travel lanes.

• Never exceed posted speed lim-

its.

WARNING

If your vehicle becomes stuck in

snow, mud, sand, etc., then you

may attempt to rock the vehicle free

by moving it forward and backward.

Do not attempt this procedure if

people or objects are anywhere

near the vehicle. During the rocking

operation the vehicle may suddenly

move forward of backward as it

becomes unstuck, causing injury

or damage to nearby people or

objects.

519

Driving your vehicle

Moving up a steep grade from a stand-

ing start

To move up a steep grade from a stand-

ing start, depress the brake pedal, shift

the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the

appropriate gear depending on load

weight and steepness of the grade, and

release the parking brake. Depress the

accelerator gradually whilst releasing the

service brakes.

When accelerating from a stop on a

steep hill, the vehicle may have a ten-

dency to roll backwards. Shifting the

shift lever into 2 (Second Gear) will

help prevent the vehicle from rolling

backwards.

Shift lock system (if equipped)

For your safety, the Automatic

Transmission has a shift lock system

which prevents shifting the transmission

out of P (Park) unless the brake pedal is

depressed.

To shift the transmission out of P (Park):

Type A

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

2. Depress the lock release button and

move the shift lever.

Type B (If the ignition key interlock sys-

tem is equipped)

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine or turn the ignition to

the ON position.

3. Depress the lock release button and

move the shift lever.

If the brake pedal is repeatedly

depressed and released with the shift

lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering

sound near the shift lever may be heard.

This is a normal condition.

Ignition key interlock system

(if equipped)

The ignition key cannot be removed

unless the shift lever is in the P (Park)

position. If the ignition switch is in any

other position, the key cannot be

removed.

Driving your vehicle

205

Power brakes

Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes

that adjust automatically through normal

usage.

In the event that the power-assisted

brakes lose power because of a stalled

engine or some other reason, you can

still stop your vehicle by applying greater

force to the brake pedal than you nor-

mally would. The stopping distance, how-

ever, will be longer.

When the engine is not running, the

reserve brake power is partially depleted

each time the brake pedal is applied. Do

not pump the brake pedal when the

power assist has been interrupted.

Pump the brake pedal only when neces-

sary to maintain steering control on slip-

pery surfaces.

BRAKE SYSTEM

WARNING -

Brakes

• Do not drive with your foot rest-

ing on the brake pedal. This will

create abnormal high brake tem-

peratures, excessive brake lining

and pad wear, and increased

stopping distances.

• When descending a long or steep

hill, shift to a lower gear and

avoid continuous application of

the brakes. Continuous brake

application will cause the brakes

to overheat and could result in a

temporary loss of braking per-

formance.

• Wet brakes may impair the vehi-

cle’s ability to sefely slow down;

the vehicle may also pull to one

side when the brakes are applied.

Applying the brakes lightly will

indicate whether they have been

affected in this way. Always test

your brakes in this fashion after

driving through deep water. To

dry the brakes, apply them lightly

whilst maintaining a safe forward

speed until brake performance

returns to normal.

(Continued)

• Always, confirm the position of

the brake and accelerator pedal

before driving. If you do not

check the position of the acceler-

ator and brake pedal before driv-

ing, you may depress the acceler-

ator instead of the brake pedal. It

may cause a serious accident.

521

Driving your vehicle

In the event of brake failure

If service brakes fail to operate whilst the

vehicle is in motion, you can make an

emergency stop with the parking brake.

The stopping distance, however, will be

much greater than normal.

Disc brakes wear indicator

Your vehicle has disc brakes. When your

brake pads are worn and new pads are

required, you will hear a high-pitched

warning sound from your front brakes or

rear brakes (if equipped). You may hear

this sound come and go or it may occur

whenever you depress the brake pedal.

Please remember that some driving con-

ditions or climates may cause a brake

squeal when you first apply (or lightly

apply) the brakes. This is normal and

does not indicate a problem with your

brakes.

Parking brake

Applying the parking brake

To engage the parking brake, first apply

the foot brake and then without pressing

the release button in, pull the parking

brake lever up as far as possible. In addi-

tion it is recommended that when parking

the vehicle on a gradient, the shift lever

should be positioned in the appropriate

low gear on manual transmission vehi-

cles or in the P (Park) position on auto-

matic transmission vehicles.

WARNING - Parking brake

Applying the parking brake whilst

the vehicle is moving at normal

speeds can cause a sudden loss of

control of the vehicle. If you must

use the parking brake to stop the

vehicle, use great caution in apply-

ing the brake.

WARNING - Brake wear

This brake wear warning sound

means your vehicle needs service.

If you ignore this audible warning,

you will eventually lose braking

performance, which could lead to a

serious accident.

CAUTION

• To avoid costly brake repairs, do

not continue to drive with worn

brake pads.

• Always replace brake pads as

complete front or rear axle sets.

OTQ057008

Driving your vehicle

225

Releasing the parking brake

To release the parking brake, first apply

the foot brake and pull up the parking

brake lever slightly. Secondly depress the

release button (1) and lower the parking

brake lever (2) whilst holding the button.

CAUTION

• Driving with the parking brake

applied will cause excessive

brake pad and brake rotor wear.

• Do not operate the parking brake

whilst the vehicle is moving

except in an emergency situation.

It could damage the vehicle sys-

tem and make endanger driving

safety.

WARNING

• To prevent unintentional move-

ment when stopped and leaving

the vehicle, do not use the

gearshift lever in place of the

parking brake. Set the parking

brake AND make sure the

gearshift lever is securely posi-

tioned in 1st (First) gear or R

(Reverse) for manual transmis-

sion equipped vehicles and in P

(Park) for automatic transmission

equipped vehicles.

• Never allow anyone who is unfa-

miliar with the vehicle to touch

the parking brake. If the parking

brake is released unintentionally,

serious injury may occur.

• All vehicles should always have

the parking brake fully engaged

when parking to avoid inadver-

tent movement of the car which

can injure occupants or pedestri-

ans.

OTQ057009

523

Driving your vehicle

Check the brake warning light by turning

the ignition switch ON (do not start the

engine). This light will be illuminated

when the parking brake is applied with

the ignition switch in the START or ON

position.

Before driving, be sure the parking brake

is fully released and the brake warning

light is off.

If the brake warning light remains on

after the parking brake is released whilst

engine is running, there may be a mal-

function in the brake system. Immediate

attention is necessary.

If at all possible, cease driving the vehi-

cle immediately. If that is not possible,

use extreme caution whilst operating the

vehicle and only continue to drive the

vehicle until you can reach a safe loca-

tion or repair shop.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

(if equipped)

W-75/WK-23

■ Type A ■ Type B

WARNING

ABS (or ESP) will not prevent acci-

dents due to improper or danger-

ous driving manoeuvres. Even

though vehicle control is improved

during emergency braking, always

maintain a safe distance between

you and objects ahead. Vehicle

speeds should always be reduced

during extreme road conditions.

The braking distance for cars

equipped with an anti-lock braking

system (or Electronic Stability

Program System) may be longer

than for those without it in the fol-

lowing road conditions.

During these conditions the vehicle

should be driven at reduced

speeds:

• Rough, gravel or snow-covered

roads.

• With tyre chains installed.

(Continued)

Driving your vehicle

245

The ABS continuously senses the speed

of the wheels. If the wheels are going to

lock, the ABS system repeatedly modu-

lates the hydraulic brake pressure to the

wheels.

When you apply your brakes under con-

ditions which may lock the wheels, you

may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the

brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation

in the brake pedal. This is normal and it

means your ABS is active.

In order to obtain the maximum benefit

from your ABS in an emergency situa-

tion, do not attempt to modulate your

brake pressure and do not try to pump

your brakes. Press your brake pedal as

hard as possible or as hard as the situa-

tion warrants and allow the ABS to con-

trol the force being delivered to the

brakes.

✽

NOTICE

A click sound may be heard in the

engine compartment when the vehicle

begins to move after the engine is start-

ed. These conditions are normal and

indicate that the anti-lock brake system

is functioning properly.

• Even with the anti-lock brake system,

your vehicle still requires sufficient

stopping distance. Always maintain a

safe distance from the vehicle in front

of you.

• Always slow down when cornering.

The anti-lock brake system cannot pre-

vent accidents resulting from exces-

sive speeds.

• On loose or uneven road surfaces,

operation of the anti-lock brake system

may result in a longer stopping dis-

tance than for vehicles equipped with a

conventional brake system.

(Continued)

• On roads where the road surface

is pitted or has different surface

height.

The safety features of an ABS (or

ESP) equipped vehicle should not

be tested by high speed driving or

cornering. This could endanger the

safety of yourself or others.

525

Driving your vehicle

✽

NOTICE

When you jump start your vehicle

because of a drained battery, the engine

may not run as smoothly and the ABS

warning light may turn on at the same

time. This happens because of the low

battery voltage. It does not mean your

ABS is malfunctioning.

• Do not pump your brakes!

• Have the battery recharged before

driving the vehicle.

Electronic stability program (ESP)

/ Electronic stability control (ESC)

(If equipped)

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) /

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system

is designed to stabilize the vehicle during

cornering manoeuvres.

W-78

CAUTION

• If the ABS warning light is on and

stays on, you may have a problem

with the ABS. In this case, howev-

er, your regular brakes will work

normally.

• The ABS warning light will stay on

for approximately 3 seconds after

the ignition switch is ON. During

that time, the ABS will go through

self-diagnosis and the light will go

off if everything is normal. If the

light stays on, you may have a

problem with your ABS.We recom-

mend that you contact a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

CAUTION

• When you drive on a road having

poor traction, such as an icy road,

and operate your brakes continu-

ously, the ABS will be active con-

tinuously and the ABS warning

light may illuminate. Pull your car

over to a safe place and stop the

engine.

• Restart the engine. If the ABS

warning light is off, then your

ABS system is normal.

Otherwise, you may have a prob-

lem with the ABS. We recommend

that you contact a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

OTQ057010R

OTQ054010R

■ Type A

■ Type B

Driving your vehicle

265

ESP (ESC) checks where you are

steering and where the vehicle is actually

going.

ESP (ESC) applies the brakes at

individual wheels and intervenes in the

engine management system to stabilize

the vehicle.

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system

is an electronic system designed to help

the driver maintain vehicle control under

adverse conditions. It is not a substitute

for safe driving practices. Factors

including speed, road conditions and

driver steering input can all affect

whether ESP (ESC) will be effective in

preventing a loss of control. It is still your

responsibility to drive and corner at

reasonable speeds and to leave a

sufficient margin of safety.

When you apply your brakes under con-

ditions which may lock the wheels, you

may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the

brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation

in the brake pedal. This is normal and it

means your ESP (ESC) is active.

✽

NOTICE

A click sound may be heard in the

engine compartment when the vehicle

begins to move after the engine is start-

ed. These conditions are normal and

indicate that the Electronic Stability

Program (Electronic stability control)

System is functioning properly.

ESP (ESC) operation

ESP (ESC) ON condition

• When the ignition is turned

ON, ESP (ESC) and ESP

(ESC) OFF indicator lights

illuminate for approximately 3

seconds, then ESP (ESC) is

turned on.

• Press the ESP (ESC) OFF

button for at least half a sec-

ond after turning the ignition

ON to turn ESP (ESC) off.

(ESP (ESC) OFF indicator

will illuminate). To turn the

ESP (ESC) on, press the

ESP (ESC) OFF button (ESP

(ESC) OFF indicator light will

go off).

• When starting the engine,

you may hear a slight ticking

sound. This is the ESP (ESC)

performing an automatic sys-

tem self-check and does not

indicate a problem.

WARNING

Never drive too fast for the road

conditions or too quickly when cor-

nering. Electronic stability pro-

gram (ESP) / Electronic stability

control (ESC) will not prevent acci-

dents. Excessive speed in turns,

abrupt manoeuvres and hydroplan-

ing on wet surfaces can still result

in serious accidents. Only a safe

and attentive driver can prevent

accidents by avoiding manoeuvres

that cause the vehicle to lose trac-

tion. Even with ESP (ESC)

installed, always follow all the nor-

mal precautions for driving - includ-

ing driving at safe speeds for the

conditions.

527

Driving your vehicle

When operating

When the ESP (ESC) is in

operation, ESP (ESC) indicator

light blinks.

• When the Electronic Stability

Program (Electronic Stability

Control) is operating properly,

you can feel a slight pulsation

in the vehicle. This is only the

effect of brake control and

indicates nothing unusual.

• When moving out of the mud

or slippery road, pressing the

accelerator pedal may not

cause the engine rpm (revo-

lutions per minute) to

increase.

ESP (ESC) operation off

ESP (ESC) OFF state

• To cancel ESP (ESC) opera-

tion, press the ESP (ESC)

OFF button (ESP (ESC) OFF

indicator light illuminates).

• If the ignition switch is turned

to LOCK position when ESP

(ESC) is off, ESP (ESC)

remains off. Upon restarting

the engine, the ESP (ESC)

will automatically turn on

again.

Indicator light

When ignition switch is turned to ON, the

indicator light illuminates, then goes off if

the ESP (ESC) system is operating nor-

mally.

The ESP (ESC) indicator light blinks

whenever ESP (ESC) is operating or illu-

minates when ESP (ESC) fails to oper-

ate. ESP (ESC) OFF indicator light

comes on when the ESP (ESC) is turned

off with the button.

ESP

■ Type A

■ Type B

ESP

OFF

■ Type A

■ Type B

ESP

OFF

• ESP OFF indicator light

• ESP indicator light

■ Type A

■ Type B

• ESC OFF indicator light

• ESC indicator light

Driving your vehicle

285

✽

NOTICE

After reconnecting or recharging a dis-

charged battery, the ESP (ESC) indica-

tor may illuminate. In this case, turn the

steering wheel half way to the left and

right whilst the ignition switch is in the

ON position. Then, restart the engine

after the ignition is off. If the ESP (ESC)

indicator does not turn off, we recom-

mend that the system be checked by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

ESP (ESC) OFF usage

When driving

• The ESP (ESC) turned on for daily

driving whenever possible.

• To turn ESP (ESC) off whilst driving,

press the ESP (ESC) OFF button

whilst driving on a flat road surface.

Never press the ESP (ESC) OFF button

whilst ESP (ESC) is operating (ESP

(ESC) indicator light blinks).

If ESP (ESC) is turned off whilst ESP

(ESC) is operating, the vehicle may slip

out of control.

✽

NOTICE

• When operating the vehicle on a

dynamometer, ensure that the ESP

(ESC) is turned off (ESP (ESC) OFF

light illuminated). If the ESP (ESC) is

left on, it may prevent the vehicle

speed from increasing, and result in

false diagnosis.

• Turning the ESP (ESC) off does not

affect ABS or brake system operation.

CAUTION

Driving with varying tyre or wheel

sizes may cause the ESP (ESC) sys-

tem to malfunction. When replacing

tyres, make sure they are the same

size as your original tyres.

WARNING

The Electronic Stability Program

(Electronic stability control) system

is only a driving aid; use precau-

tions for safe driving by slowing

down on curved, snowy, or icy

roads. Drive slowly and don’t

attempt to accelerate whenever the

ESP (ESC) indicator light is blink-

ing, or when the road surface is

slippery.

529

Driving your vehicle

Good braking practices

• After being parked, check to be sure

the parking brake is not engaged and

that the parking brake indicator light is

out before driving away.

• Driving through water may get the

brakes wet. They can also get wet

when the car is washed. Wet brakes

can be dangerous! Your car will not

stop as quickly if the brakes are wet.

Wet brakes may cause the car to pull

to one side.

To dry the brakes, apply the brakes

lightly until the braking action returns to

normal, taking care to keep the car

under control at all times. If the braking

action does not return to normal, stop

as soon as it is safe to do so and we

recommend that you call a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

• Don't coast down hills with the car out

of gear. This is extremely hazardous.

Keep the car in gear at all times, use

the brakes to slow down, then shift to a

lower gear so that engine braking will

help you maintain a safe speed.

WARNING

• Whenever leaving vehicle or

parking, always set the parking

brake as far as possible and fully

engage the vehicle's transmis-

sion into the park position.

Vehicles not fully engaged in park

with the parking brake set are at

risk for moving inadvertently and

injuring yourself or others.

• All vehicles should always have

the parking brake fully engaged

when parking to avoid inadver-

tent movement of the car which

can injure occupants or pedestri-

ans.

WARNING

Never press the ESP (ESC) OFF

button whilst ESP (ESC) is operat-

ing.

If the ESP (ESC) is turned off whilst

ESP (ESC) is operating, the vehicle

may go out of control.

To turn ESP (ESC) off whilst driv-

ing, press the ESP (ESC) OFF but-

ton whilst driving on a flat road sur-

face.

Driving your vehicle

305

• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting

your foot on the brake pedal whilst driv-

ing can be dangerous because it can

result in the brakes overheating and

losing their effectiveness. It also

increases the wear of the brake com-

ponents.

• If a tyre goes flat whilst you are driving,

apply the brakes gently and keep the

car pointed straight ahead whilst you

slow down. When you are moving

slowly enough for it to be safe to do so,

pull off the road and stop in a safe

place.

• If your car is equipped with an auto-

matic transmission, don't let your car

creep forward. To avoid creeping for-

ward, keep your foot firmly on the

brake pedal when the car is stopped.

• Use caution when parking on a hill.

Firmly engage the parking brake and

place the gear selector lever in P (auto-

matic transmission) or in first or

reverse gear (manual transmission). If

your car is facing downhill, turn the

front wheels into the kerb to help keep

the car from rolling. If your car is facing

uphill, turn the front wheels away from

the kerb to help keep the car from

rolling. If there is no kerb or if it is

required by other conditions to keep

the car from rolling, block the wheels.

• Under some conditions your parking

brake can freeze in the engaged posi-

tion. This is most likely to happen when

there is an accumulation of snow or ice

around or near the rear brakes or if the

brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the

parking brake may freeze, apply it only

temporarily whilst you put the gear

selector lever in P (automatic transmis-

sion) or in first or reverse gear (manu-

al transmission) and block the rear

wheels so the car cannot roll. Then

release the parking brake.

• Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade

with the accelerator pedal. This can

cause the transmission to overheat.

Always use the brake pedal or parking

brake.

531

Driving your vehicle

1. Cruise indicator

2. Cruise set indicator

The cruise control system allows you to

program the vehicle to maintain a con-

stant speed without depressing the

accelerator pedal.

This system is designed to function

above approximately 30 km/h (19 mph).

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING

• If the cruise control is left on,

(CRUISE indicator light in the

instrument cluster is illuminated),

the cruise control can be

switched on accidentally. Keep

the cruise control system off

(CRUISE indicator light OFF)

when the cruise control is not in

use, to avoid inadvertently set-

ting a speed.

• Use the cruise control system

only when driving on open high-

ways in good weather.

• Do not use the cruise control

when it may not be safe to keep

the vehicle at a constant speed,

for instance, driving in heavy or

varying traffic, or on slippery

(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or

winding roads or over 6% up-hill

or down-hill roads.

• Pay particular attention to the

driving conditions whenever

using the cruise control system.

• Be careful when driving downhill

using the cruise control system,

which may increase the vehicle

speed.

CAUTION

During cruise-speed driving with a

manual transmission vehicle, do

not shift into neutral without

depressing the clutch pedal, since

the engine will be overrevved. If this

happens, depress the clutch pedal

or release the CRUISE switch.

OTQ045241R

OTQ045278R

■ Type A

■ Type B

Driving your vehicle

325

✽

NOTICE

• During normal cruise control opera-

tion, when the SET switch is activated

or reactivated after applying the

brakes, the cruise control will ener-

gize after approximately 3 seconds.

This delay is normal.

• To activate cruise control, depress the

brake pedal at least once after turning

the ignition switch to the ON position

or starting the engine. This is to check

if the brake switch which is important

part to cancel cruise control is in nor-

mal condition.

Cruise control switch

/ CRUISE : Turns cruise control sys-

tem on or off.

CANCEL: Cancels cruise control opera-

tion.

RES+: Resumes or increases cruise

control speed.

SET-: Sets or decreases cruise control

speed.

To set cruise control speed:

1.Press the / CRUISE button on the

steering wheel, to turn the system on.

The CRUISE indicator light will illumi-

nate.

2.Accelerate to the desired speed, which

must be more than 30 km/h (19 mph).

OTQ045223

OTQ045279

■ Type A

■ Type B

OTQ045225

OTQ045280

■ Type A

■ Type B

533

Driving your vehicle

✽

NOTICE -

Manual

transmission

For manual transmission vehicles, you

should depress the brake pedal at least

once to set the cruise control after start-

ing the engine.

3.Press the button (SET-), and release it

at the desired speed. The SET indica-

tor light will illuminate. Release the

accelerator pedal at the same time.

The desired speed will automatically

be maintained.

On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow

down or speed up slightly whilst going

uphill or downhill.

To increase cruise control set

speed:

Follow either of these procedures:

• Press the button (RES+) and hold it.

Your vehicle will accelerate. Release the

button at the speed you want.

• Press the button (RES+) and release it

immediately. The cruising speed will

increase by 2.0 km/h or 1 mph each

time you press the button (RES+) in

this manner.

OTQ045226

OTQ045281

■ Type A

■ Type B

OTQ045224

OTQ045282

■ Type A

■ Type B

Driving your vehicle

345

To decrease the cruising speed:

Follow either of these procedures:

• Press the button (SET-) and hold it.

Your vehicle will gradually slow down.

Release the button at the speed you

want to maintain.

• Press the button (SET-) and release it

immediately. The cruising speed will

decrease by 2.0 km/h or 1 mph each

time you press the button (SET-) in this

manner.

To temporarily accelerate with the

cruise control on:

If you want to speed up temporarily when

the cruise control is on, depress the

accelerator pedal. Increased speed will

not interfere with cruise control operation

or change the set speed.

To return to the set speed, take your foot

off the accelerator pedal.

To cancel cruise control, do one

of the following:

• Depress the brake pedal.

• Depress the clutch pedal with a manu-

al transmission.

• Shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic

transmission.

• Press the

CANCEL / O switch located

on the steering wheel.

OTQ045226

OTQ045281

■ Type A

■ Type B

OTQ045227

OTQ045283

■ Type A

■ Type B

535

Driving your vehicle

• Decrease the vehicle speed lower than

the memory speed by 20 km/h (12

mph).

• Decrease the vehicle speed to less

than approximately 30 km/h (19 mph).

Each of these actions will cancel cruise

control operation (the

SET

indicator light

in the instrument cluster will go off), but it

will not turn the system off. If you wish to

resume cruise control operation, press

the button (RES+) located on your steer-

ing wheel. You will return to your previ-

ously preset speed.

To resume cruising speed at

more than approximately 30 km/h

(19 mph):

If any method other than the /

CRUISE button was used to cancel cruis-

ing speed and the system is still activat-

ed, the most recent set speed will auto-

matically resume when you press the

button (RES+).

It will not resume, however, if the vehicle

speed has dropped below approximately

30 km/h (19 mph).

✽

NOTICE

Always check the road conditions when

press the button (RES+) to resume the

speed.

OTQ045224

OTQ045282

■ Type A

■ Type B

Driving your vehicle

365

To turn cruise control off, do one

of the following:

• Press the / CRUISE button. (the

CRUISE indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster will go off)

• Turn the ignition off.

Both of these actions cancel cruise con-

trol operation. If you want to resume

cruise control operation, repeat the steps

provided in “To set cruise control speed”

on the previous page.

OTQ045225

OTQ045280

■ Type A

■ Type B

537

Driving your vehicle

Wagon/Van (if equipped)

A locking differential, if equipped, is for

the rear wheel differential only. The fea-

tures of this locking differential are

described below:

Just as with a conventional differential,

the wheel on one side is allowed to turn

at a different speed from the wheel on

the other side when the vehicle is cor-

nering. The difference between the lock-

ing differential and a conventional differ-

ential is that if the wheel on one side of

the vehicle loses traction, a greater

amount of torque is applied to the rear

wheel on the other side to improve trac-

tion.

✽

NOTICE

In a stationary position, the LD

(Locking Differential) will operate when

the difference of the revolution speed

between the rear right wheel and the

rear left wheel occurs.

The following procedures can be used to

confirm that the locking differential is

functioning properly:

(1) Position the vehicle so that one wheel

is on a dry paved surface and the

other on ice, snow, mud, etc. Drive

the vehicle, and observe the opera-

tion of the locking differential. The

vehicle should not become stuck if

the differential is functioning properly.

(2) Depress the accelerator pedal gradu-

ally, and then when traction is good,

depress it forcefully. If the vehicle

accelerates well, the differential is

functioning properly.

✽

NOTICE

Usually a locking differential will oper-

ate and release automatically but occa-

sionally it may not release automatically.

At this time you will feel the tyre is

dragged when you are driving or corner-

ing. You can release it manually by slight-

ly turning the steering wheel right and

left whilst the vehicle is moving slowly.

LOCKING DIFFERENTIAL (IF EQUIPPED)

CAUTION

• Never start the engine with the

gearshift lever placed in the for-

ward or reverse whilst one of the

rear wheels is jacked up and the

other in contact with the ground;

doing so may cause the vehicle to

jump forward.

• If one of the rear wheels begins to

spin in mud, snow, etc., the vehicle

can sometimes be driven out by

depressing the accelerator pedal

further; however, avoid running

the engine continuously at high

rpm because doing so could dam-

age the locking differential.

Driving your vehicle

385

Your vehicle's fuel economy depends

mainly on your style of driving, where you

drive and when you drive.

Each of these factors affects how many

miles (kilometers) you can get from a gal-

lon (litre) of fuel. To operate your vehicle

as economically as possible, use the fol-

lowing driving suggestions to help save

money in both fuel and repairs:

• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moder-

ate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts

or full-throttle shifts and maintain a

steady cruising speed. Do not race

between stoplights. Try to adjust your

speed to that of the other traffic so you

don't have to change speeds unneces-

sarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever

possible. Always maintain a safe dis-

tance from other vehicles so you can

avoid unnecessary braking. This also

reduces brake wear.

• Drive at a moderate speed. The faster

you drive, the more fuel your car uses.

Driving at a moderate speed, especial-

ly on the highway, is one of the most

effective ways to reduce fuel consump-

tion.

• Do not "ride" the brake or clutch pedal.

This can increase fuel consumption

and also increase wear on these com-

ponents. In addition, driving with your

foot resting on the brake pedal may

cause the brakes to overheat, which

reduces their effectiveness and may

lead to more serious consequences.

• Take care of your tyres. Keep them

inflated to the recommended pressure.

Incorrect inflation, either too much or

too little, results in unnecessary tyre

wear. Check the tyre pressures at least

once a month.

• Be sure that the wheels are aligned

correctly. Improper alignment can

result from hitting kerbs or driving too

fast over irregular surfaces. Poor align-

ment causes faster tyre wear and may

also result in other problems as well as

greater fuel consumption.

• Keep your car in good condition. For

better fuel economy and reduced

maintenance costs, maintain your car

in accordance with the maintenance

schedule. If you drive your car in

severe conditions, more frequent main-

tenance is required.

• Keep your car clean. For maximum

service, your vehicle should be kept

clean and free of corrosive materials. It

is especially important that mud, dirt,

ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate

on the underside of the car. This extra

weight can result in increased fuel con-

sumption and also contribute to corro-

sion.

• Travel lightly. Do not carry unnecessary

weight in your car. Weight reduces fuel

economy.

• Do not let the engine idle longer than

necessary. If you are waiting (and not

in traffic), turn off your engine and

restart only when you're ready to go.

• Remember, your vehicle does not

require extended warm-up. After the

engine has started, allow the engine to

run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to plac-

ing the vehicle in gear. In very cold

weather, however, give your engine a

slightly longer warm-up period.

• Do not "labour" or "over-rev" the

engine. Labouring is driving too slowly

in too high a gear resulting in the vehi-

cle kangarooing. If this happens, shift

to a lower gear. Over-revving is racing

the engine beyond its safe limit. This

can be avoided by shifting at the rec-

ommended speeds.

ECONOMICAL OPERATION

539

Driving your vehicle

• Use your air conditioning sparingly.

The air conditioning system is operat-

ed by engine power so your fuel econ-

omy is reduced when you use it.

• Open windows at high speeds can

reduce fuel economy.

• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds

and headwinds. To help offset some of

this loss, slow down when driving in

these conditions.

Keeping a vehicle in good operating con-

dition is important both for economy and

safety. Therefore, we recommend that the

system be serviced by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

WARNING

- Engine off dur-

ing motion

Never turn the engine off to coast

down hills or anytime the vehicle is

in motion. The power steering and

power brakes will not function

properly without the engine run-

ning. Instead, keep the engine on

and downshift to an appropriate

gear for engine braking effect. In

addition, turning off the ignition

whilst driving could engage the

steering wheel lock resulting in

loss of vehicle steering which

could cause serious injury or

death.

Driving your vehicle

405

Hazardous driving conditions

When hazardous driving conditions are

encountered such as water, snow, ice,

mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow

these suggestions:

• Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-

tance for braking.

• Avoid sudden movements in braking or

steering.

• When braking with non-ABS brakes

pump the brake pedal with a light up-

and-down motion until the vehicle is

stopped.

• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use

second gear. Accelerate slowly to

avoid spinning the drive wheels.

• Use sand, rock salt, tyre chains, or

other non-slip material under the drive

wheels to provide traction when stalled

in ice, snow, or mud.

Rocking the vehicle

If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free

it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn the

steering wheel right and left to clear the

area around your drive wheels. Then,

shift back and forth between 1st (First)

and R (Reverse) in vehicles equipped

with a manual transmission or R

(Reverse) and any forward gear in vehi-

cles equipped with an automatic trans-

mission. Do not race the engine, and spin

the wheels as little as possible. If you are

still stuck after a few tries, have the vehi-

cle pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid

engine overheating and possible damage

to the transmission.

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

WARNING - ABS

Do not pump the brake pedal on a

vehicle equipped with ABS.

WARNING - Downshifting

Downshifting with an automatic

transmission, whilst driving on

slippery surfaces can cause an

accident. The sudden change in

tyre speed could cause the tyres to

skid. Be careful when downshifting

on slippery surfaces.

CAUTION

Prolonged rocking may cause

engine over-heating, transmission

damage or failure, and tyre damage.

541

Driving your vehicle

✽

NOTICE

The ESP system (if equipped) should be

turned OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.

Smooth cornering

Avoid braking or gear changing in cor-

ners, especially when roads are wet.

Ideally, corners should always be taken

under gentle acceleration. If you follow

these suggestions, tyre wear will be held

to a minimum.

Driving at night

Because night driving presents more

hazards than driving in the daylight, here

are some important tips to remember:

• Slow down and keep more distance

between you and other vehicles, as it

may be more difficult to see at night,

especially in areas where there may

not be any street lights.

WARNING

- Spinning tyres

Do not spin the wheels, especially

at speeds more than 35 mph (56

km/h). Spinning the wheels at high

speeds when the vehicle is station-

ary could cause a tyre to overheat

which could result in tyre damage

that may injure bystanders.

WARNING

If your vehicle becomes stuck in

snow, mud, sand, etc., then you

may attempt to rock the vehicle free

by moving it forward and backward.

Do not attempt this procedure if

people or objects are anywhere

near the vehicle. During the rocking

operation the vehicle may suddenly

move forward of backward as it

becomes unstuck, causing injury

or damage to nearby people or

objects.

OTQ055051R OTQ055010

Driving your vehicle

425

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare

from other driver's headlights.

• Keep your headlights clean and prop-

erly aimed on vehicles not equipped

with the automatic headlight aiming

feature. Dirty or improperly aimed

headlights will make it much more diffi-

cult to see at night.

• Avoid staring directly at the headlights

of oncoming vehicles. You could be

temporarily blinded, and it will take

several seconds for your eyes to read-

just to the darkness.

Driving in the rain

Rain and wet roads can make driving

dangerous, especially if you’re not pre-

pared for the slick pavement. Here are a

few things to consider when driving in the

rain:

• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to

see and will increase the distance

needed to stop your vehicle, so slow

down.

• Keep your windscreen wiping equip-

ment in good shape. Replace your

windscreen wiper blades when they

show signs of streaking or missing

areas on the windscreen.

• If your tyres are not in good condition,

making a quick stop on wet pavement

can cause a skid and possibly lead to

an accident. Be sure your tyres are in

good shape.

• Turn on your headlights to make it eas-

ier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large puddles

can affect your brakes. If you must go

through puddles, try to drive through

them slowly.

• If you believe you may have gotten

your brakes wet, apply them lightly

whilst driving until normal braking

operation returns.

1TQA3003/H

543

Driving your vehicle

Driving in flooded areas

Avoid driving through flooded areas

unless you are sure the water is no high-

er than the bottom of the wheel hub.

Drive through any water slowly. Allow

adequate stopping distance because

brake performance may be affected.

After driving through water, dry the

brakes by gently applying them several

times whilst the vehicle is moving slowly.

Driving off-road

Drive carefully off-road because your

vehicle may be damaged by rocks or

roots of trees. Become familiar with the

off-road conditions where you are going

to drive before you begin driving.

Dual carrigeway/Motorway driving

Tyres:

Adjust the tyre inflation pressures to

specification. Low tyre inflation pressures

will result in overheating and possible

failure of the tyres.

Avoid using worn or damaged tyres

which may result in reduced traction or

tyre failure.

✽

NOTICE

Never exceed the maximum tyre infla-

tion pressure shown on the tyres.

WARNING

• Underinflated or overinflated

tyres can cause poor handling,

loss of vehicle control, and sud-

den tyre failure leading to acci-

dents, injuries, and even death.

Always check the tyres for proper

inflation before driving. For prop-

er tyre pressures, refer to “Tyres

and wheels” in section 9.

• Driving on tyres with no or insuf-

ficient tread is dangerous. Worn-

out tyres can result in loss of

vehicle control, collisions, injury,

and even death. Worn-out tyres

should be replaced as soon as

possible and should never be

used for driving. Always check

the tyre tread before driving your

car. For further information and

tread limits, refer to “Tyres and

wheels” in section 7.

OTQ075107

Driving your vehicle

445

Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:

High speed travel consumes more fuel

than urban motoring. Do not forget to

check both engine coolant and engine

oil.

Drive belt:

A loose or damaged drive belt may result

in overheating of the engine.

Reducing the risk of a rollover

This multi-purpose passenger vehicle is

defined as a Sports Utility Vehicle (SUV).

SUV’s have higher ground clearance

and a narrower track to make them capa-

ble of performing in a wide variety of off-

road applications. Specific design char-

acteristics give them a higher centre of

gravity than ordinary cars. An advantage

of the higher ground clearance is a better

view of the road, which allows you to

anticipate problems. They are not

designed for cornering at the same

speeds as conventional passenger drive

vehicles, any more than low-slung sports

cars are designed to perform satisfactori-

ly in off-road conditions. Due to this risk,

driver and passengers are strongly rec-

ommended to buckle their seat belts. In

a rollover crash, an unbelted person is

more likely to die than a person wearing

a seat belt. There are steps that a driver

can make to reduce the risk of a rollover.

If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or

abrupt manoeuvres, do not load your

roof rack with heavy cargo, and never

modify your vehicle in any way.

WARNING -

Rollover

As with other Sports Utility Vehicle

(SUV), failure to operate this vehi-

cle correctly may result in loss of

control, an accident or vehicle

rollover.

• Utility vehicles have a significant-

ly higher rollover rate than other

types of vehicles.

• Specific design characteristics

(higher ground clearance, nar-

rower track, etc.) give this vehicle

a higher centre of gravity than

ordinary cars.

• A SUV is not designed for corner-

ing at the same speeds as con-

ventional vehicles.

• Avoid sharp turns or abrupt

manoeuvres.

• In a rollover crash, an unbelted

person is significantly more like-

ly to die than a person wearing a

seat belt. Make sure everyone in

the vehicle is properly buckled

up.

545

Driving your vehicle

The onset of winter conditions subject

motor vehicles to greater operating

demands. Therefore, the following sug-

gestions will assist in maintaining peak

performance and reliability during these

periods:

Snowy or Icy conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may

be necessary to use snow tyres or to

install tyre chains on your tyres. If snow

tyres are needed, it is necessary to

select tyres equivalent in size and type of

the original equipment tyres. Failure to do

so may adversely affect the safety and

handling of your car. Furthermore,

speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden

brake applications, and sharp turns are

potentially very hazardous practices.

During deceleration, use engine braking

to the fullest extent. Sudden brake appli-

cations on snowy or icy roads may cause

skids to occur. You need to keep suffi-

cient distance between the vehicle in

operation in front and your vehicle. Also,

apply the brake gently. It should be noted

that installing tyre chains on the tyre will

provide a greater driving force, but will

not prevent side skids.

✽

NOTICE

Tyre chains are not legal in all states.

Check state laws before fitting tyre

chains.

Snow tyres

If you mount snow tyres on your vehicle,

make sure they are radial tyres of the

same size and load range as the original

tyres. Mount snow tyres on all four

wheels to balance your vehicle’s han-

dling in all weather conditions. Keep in

mind that the traction provided by snow

tyres on dry roads may not be as high as

your vehicle's original equipment tyres.

You should drive cautiously even when

the roads are clear. Check with the tyre

dealer for maximum speed recommen-

dations.

Do not install studded tyres without first

checking local, state and municipal regu-

lations for possible restrictions against

their use.

WINTER MOTORING

WARNING - Snow tyre size

Snow tyres should be equivalent in

size and type to the vehicle's stan-

dard tyres. Otherwise, the safety

and handling of your vehicle may

be adversely affected.

OTQ065023

Driving your vehicle

465

Tyre chains

Since the sidewalls of radial tyres are

thinner, they can be damaged by mount-

ing some types of snow chains on them.

Therefore, the use of snow tyres is rec-

ommended instead of snow chains. Do

not mount tyre chains on vehicles

equipped with aluminium wheels; snow

chains may cause damage to the wheels.

If snow chains must be used, use wire-

type chains with a thickness of less than

0.59 in (15 mm). Damage to your vehicle

caused by improper snow chain use is

not covered by your vehicle manufactur-

ers warranty.

When using tyre chains, attach them to

the rear tyres.

Chain installation

When installing chains, follow the manu-

facturer's instructions and mount them as

tightly as you can. Drive slowly with

chains installed. If you hear the chains

contacting the body or chassis, stop and

tighten them. If they still make contact,

slow down until it stops. Remove the

chains as soon as you begin driving on

cleared roads.

CAUTION

• Make sure the snow chains are

the correct size and type for your

tyres. Incorrect snow chains can

cause damage to the vehicle body

and suspension and may not be

covered by your vehicle manufac-

turer warranty. Also, the snow

chain connecting hooks may be

damaged from contacting vehicle

components causing the snow

chains to come loose from the

tyre. Make sure the snow chains

are SAE class “S” certified.

• Always check chain installation

for proper mounting after driving

approximately 0.3 to 0.6 miles (0.5

to 1 km) to ensure safe mounting.

Retighten or remount the chains

if they are loose.

WARNING

- Mounting chains

When mounting snow chains, park

the vehicle on level ground away

from traffic. Turn on the vehicle

Hazard Warning flashers and place

a triangular emergency warning

device behind the vehicle if avail-

able. Always place the vehicle in P

(Park), apply the parking brake and

turn off the engine before installing

snow chains.

OTQ055011

547

Driving your vehicle

Use high quality ethylene glycol

coolant

Your vehicle is delivered with high quality

ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling

system. It is the only type of coolant that

should be used because it helps prevent

corrosion in the cooling system, lubri-

cates the water pump and prevents

freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish

your coolant in accordance with the

maintenance schedule. Before winter,

have your coolant tested to assure that

its freezing point is sufficient for the tem-

peratures anticipated during the winter.

Check battery and cables

Winter puts additional burdens on the

battery system. Visually inspect the bat-

tery and cables as described in section

7. We recommend that the system be

checked by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

Change to "winter weight" oil if

necessary

In some climates it is recommended that

a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be

used during cold weather. See section 9

for recommendations. If you aren't sure

what weight oil you should use, we rec-

ommend that you consult a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

Check spark plugs and ignition

system

Inspect your spark plugs and replace

them if necessary. Also check all ignition

wiring and components to be sure they

are not cracked, worn or damaged in any

way.

WARNING

- Tyre chains

• The use of chains may adversely

affect vehicle handling.

• Do not exceed 20 mph (30 km/h)

or the chain manufacturer’s rec-

ommended speed limit, whichev-

er is lower.

• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,

holes, sharp turns, and other

road hazards, which may cause

the vehicle to bounce.

• Avoid sharp turns or locked-

wheel braking.

CAUTION

• Chains that are the wrong size or

improperly installed can damage

your vehicle's brake lines, sus-

pension, body and wheels.

• Stop driving and retighten the

chains any time you hear them

hitting the vehicle.

Driving your vehicle

485

To keep locks from freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an

approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into

the key opening. If a lock is covered with

ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing

fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is

frozen internally, you may be able to thaw

it out by using a heated key. Handle the

heated key with care to avoid injury.

Use approved window washer

anti-freeze in system

To keep the water in the window washer

system from freezing, add an approved

window washer anti-freeze solution in

accordance with instructions on the con-

tainer. Window washer anti-freeze is

available from a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer and most auto parts outlets. Do

not use engine coolant or other types of

anti-freeze as these may damage the

paint finish.

Don't let your parking brake

freeze

Under some conditions your parking

brake can freeze in the engaged position.

This is most likely to happen when there

is an accumulation of snow or ice around

or near the rear brakes or if the brakes

are wet. If there is a risk the parking

brake may freeze, apply it only temporar-

ily whilst you put the gear selector lever

in P (automatic transmission) or in first or

reverse gear (manual transmission) and

block the rear wheels so the car cannot

roll. Then release the parking brake.

Do not park a car on a public road with-

out the parking brake applied.

Don't let ice and snow accumu-

late underneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice

can build up under the fenders and inter-

fere with the steering. When driving in

severe winter conditions where this may

happen, you should periodically check

underneath the car to be sure the move-

ment of the front wheels and the steering

components is not obstructed.

Carry emergency equipment

Depending on the severity of the weath-

er where you drive your car, you should

carry appropriate emergency equipment.

Some of the items you may want to carry

include tyre chains, tow straps or chains,

flashlight, emergency flares, sand, a

shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper,

gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket,

etc.

549

Driving your vehicle

If you are considering towing with your

car, you should first check with your

Local Laws to determine their legal

requirements.

Since laws vary from country to country,

the requirements for towing trailers, cars,

or other types of vehicles or apparatus

may differ. We recommend that you ask a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

✽

NOTICE -

For Europe

• The technically permissible maximum

load on the rear axle(s) may be

exceeded by not more than 15 % and

the technically permissible maximum

laden mass of the vehicle may be

exceeded by not more than 10 % or

100 kg (220.4 lbs), whichever value is

lower. In this case, do not exceed 100

km/h (62.1 mph) for vehicle of catego-

ry M1 or 80 km/h (49.7 mph) for vehi-

cle of category N1.

• When towing a trailer, the additional

load imposed at the trailer coupling

device may cause the rear tyre maxi-

mum load ratings to be exceeded, but

not by more than 15%. In such a case,

do not exceed 100 Km/h, and the rear

tyre pressure should be at least 20

kPa(0.2 bar) above the tyre pres-

sure(s) as recommended for normal

use (i.e. without a trailer attached).

Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify

what the vehicle trailering capacity is for

your vehicle, you should read the infor-

mation in “Weight of the trailer” that

appears later in this section.

Remember that trailering is different than

just driving your vehicle by itself.

Trailering means changes in handling,

durability, and fuel economy. Successful,

safe trailering requires correct equip-

ment, and it has to be used properly.

This section contains many time-tested,

important trailering tips and safety rules.

Many of these are important for your

safety and that of your passengers.

Please read this section carefully before

you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the

engine, transmission, wheel assemblies,

and tyres are forced to work harder

against the load of the added weight. The

engine is required to operate at relatively

higher speeds and under greater loads.

This additional burden generates extra

heat. The trailer also adds considerably

to wind resistance, increasing the pulling

requirements.

TRAILER TOWING

CAUTION

Pulling a trailer improperly can

damage your vehicle and result in

costly repairs not covered by your

warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,

follow the advice in this section.

WARNING - Towing a trail-

If you don't use the correct equip-

ment and drive improperly, you can

lose control when you pull a trailer.

For example, if the trailer is too

heavy, the brakes may not work

well - or even at all. You and your

passengers could be seriously or

fatally injured. Pull a trailer only if

you have followed all the steps in

this section.

WARNING - Weight limits

Before towing, make sure the total

trailer weight, gross combination

weight, gross vehicle weight, gross

axle weight and trailer nose weight

are all within the limits.

Driving your vehicle

505

Towbars

It's important to have the correct towbar

equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks

going by, and rough roads are a few rea-

sons why you’ll need the right towbar.

Here are some rules to follow:

• Will you have to make any holes in the

body of your vehicle when you install a

trailer towbar? If you do, then be sure

to seal the holes later when you

remove the towbar.

If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon

monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can

get into your vehicle, as well as dirt and

water.

• The bumpers on your vehicle are not

intended for towbars. Do not attach

rental towbars or other bumper-type

towbars to them. Use only a frame-

mounted towbar that does not attach to

the bumper.

Safety cables

You should always attach cables

between your vehicle and your trailer.

Cross the safety cables under the nose

of the trailer so that the nose will not drop

to the road if it becomes separated from

the towbar.

Instructions about safety cables may be

provided by the towbar manufacturer or

by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the

manufacturer’s recommendation for

attaching safety cables. Always leave just

enough slack so you can turn with your

trailer. And, never allow safety cables to

drag on the ground.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking

system, make sure it conforms to local

regulations and that it is properly

installed and operating correctly.

If your trailer weighs more than the max-

imum trailer weight without trailer brakes

loaded, then it needs its own brakes and

they must be adequate. Be sure to read

and follow the instructions for the trailer

brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust

and maintain them properly.

• Don’t tap into your vehicle's brake sys-

tem.

WARNING - Trailer brakes

Do not use a trailer with its own

brakes unless you are absolutely

certain that you have properly set

up the brake system. This is not a

task for amateurs. Use an experi-

enced, competent trailer shop for

this work.

551

Driving your vehicle

Driving with a trailer

Towing a trailer requires a certain

amount of experience. Before setting out

for the open road, you must get to know

your trailer. Acquaint yourself with the

feel of handling and braking with the

added weight of the trailer. And always

keep in mind that the vehicle you are

driving is now a good deal longer and not

nearly so responsive as your vehicle is

by itself.

Before you start, check the trailer towbar

and platform, safety cables, electrical

connector(s), lights, tyres and mirror

adjustment. If the trailer has electric

brakes, start your vehicle and trailer mov-

ing and then apply the trailer brake con-

troller by hand to be sure the brakes are

working. This lets you check your electri-

cal connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be

sure that the load is secure, and that the

lights and any trailer brakes are still work-

ing.

Following distance

Stay at least twice as far behind the vehi-

cle ahead as you would when driving

your vehicle without a trailer. This can

help you avoid situations that require

heavy braking and sudden turns.

Passing

You’ll need more passing distance up

ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And,

because of the increased vehicle length,

you’ll need to go much farther beyond the

passed vehicle before you can return to

your lane.

Reversing

Hold the bottom of the steering wheel

with one hand. Then, to move the trailer

to the left, just move your hand to the left.

To move the trailer to the right, move your

hand to the right. Always reverse slowly

and, if possible, have someone guide

you.

Making turns

When you’re turning with a trailer, make

wider turns than normal. Do this so your

trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, kerbs,

road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid

jerky or sudden manoeuvres. Signal well

in advance.

Driving your vehicle

525

Turn signals when towing a trailer

When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has

to have a different turn signal flasher and

extra wiring. The green arrows on your

instrument panel will flash whenever you

signal a turn or lane change. Properly

connected, the trailer lights will also flash

to alert other drivers you’re about to turn,

change lanes, or stop.

When towing a trailer, the green arrows

on your instrument panel will flash for

turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are

burned out. Thus, you may think drivers

behind you are seeing your signals

when, in fact, they are not. It’s important

to check occasionally to be sure the trail-

er bulbs are still working. You must also

check the lights every time you discon-

nect and then reconnect the wires.

Do not connect a trailer lighting system

directly to your vehicle’s lighting system.

Use only an approved trailer wiring har-

ness.

A HYUNDAI authorised repairer can

assist you in installing the wiring har-

ness.

Driving on grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear

before you start down a long or steep

downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you

might have to use your brakes so much

that they would get hot and no longer

operate efficiently.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and

reduce your speed to around 70 km/h (45

mph) to reduce the possibility of engine

and transmission overheating.

If your trailer weighs more than the max-

imum trailer weight without trailer brakes

and you have an automatic transmission,

you should drive in D (Drive) when tow-

ing a trailer.

Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) when

towing a trailer will minimise heat build up

and extend the life of your transmission.

WARNING

Failure to use an approved trailer

wiring harness could result in dam-

age to the vehicle electrical system

and/or personal injury.

553

Driving your vehicle

Parking on hills

Generally, if you have a trailer attached to

your vehicle, you should not park your

vehicle on a hill. People can be seriously

or fatally injured, and both your vehicle

and the trailer can be damaged if unex-

pectedly roll down hill.

WARNING - Parking on a

hill

Parking your vehicle on a hill with a

trailer attached could cause seri-

ous injury or death, should the trail-

er break loose.

CAUTION

• When towing a trailer on steep

grades (in excess of 6%) pay

close attention to the engine

coolant temperature gauge to

ensure the engine does not over-

heat.

If the needle of the coolant tem-

perature gauge moves across the

dial towards “H” (HOT), pull over

and stop as soon as it is safe to

do so, and allow the engine to idle

until it cools down. You may pro-

ceed once the engine has cooled

sufficiently.

• You must decide driving speed

depending on trailer weight and

uphill grade to reduce the possi-

bility of engine and transmission

overheating.

CAUTION

Going uphill under hot ambient

temperature (above 35°C) with GVW

and/or trailer, a minimal fuel tank

level of 5 litre has to be assured in

order to prevent power limitation

due to fuel overheating as well as

further damages in the fuel injec-

tion equipment.

Driving your vehicle

545

However, if you ever have to park your

trailer on a hill, here's how to do it:

1. Pull the vehicle into the parking space.

Turn the steering wheel in the direction

of the kerb (right if headed down hill,

left if headed up hill).

2. If the vehicle has a manual transmis-

sion, place the car in neutral. If the

vehicle has an automatic transmission,

place the car in P (Park).

3. Set the parking brake and shut off the

vehicle.

4. Place chocks under the trailer wheels

on the down hill side of the wheels.

5. Start the vehicle, hold the brakes, shift

to neutral, release the parking brake

and slowly release the brakes until the

trailer chocks absorb the load.

6. Reapply the brakes, reapply the park-

ing brake and shift the vehicle to R

(Reverse) for manual transmission or

P (Park) automatic transmission.

7. Shut off the vehicle and release the

vehicle brakes but leave the parking

brake set.

When you are ready to leave after park-

ing on a hill

1. With the manual transmission in

Neutral or automatic transmission in P

(Park), apply your brakes and hold the

brake pedal down whilst you:

• Start your engine;

• Shift into gear; and

• Release the parking brake.

2. Slowly remove your foot from the

brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of

the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and

store the chocks.

WARNING

- Parking brake

It can be dangerous to get out of

your vehicle if the parking brake is

not firmly set.

If you have left the engine running,

the vehicle can move suddenly. You

or others could be seriously or

fatally injured.

555

Driving your vehicle

Maintenance when trailer towing

Your vehicle will need service more often

when you regularly pull a trailer.

Important items to pay particular atten-

tion to include engine oil, automatic

transmission fluid, axle lubricant and

cooling system fluid. Brake condition is

another important item to frequently

check. Each item is covered in this man-

ual, and the Index will help you find them

quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea

to review these sections before you start

your trip.

Don’t forget to also maintain your trailer

and towbar. Follow the maintenance

schedule that accompanied your trailer

and check it periodically. Preferably, con-

duct the check at the start of each day’s

driving. Most importantly, all towbar nuts

and bolts should be tight.

CAUTION

• Due to higher load during trailer

usage, overheating might occur

in hot days or during uphill driv-

ing. If the coolant gauge indicates

over-heating, switch off the A/C

and stop the vehicle in a safe area

to cool down the engine.

• When towing check transmission

fluid more frequently.

• If your vehicle is not equipped

with the air conditioner, you

should install a condenser fan to

improve engine performance

when towing a trailer.

Driving your vehicle

565

If you do decide to pull a trailer

Here are some important points if you

decide to pull a trailer:

• Consider using a sway control. You can

ask a towbar dealer about sway con-

trol.

• Do not do any towing with your car dur-

ing its first 1,000 miles in order to allow

the engine to properly run-in. Failure to

heed this caution may result in serious

engine or transmission damage.

• When towing a trailer, we recommend

that you consult a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer on additional require-

ments such as a towing kit, etc.

• Always drive your vehicle at a moder-

ate speed (less than 60 mph (100

km/h)).

• On a long uphill grade, do not exceed

45 mph (70 km/h) or the posted towing

speed limit, whichever is lower.

• The chart contains important consider-

ations that have to do with weight:

Engine

Item

Maximum

Without brake

1653 1543 1653

trailer System (750) (700) (750)

weight With brake 5070 3306 3306

Ibs. (kg) System (2300) (1500) (1500)

Maximum permissible

static vertical load on 220 220 220

the coupling device (100) (100) (100)

Ibs. (kg)

Recommended distance

from rear wheel centre 46 46 46

to coupling point (1170) (1170) (1170)

Inch (mm)

A2 2.5

Diesel Engine

Petrol Engine

Manual

transmission

Manual

transmission

Automatic

transmission

557

Driving your vehicle

Weight of the trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be? It

should never weigh more than the maxi-

mum trailer weight with trailer brakes. But

even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your

trailer. For example, speed, altitude, road

grades, outside temperature and how

often your vehicle is used to pull a trailer

are all important. The ideal trailer weight

can also depend on any special equip-

ment that you have on your vehicle.

Weight of the trailer nose

The nose weight of any trailer is an

important weight to measure because it

affects the total gross vehicle weight

(GVW) of your vehicle. This weight

includes the kerb weight of the vehicle,

any cargo you may carry in it, and the

people who will be riding in the vehicle.

And if you will tow a trailer, you must add

the nose weight to the GVW because

your vehicle will also be carrying that

weight.

The trailer nose should weigh a maxi-

mum of 10% of the total loaded trailer

weight, within the limits of the maximum

trailer nose weight permissible. After

you've loaded your trailer, weigh the trail-

er and then the nose, separately, to see

if the weights are proper. If they aren’t,

you may be able to correct them simply

by moving some items around in the trail-

er.

WARNING - Trailer

• Never load a trailer with more

weight in the rear than in the

front. The front should be loaded

with approximately 60% of the

total trailer load; the rear should

be loaded with approximately

40% of the total trailer load.

• Never exceed the maximum

weight limits of the trailer or trail-

er towing equipment. Improper

loading can result in damage to

your vehicle and/or personal

injury. Check weights and loading

at a commercial scale or motor-

way patrol office equipped with

scales.

• An improperly loaded trailer can

cause loss of vehicle control.

C190E02JM

Gross Axle Weight

Gross Vehicle Weight

C190E01JM

Nose Weight Total Trailer Weight

This section will guide you in the proper

loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to

keep your loaded vehicle weight within its

design rating capability, with or without a

trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will

provide maximum return of the vehicle

design performance. Before loading your

vehicle, familiarize yourself with the fol-

lowing terms for determining your vehi-

cle's weight ratings, with or without a

trailer, from the vehicle's specifications

and the compliance label:

Vehicle kerb weight

This is the weight of the vehicle including

fuel, driver and all standard equipment.

Payload

This is the weight of passengers, lug-

gage and any optional equipment

installed.

GAW (Gross axle weight)

This is the total weight placed on each

axle (front and rear) - including vehicle

kerb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight

that can be carried by a single axle (front

or rear). These numbers are shown on

the compliance label.

The total load on each axle must never

exceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)

This is the maximum allowed weight of

the vehicle, contents, passengers and

optional equipment.

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight of

the fully loaded vehicle (including all

options, equipment, passengers and

cargo). The GVWR is shown on the cer-

tification label located on the driver's (or

front passenger's) door sill.

Overloading

VEHICLE WEIGHT

WARNING - Vehicle weight

The gross axle weight rating

(GAWR) and the gross vehicle

weight rating (GVWR) for your vehi-

cle are on the certification label

attached to the driver's (or front

passenger’s) door. Exceeding

these ratings can cause an acci-

dent or vehicle damage. You can

calculate the weight of your load by

weighing the items (and people)

before putting them in the vehicle.

Be careful not to overload your

vehicle.

558

Driving your vehicle

Road warning / 6-2

In case of an emergency whilst driving / 6-3

If the engine will not start / 6-4

Emergency starting / 6-5

If the engine overheats / 6-7

Tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS) / 6-8

If you have a flat tyre / 6-12

Towing / 6-22

What to do in an emergency

ROAD WARNING

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher serves as a

warning to other drivers to exercise

extreme caution when approaching,

overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emergency

repairs are being made or when the vehi-

cle is stopped near the edge of a road-

way.

Depress the flasher switch with the igni-

tion switch in any position. The flasher

switch is located in the centre console

switch panel. All turn signal lights will

flash simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher operates

whether your vehicle is running or not.

• The turn signals do not work when the

hazard flasher is on.

• Care must be taken when using the

hazard warning flasher whilst the vehi-

cle is being towed.

OTQ045267R

What to do in an emergency

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILST DRIVING

If the engine stalls at a crossroad

or crossing

• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or

crossing, set the shift lever in the N

(Neutral) position and then push the

vehicle to a safe place.

• If your vehicle has a manual transmis-

sion not equipped with a ignition lock

switch, the vehicle can move forward

by shifting to the 2(second) or 3(third)

gear and then turning the starter with-

out depressing the clutch pedal.

If a puncture occurs whilst driv-

ing the vehicle

1. Bring the car to rest as soon as it is

safe to do so and with the minimum

amount of braking required which will

assist in maintaining the maximum

amount of control. The vehicle should

be parked wherever possible upon firm

level ground to facilitate wheel chang-

ing.

2. If the vehicle is creating a hazard and

the road conditions do not permit the

wheel to be changed safely, assis-

tance should be sought.

3. Passengers must not be allowed to

remain inside the vehicle during wheel

changing. If a puncture occurs whilst

the vehicle is on a motorway, the pas-

sengers should take refuge on the

motorway embankment to avoid the

possibility of injury occurring should

the vehicle be struck by other motor-

way traffic.

4. Wheel changing should be performed

according to the following instructions.

If engine stalls whilst driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping

a straight line. Move cautiously off the

road to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Try to start the engine again. If your

vehicle will not start, we recommend

that you consult a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

What to do in an emergency

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

If engine cannot be cranked

1. If your car has an automatic transmis-

sion, be sure the gear selector lever is

in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and the

emergency brake is set.

2. Check the battery terminals and con-

nections to ensure that these are clean

and also tight.

3. If the ignition warning lights dim when

the engine is cranked and the battery

terminals have been checked, a dis-

charged battery is indicated.

4. Do not attempt to push or tow start the

vehicle, refer to "Jump Starting" for

information regarding engine starting

when the battery is discharged.

If engine turns over normally but

does not start

1. Check fuel level.

2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK

position, check all connectors at the

ignition coils and spark plugs.

Reconnect any that may be discon-

nected or loose.

3. Check the fuel line in the engine com-

partment.

4. If the engine still does not start, we

recommend that you call a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

WARNING

If the engine refuses to start, no

attempt should be made to push or

tow start the vehicle. Vehicles with

automatic transmission or fuel

injection will not be able to be start-

ed in this manner since no drive is

transmitted through the automatic

transmission whilst the engine is

not running, and in the case of fuel

injected derivatives, the fuel pump

will not operate under tow start

conditions. In addition, if the vehi-

cle is equipped with an exhaust cat-

alyst, damage to the catalyst may

result if the vehicle is tow started.

What to do in an emergency

EMERGENCY STARTING

Connect cables in numerical order and

disconnect in reverse order.

Jump starting

Jump starting can be dangerous if done

incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to

yourself or damage to your vehicle or

battery, follow the jump starting proce-

dures. If in doubt, we strongly recom-

mend that you have a competent techni-

cian or towing service jump start your

vehicle.

CAUTION

Use only a 12-volt jumper system.

You can damage a 12-volt starting

motor, ignition system, and other

electrical parts beyond repair by

use of a 24-volt power supply (either

two 12-volt batteries in series or a

24-volt motor generator set).

WARNING

- Battery

• Keep all flames or sparks away

from the battery. The battery pro-

duces hydrogen gas which may

explode if exposed to flame or

sparks.

If these instructions are not fol-

lowed exactly, serious personal

injury and damage to the vehicle

may occur! If you are not sure

how to follow this procedure,

seek qualified assistance.

Automobile batteries contain sul-

furic acid. This is poisonous and

highly corrosive. When jump

starting, wear protective glasses

and be careful not to get acid on

yourself, your clothing or on the

car.

• Do not attempt to jump start the

vehicle if the discharged battery

is frozen or if the electrolyte level

is low; the battery may rupture or

explode.

• Do not allow the (+) and (-)

jumper cables to touch. It may

cause sparks.

• The battery may rupture or

explode when you jump start with

a low or frozen battery.

WARNING - Battery

Never attempt to check the elec-

trolyte level of the battery as this

may cause the battery to rupture or

explode causing serious injury.

1VQA4001

Discharged

battery

Jumper Cables

Booster

battery

(-)

(+)

(-)

What to do in an emergency

Jump starting procedure

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-

volt and that its negative terminal is

grounded.

2. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to

touch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical

loads.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact

sequence shown in the illustration.

First connect one end of a jumper

cable to the positive terminal of the

discharged battery (1), then connect

the other end to the positive terminal

on the booster battery (2).

Proceed to connect one end of the

other jumper cable to the negative ter-

minal of the booster battery (3), then

the other end to a solid, stationary,

metallic point (for example, the engine

lifting bracket) away from the battery

(4). Do not connect it to or near any

part that moves when the engine is

cranked.

Do not allow the jumper cables to con-

tact anything except the correct battery

terminals or the correct ground. Do not

lean over the battery when making

connections.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the

booster battery and let it run at 2,000

rpm, then start the engine of the vehi-

cle with the discharged battery.

If the cause of your battery discharging is

not apparent, we recommend that the

system be checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

Push-starting

Your manual transmission-equipped

vehicle should not be push-started

because it might damage the emission

control system.

Vehicles equipped with automatic trans-

mission cannot be push-started.

Follow the directions in this section for

jump-starting.

CAUTION - Battery cables

Do not connect the jumper cable

from the negative terminal of the

booster battery to the negative ter-

minal of the discharged battery.

This can cause the discharged bat-

tery to overheat and crack, releas-

ing battery acid.

WARNING

Never tow a vehicle to start it

because the sudden surge forward

when the engine starts could cause

a collision with the tow vehicle.

What to do in an emergency

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

If your temperature gauge indicates over-

heating, you experience a loss of power,

or hear loud pinging or knocking, the

engine is probably too hot. If this hap-

pens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it

is safe to do so.

2. Place the gear selector lever in P

(automatic transmission) or neutral

(manual transmission) and set the

parking brake. If the air conditioning is

on, turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running out under

the car or steam is coming out from

the bonnet, stop the engine. Do not

open the bonnet until the coolant has

stopped running or the steaming has

stopped. If there is no visible loss of

engine coolant and no steam, leave

the engine running and check to be

sure the engine cooling fan is operat-

ing. If the fan is not running, turn the

engine off.

4. Check to see if the water pump drive

belt is missing. If it is not missing,

check to see that it is tight. If the drive

belt seems to be satisfactory, check

for coolant leaking from the radiator,

hoses or under the car. (If the air con-

ditioning had been in use, it is normal

for cold water to be draining from it

when you stop).

5. If the water pump drive belt is broken

or engine coolant is leaking out, stop

the engine immediately and we recom-

mend that you call a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

6. If the cause of the overheating cannot

be found, wait until the engine temper-

ature has returned to normal. Then, if

coolant has been lost, carefully add

coolant to the reservoir to bring the

fluid level in the reservoir up to the

base of the radiator fill opening. Fill the

coolant expansion tank to the halfway

mark. To ensure the correct water to

coolant mix is obtained after top up,

testing by an authorised repairer is

required.

7. Proceed with caution until it is estab-

lished that the engine is operating nor-

mally. If overheating happens again,

we recommend that you call a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CAUTION

• Serious loss of coolant indicates

there is a leak in the cooling sys-

tem and we recommend that the

system be checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

• When the engine overheats from

low engine coolant, suddenly

adding engine coolant may cause

cracks in the engine. To prevent

damage, add engine coolant

slowly in small quantities.

WARNING

Whilst the engine is running, keep

hair, hands and clothing away from

moving parts such as the fan and

drive belts to prevent injury.

WARNING

Do not remove the radiator cap

when the engine is hot since steam

and boiling water may be ejected

from the radiator resulting in burns

or scalding.

What to do in an emergency

TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)

Low Tyre Pressure Telltale/

TPMS Malfunction Indicator

Each tyre, including the spare (if pro-

vided), should be checked monthly

when cold and inflated to the inflation

pressure recommended by the vehi-

cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-

ard or tyre inflation pressure label. (If

your vehicle has tyres of a different

size than the size indicated on the

vehicle placard or tyre inflation pres-

sure label, you should determine the

proper tyre inflation pressure for

those tyres.)

As an added safety feature, your

vehicle has been equipped with a

tyre pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tyre

pressure telltale when one or more

of your tyres is significantly under-

inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tyre pres-

sure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tyres as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the

proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-

cantly under-inflated tyre causes the

tyre to overheat and can lead to tyre

failure. Under-inflation also reduces

fuel efficiency and tyre tread life, and

may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tyre mainte-

nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-

bility to maintain correct tyre pres-

sure, even if under-inflation has not

reached the level to trigger illumina-

tion of the TPMS low tyre pressure

telltale.

WARNING

Over-inflation or under-inflation

can reduce tyre life, adversely

affect vehicle handling, and

lead to sudden tyre failure that

may cause loss of vehicle con-

trol resulting in an accident.

OTQ064023R

OTQ045306

What to do in an emergency

Your vehicle has also been equipped

with a TPMS malfunction indicator to

indicate when the system is not

operating properly. The TPMS mal-

function indicator is combined with

the low tyre pressure telltale. When

the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximate-

ly one minute and then remain con-

tinuously illuminated. This sequence

will continue upon subsequent vehi-

cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-

tion exists. When the malfunction

indicator is illuminated, the system

may not be able to detect or signal

low tyre pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a

variety of reasons, including the

installation of replacement or alter-

nate tyres or wheels on the vehicle

that prevent the TPMS from function-

ing properly. Always check the TPMS

malfunction telltale after replacing

one or more tyres or wheels on your

vehicle to ensure that the replace-

ment or alternate tyres and wheels

allow the TPMS to continue to func-

tion properly.

✽

NOTICE

If the TPMS Low Tyre Pressure

Telltale does not illuminate for three

seconds when the ignition switch is

in the ON position or when the

engine starts, or if it remains illumi-

nated after coming on for approxi-

mately three seconds, we recom-

mend that you contact a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

Low Tyre Pressure

Telltale

The TPMS is not a substitute for

manually checking tyre pressure with

a tyre pressure gauge. Changes in

temperature affect tyre pressure.

See “Tyres and Wheels” in chapter 9

for proper tyre inflating and tyre pres-

sure measurement procedures.

If the telltale illuminates, immediately

reduce your speed, avoid hard cor-

nering and anticipate increased stop-

ping distances. You should stop and

check your tyres as soon as possi-

ble. Inflate the tyres to the proper

pressure as indicated on the vehi-

cle’s placard or tyre inflation pres-

sure label located on the driver’s side

door jamb. If you cannot reach a

service station or if the tyre cannot

hold the newly added air, replace the

low pressure tyre with the spare tyre.

What to do in an emergency

106

The Low Tyre Pressure Telltale will

remain on and the TPMS Malfunction

Indicator may blink for one minute

and then remain illuminated (when

the vehicle is driven approximately

10 minutes at speed above 25 km/h

(15.5 mph)) until you have the low

pressure tyre repaired and replaced

on the vehicle.

✽

NOTICE

The spare tyre is not equipped with

a tyre pressure sensor.

TPMS Malfunction

Indicator

The TPMS Malfunction Indicator

comes on after it blinks for approxi-

mately one minute when there is a

problem with the Tyre Pressure

Monitoring System.

We recommend that the system be

checked by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

✽

NOTICE

The TPMS Malfunction Indicator

may illuminate after blinking for one

minute if the vehicle is near electric

power supply cables or radio trans-

mitters such as police stations, gov-

ernment and public offices, broad-

casting stations, military installations,

airports, transmitting towers, etc.

Additionally, the TPMS Malfunction

Indicator may illuminate if snow

chains are used or electronic devices

such as computers, chargers, remote

starters, navigation, etc. This may

interfere with normal operation of

the TPMS.

(Continued)

When you drive your vehicle

from a warm area to a cold area

or from a cold area to a warm

area, or the outside temperature

is greatly higher or lower, you

should check the tyre inflation

pressure and adjust the tyres to

the recommended tyre inflation

pressure.

CAUTION

In winter or cold weather, the

Low Tyre Pressure Telltale may

be illuminated if the tyre pres-

sure was adjusted to the recom-

mended tyre inflation pressure

in warm weather. It does not

mean your TPMS is malfunction-

ing because the decreased tem-

perature leads to a proportional

lowering of tyre pressure.

(Continued)

WARNING

• Significantly low tyre pres-

sure makes the vehicle unsta-

ble and can contribute to loss

of vehicle control and

increased braking distances.

• Continued driving on low

pressure tyres can cause the

tyres to overheat and fail.

611

What to do in an emergency

Changing a Tyre with TPMS

If you have a flat tyre, the Low Tyre

Pressure Telltale will illuminate. If you

believe you have a flat tyre or feel

any vehicle instability, take your foot

off the accelerator pedal and let the

vehicle slow down whilst driving

straight ahead. Do not apply the

brakes immediately or attempt to pull

off the road as this may cause a loss

of control resulting in an accident.

When the vehicle has slowed to such

a speed that it is safe to do so, brake

carefully and pull off the road. Drive

off the road as far as possible and

park on firm, level ground. If you are

on a divided highway, do not park in

the median area between the two

traffic lanes. Replace the flat tyre

with the compact spare tyre.

The spare tyre is not equipped with a

tyre pressure monitoring sensor.

When the low pressure tyre or the flat

tyre is replaced with the spare tyre,

the Low Tyre Pressure Telltale will

remain on. Also, the TPMS

Malfunction Indicator will illuminate

after blinking for one minute if the

vehicle is driven at speed above 25

km/h (15.5 mph) for approximately 10

minutes.

Once the original tyre equipped with

a tyre pressure monitoring sensor is

reinflated to the recommended pres-

sure and reinstalled on the vehicle,

the Low Tyre Pressure Telltale and

TPMS Malfunction Indicator will go

off within a few minutes.

If the indicator is not extinguished

after a few minutes of driving, We rec-

ommend that the system be checked

by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Each wheel is equipped with a tyre

pressure sensor mounted inside the

tyre behind the valve stem (except for

the spare tyre). You must use TPMS

specific wheels. It is recommended

that you always have your tyres serv-

iced by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer as soon as possible.

CAUTION

To prevent damaging your tyre

pressure sensor, never use a

puncture-repairing agents or

tyre sealants to repair and/or

inflate a low pressure tyre. If

used, you will have to replace

the tyre pressure sensor.

WARNING

- For EUROPE

• Do not modify the vehicle, it

may interfere with the TPMS

function.

• The wheels on the market do

not have a TPMS sensor.

For your safety, we recom-

mend that you use parts for

replacement from a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

• If you use the wheels on the

market, use a TPMS sensor

approved by a HYUNDAI dealer.

If your vehicle is not equipped

with a TPMS sensor or TPMS

does not work properly, you

may fail the periodic vehicle

inspection conducted in your

country.

❈

All vehicles sold in the

EUROPE market during below

period must be equipped with

TPMS.

- New model vehicle :

Nov. 1, 2012 ~

- Current model vehicle :

Nov. 1, 2014~ (Based on vehi-

cle registrations)

What to do in an emergency

126

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TYRE

Jack and tools

The jack and wheel lug nut wrench

(jack handle) are stored in the stor-

age compartment under the driver’s

seat. Open the storage box cover to

reach the equipment.

(1) Jack

(2) Wheel lug nut wrench

(Jack handle)

Jacking instructions

The jack is provided for emergency

tyre changing only.

To prevent the jack from “rattling”

whilst the vehicle is in motion, store it

properly.

Follow jacking instructions to reduce

the possibility of personal injury.

WARNING

- Changing

tyres

• Never attempt vehicle repairs

in the traffic lanes of a public

road or highway.

• Always move the vehicle com-

pletely off the road and onto

the shoulder before trying to

change a tyre. The jack should

be used on level firm ground.

If you cannot find a firm, level

place off the road, call a tow-

ing service company for

assistance.

(Continued)

OTQ067003 OTQ067017

613

What to do in an emergency

Removing and storing the spare

tyre

Your spare tyre is stored underneath

your vehicle, directly below the cargo

area.

To remove the spare tyre:

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Find the plastic hex bolt cover and

remove the cover.

3. Use the wheel lug nut wrench to

loosen the bolt enough to lower

the spare tyre.

Turn the wrench counterclockwise

until the spare tyre reaches the

ground.

OTQ067004

(Continued)

• Be sure to use the correct

front and rear jacking posi-

tions on the vehicle; never

use the bumpers or any other

part of the vehicle for jacking

support.

• The vehicle can easily roll off

the jack causing serious

injury or death.

• Do not get under a vehicle

that is supported by a jack.

• Do not start or run the engine

whilst the vehicle is on the

jack.

• Do not allow anyone to remain

in the vehicle whilst it is on

the jack.

• Make sure any children pres-

ent are in a secure place away

from the road and from the

vehicle to be raised with the

jack.

OTQ065005

What to do in an emergency

146

4. After the spare tyre reaches the

ground, continue to turn the

wrench counterclockwise, and

draw the spare tyre outside. Never

rotate the wrench excessively, oth-

erwise the spare tyre carrier may

be damaged.

5. Remove the retainer (1) from the

centre of the spare tyre.

To store the spare tyre:

1. Lay the tyre on the ground with the

valve stem facing up.

2. Place the wheel under the vehicle

and install the retainer (1) through

the wheel centre.

3. Turn the wrench clockwise until it

clicks.

WARNING

Ensure the spare tyre retainer is

properly aligned with the centre

of the spare tyre to prevent the

spare tyre “rattling”. Otherwise,

it may cause the spare tyre to

fall off the carrier and lead to an

accident.

OTQ065006 OTQ065007

615

What to do in an emergency

Changing tyres

1. Park on a level surface and apply

the parking brake firmly.

2. Shift the shift lever into R

(Reverse) with manual transmis-

sion or P (Park) with automatic

transmission.

3. Activate the hazard warning flash-

er.

4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,

jack and spare tyre from the vehi-

cle.

5. Block both the front and rear of the

wheel that is diagonally opposite

the jack position.

OTQ047006K/H

WARNING

Changing a tyre

• To prevent vehicle movement

whilst changing a tyre, always

set the parking brake fully,

and always block the wheel

diagonally opposite the wheel

being changed.

• We recommend that the

wheels of the vehicle be

blocked, and that no person

remain in a vehicle that is

being jacked.

OTQ065022

What to do in an emergency

166

6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-

terclockwise one turn each, but do

not remove any nut until the tyre

has been raised off the ground.

7. Place the jack at the front or rear

jacking position closest to the tyre

you are changing. Place the jack

at the designated locations under

the frame. The jacking positions

are plates welded to the frame

with two tabs and a raised dot to

index with the jack.

OTQ065008

WARNING

- Jack location

To reduce the possibility of

injury, be sure to use only the

jack provided with the vehicle

and in the correct jack position;

never use any other part of the

vehicle for jack support.

OTQ065018

617

What to do in an emergency

8. Insert the jack handle into the jack

and turn it clockwise, raising the

vehicle until the tyre just clears the

ground. This measurement is

approximately 1.2 in (30 mm).

Before removing the wheel lug

nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-

ble and that there is no chance for

movement or slippage.

9. Loosen the wheel nuts and

remove them with your fingers.

Slide the wheel off the studs and

lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To

put the wheel on the hub, pick up

the spare tyre, line up the holes

with the studs and slide the wheel

onto them. If this is difficult, tip the

wheel slightly and get the top hole

in the wheel lined up with the top

stud. Then jiggle the wheel back

and forth until the wheel can be

slid over the other studs.

OTQ065016

WARNING

Wheels may have sharp edges.

Handle them carefully to avoid

possible severe injury. Before

putting the wheel into place, be

sure that there is nothing on the

hub or wheel (such as mud, tar,

gravel, etc.) that interferes with

the wheel from fitting solidly

against the hub.

If there is, remove it. If there is

not good contact on the mount-

ing surface between the wheel

and hub, the wheel nuts could

come loose and cause the loss

of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may

result in loss of control of the

vehicle. This may cause serious

injury or death.

What to do in an emergency

186

10. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on

the studs, put the wheel nuts on

the studs and tighten them finger

tight. The nuts should be installed

with their tapered small diameter

ends directed inward. Jiggle the

tyre to be sure it is completely

seated, then tighten the nuts as

much as possible with your fin-

gers again.

11. Lower the car to the ground by

turning the wheel nut wrench

counterclockwise.

Then position the wrench as shown

in the drawing and tighten the wheel

nuts. Be sure the socket is seated

completely over the nut. Do not stand

on the wrench handle or use an

extension pipe over the wrench han-

dle. Go around the wheel tightening

every other nut until they are all tight.

Then double-check each nut for

tightness. After changing wheels, we

recommend that the system be

checked by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

65~79 lb·ft (9~11 kg·m)

If you have a tyre gauge, remove the

valve cap and check the air pressure.

If the pressure is lower than recom-

mended, drive slowly to the nearest

service station and inflate to the cor-

rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust

it until it is correct. Always reinstall

the valve cap after checking or

adjusting tyre pressure. If the cap is

not replaced, air may leak from the

tyre. If you lose a valve cap, buy

another and install it as soon as pos-

sible.

After you have changed wheels,

always secure the flat tyre in its place

and return the jack and tools to their

proper storage locations.

OTQ065011

619

What to do in an emergency

To prevent the jack, wheel lug nut

wrench and spare tyre from rattling

whilst the vehicle is in motion, store

them properly.

CAUTION

Your vehicle has metric threads

on the wheel studs and nuts.

Make certain during wheel

removal that the same nuts that

were removed are reinstalled -

or, if replaced, that nuts with

metric threads and the same

chamfer configuration are used.

Installation of a non-metric

thread nut on a metric stud or

vice-versa will not secure the

wheel to the hub properly and

will damage the stud so that it

must be replaced.

Note that most lug nuts do not

have metric threads. Be sure to

use extreme care in checking

for thread style before installing

aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.

If in doubt, we recommend that

you consult a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

WARNING

- Wheel studs

If the studs are damaged, they

may lose their ability to retain

the wheel. This could lead to the

loss of the wheel and a collision

resulting in serious injuries.

WARNING - Inadequate

spare tyre pressure

Check the inflation pressures as

soon as possible after installing

the spare tyre. Adjust it to the

specified pressure, if necessary.

Refer to “Tyres and wheels” sec-

tion 9.

What to do in an emergency

206

Jack label 1. Model Name

2. Maximum allowable load

3. When using the jack, set your

parking brake.

4. When using the jack, stop the

engine.

5. Do not get under a vehicle that is

supported by a jack.

6. The designated locations under

the frame

7. When supporting the vehicle, the

base plate of jack must be vertical

under the lifting point.

8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles

with manual transaxle or move the

shift lever to the P position on

vehicles with automatic transaxle.

9. The jack should be used on firm

level ground.

10. Jack manufacture

11. Production date

12. Representative company and

address

❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.

• Type A

■ Example

• Type B

OTQ044219

OHYK064002

621

What to do in an emergency

EC Declaration of Conformity for Jack

JACKDOC14S

What to do in an emergency

226

TOWING

Towing service

If emergency towing is necessary, we

recommend having it done by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer or a com-

mercial tow-truck service. Proper lifting

and towing procedures are necessary to

prevent damage to the vehicle. The use

of wheel dollies or flatbed is recommend-

ed.

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the

front wheels on the ground (without dol-

lies) and the rear wheels off the ground.

If any of the loaded wheels or suspen-

sion components are damaged or the

vehicle is being towed with the rear

wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly

under the rear wheels.

When being towed by a commercial tow

truck and wheel dollies are not used, the

rear of the vehicle should always be lift-

ed, not the front.

CAUTION

• Do not tow the vehicle with the

rear wheels on the ground as this

may cause damage to the vehicle.

• Do not tow with sling-type equip-

ment. Use wheel lift or flatbed

equipment.

OTQ065012

OTQ065010

OTQ065009

dolly

623

What to do in an emergency

When towing your vehicle in an emer-

gency without wheel dollies :

1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi-

tion.

2. Place the transmission shift lever in N

(Neutral).

3. Release the parking brake.

Removable towing hook

(front, if equipped)

1. Remove the towing hook from the tool

case.

2. Remove the hole cover on the front

bumper by turning it.

3. Install the towing hook by turning it

clockwise into the hole until it is fully

secured.

4. Remove the towing hook and install

the cover after use.

CAUTION

Failure to place the transmission

shift lever in N (Neutral) may cause

internal damage to the transmis-

sion.

OTQ066019 OTQ065020

What to do in an emergency

246

Emergency towing

If towing is necessary, we recommend

you to have it done by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer or a commercial

tow truck service.

If towing service is not available in an

emergency, your vehicle may be tem-

porarily towed using a cable or chain

secured to the emergency towing hook

under the front (or rear) of the vehicle.

Use extreme caution when towing the

vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle to

steer it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only

on hard-surfaced roads for a short dis-

tance and at low speeds. Also, the

wheels, axles, power train, steering and

brakes must all be in good condition.

• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehi-

cle out of mud, sand or other condi-

tions from which the vehicle cannot be

driven out under its own power.

• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the

vehicle doing the towing.

• The drivers of both vehicles should

communicate with each other frequent-

ly.

• Before emergency towing, check that

the hook is not broken or damaged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chain

securely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and

even force.

• To avoid damaging the hook, do not

pull from the side or at a vertical angle.

Always pull straight ahead.

CAUTION

• Attach a towing strap to the tow

hook.

• Using a portion of the vehicle

other than the tow hooks for tow-

ing may damage the body of your

vehicle.

• Use only a cable or chain specifi-

cally intended for use in towing

vehicles. Securely fasten the

cable or chain to the towing hook

provided.

OTQ066021

OTQ067013

Front (if equipped)

Rear

625

What to do in an emergency

• Use a towing strap less than 16 feet (5

m) long. Attach a white or red cloth

(about 12 inches (30 cm) wide) in the

middle of the strap for easy visibility.

• Drive carefully so that the towing strap

is not loosened during towing.

Emergency towing precautions

• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the

steering wheel isn’t locked.

• Place the transmission shift lever in N

(Neutral).

• Release the parking bake.

• Press the brake pedal with more force

than normal since you will have

reduced brake performance.

• More steering effort will be required

because the power steering system

will be disabled.

• If you are driving down a long hill, the

brakes may overheat and brake per-

formance will be reduced. Stop often

and let the brakes cool off.

WARNING

Use extreme caution when towing

the vehicle.

• Avoid sudden starts or erratic

driving manoeuvres which would

place excessive stress on the

emergency towing hook and tow-

ing cable or chain. The hook and

towing cable or chain may break

and cause serious injury or dam-

age.

• If the disabled vehicle is unable

to be moved, do not forcibly con-

tinue the towing. Contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer or a

commercial tow truck service for

assistance.

• Tow the vehicle as straight ahead

as possible.

• Keep away from the vehicle dur-

ing towing.

OTQ067014

Tie-down hook

(for flatbed towing)

WARNING

Do not use the hooks under the

front (or rear) of the vehicle for tow-

ing purposes. These hooks are

designed ONLY for transport tie-

down. If the tie-down hooks are

used for towing, the tie-down hooks

or front bumper will be damaged

and this could lead to serious

injury.

CAUTION - Automatic

transmission

• If the car is being towed with all

four wheels on the ground, it can

be towed only from the front. Be

sure that the transmission is in

neutral. Be sure the steering is

unlocked by placing the ignition

switch in the ACC position. A

driver must be in the towed vehi-

cle to operate the steering and

brakes.

• To avoid serious damage to the

automatic transmission, limit the

vehicle speed to 10 mph (15 km/h)

and drive less than 1 mile (1.5

km) when towing.

• Before towing, check the auto-

matic transmission fluid leak

under your vehicle. If the auto-

matic transmission fluid is leak-

ing, a flatbed equipment or tow-

ing dolly must be used.

626

What to do in an emergency

Engine compartment / 7-2

Maintenance services / 7-4

Owner maintenance / 7-6

Scheduled maintenance service / 7-8

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 7-9

Engine oil / 7-13

Engine coolant / 7-15

Brake and clutch fluid / 7-18

Power steering fluid / 7-19

Automatic transmission fluid / 7-20

Washer fluid / 7-22

Parking brake / 7-22

Fuel filter (for diesel) / 7-23

Air cleaner / 7-24

Climate control air filter / 7-25

Wiper blades / 7-27

Battery / 7-30

Tyres and wheels / 7-33

Fuses / 7-45

Light bulbs / 7-54

Appearance care / 7-62

Emission control system / 7-69

• Selective catalytic reduction / 7-72

• Urea gauge / 7-72

• Low urea warning message / 7-73

• Malfunction with the scr system / 7-74

• Clearing the vehicle-restarting restriction / 7-75

• Adding the urea solution / 7-76

• Storing the urea solution / 7-78

• Urea solution purity / 7-79

Maintenance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

OTQ027003R

1. Power steering fluid reservoir

2. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick

(if equipped)

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Fuel filter

5. Brake fluid reservoir

6. Fuse box

7. Negative battery terminal

8. Positive battery terminal

9. Engine coolant reservoir

10. Engine oil dipstick

11. Radiator cap

12. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir

13. Air cleaner

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

■

Diesel Engine

A2 2.5

Maintenance

OTQ077066R

1. Power steering fluid reservoir

2. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick

(if equipped)

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Fuse box

6. Negative battery terminal

7. Positive battery terminal

8. Engine coolant reservoir

9. Engine oil dipstick

10. Radiator cap

11. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir

12. Air cleaner

■

Petrol Engine

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE SERVICES

You should exercise the utmost care to

prevent damage to your vehicle and

injury to yourself whenever performing

any maintenance or inspection proce-

dures.

Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient

servicing may result in operational prob-

lems with your vehicle that could lead to

vehicle damage, an accident, or person-

al injury.

Owner’s responsibility

✽

NOTICE

Maintenance Service and Record

Retention are the owner's responsibility.

We recommend in general that you have

your vehicle serviced by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

You should retain documents that show

proper maintenance has been performed

on your vehicle in accordance with the

scheduled maintenance service charts

shown on the following pages. You need

this information to establish your compli-

ance with the servicing and maintenance

requirements of your vehicle warranties.

Detailed warranty information is provided

in your Service Passport.

Repairs and adjustments required as a

result of improper maintenance or a lack

of required maintenance are not covered

when your vehicle is covered by warran-

ty.

Owner maintenance precautions

Improper or incomplete service may

result in problems. This section gives

instructions only for the maintenance

items that are easy to perform.

✽

NOTICE

Improper owner maintenance during

the warranty period may affect warran-

ty coverage. For details, read the sepa-

rate Service Passport provided with the

vehicle. If you're unsure about any serv-

icing or maintenance procedure, we rec-

ommend that the system be seviced by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Maintenance

WARNING

- Maintenance

work

• Performing maintenance work on

a vehicle can be dangerous. You

can be seriously injured whilst

performing some maintenance

procedures. If you lack sufficient

knowledge and experience or the

proper tools and equipment to do

the work, we recommend that the

system be servied by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

• Working under the bonnet with

the engine running is dangerous.

It becomes even more dangerous

when you wear jewellery or loose

clothing. These can become

entangled in moving parts and

result in injury. Therefore, if you

must run the engine whilst work-

ing under the bonnet, make cer-

tain that you remove all jewellery

(especially rings, bracelets,

watches, and necklaces) and all

neckties, scarves, and similar

loose clothing before getting

near the engine or cooling fans.

WARNING

- Diesel Engine

Never work on injection system

with engine running or within 30

seconds after shutting off engine.

High-pressure pump, rail, injectors

and high-pressure pipes are sub-

ject to high pressure even after the

engine stopped. The fuel jet pro-

duced by fuel leaks may cause seri-

ous injury, if it touches the body.

People using pacemakers should

not move than 30cm closer to the

ECU or wiring harness within the

engine room whilst engine is run-

ning, since the high currents in the

electronic engine control system

produce considerable magnetic

fields.

CAUTION

• Do not put heavy objects or apply

excessive force on top of the

engine cover (if equipped) or fuel

related parts.

• When you inspect the fuel system

(fuel lines and fuel injection

devices), we recommend that you

contact a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

• Do not drive long time with the

engine cover (if equipped) removed.

• When checking the engine room,

do not go near fire.

Fuel, washer fluid, etc. are flam-

mable oils that may cause fire.

• Before touching the battery, igni-

tion cables and electrical wiring,

you should disconnect the bat-

tery "-" terminal. You may get an

electric shock from the electric

current.

• When you remove the interior

trim cover with a flat head (-) driv-

er, be careful not to damage the

cover.

• Be careful when you replace and

clean bulbs to avoid burns or

electrical shock.

Maintenance

OWNER MAINTENANCE

The following lists are vehicle checks and

inspections that should be performed at

the frequencies indicated to help ensure

safe, dependable operation of your vehi-

cle.

If you have any question, we recommend

that you consult a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

These Owner Maintenance Checks are

generally not covered by warranties and

you may be charged for labour, parts and

lubricants used.

Owner maintenance schedule

When you stop for fuel:

• Check the engine oil level.

• Check coolant level in coolant reser-

voir.

• Check the windscreen washer fluid

level.

• Look for low or under-inflated tyres.

Whilst operating your vehicle:

• Note any changes in the sound of the

exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes

in the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steering

wheel. Notice any increased steering

effort or looseness in the steering

wheel, or change in its straight-ahead

position.

• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns

slightly or “pulls” to one side when trav-

elling on smooth, level road.

• When stopping, listen and check for

unusual sounds, pulling to one side,

increased brake pedal travel or “hard-

to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in the oper-

ation of your transmission occurs,

check the transmission fluid level.

• Check automatic transmission P (Park)

function.

• Check parking brake.

• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle

(water dripping from the air condition-

ing system during or after use is nor-

mal).

WARNING

Be careful when checking your

engine coolant level when the

engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant

and steam may blow out under

pressure. This could cause burns

or other serious injury.

Maintenance

At least monthly:

• Check coolant level in the engine

coolant reservoir.

• Check the operation of all exterior

lights, including the stoplights, turn sig-

nals and hazard warning flashers.

• Check the inflation pressures of all

tyres including the spare.

At least twice a year

(i.e., every Spring and Fall) :

• Check radiator, heater and air condi-

tioning hoses for leaks or damage.

• Check windscreen washer spray and

wiper operation. Clean wiper blades

with clean cloth dampened with wash-

er fluid.

• Check headlight alignment.

• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields

and clamps.

• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear

and function.

• Check for worn tyres and loose wheel

lug nuts.

At least once a year:

• Clean body and door drain holes.

• Lubricate door hinges and checks, and

bonnet hinges.

• Lubricate door and bonnet locks and

latches.

• Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips.

• Check the air conditioning system.

• Check the power steering fluid level.

• Inspect and lubricate automatic trans-

mission linkage and controls.

• Clean battery and terminals.

• Check the brake fluid level.

Maintenance

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE

Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule if

the vehicle is usually operated where

none of the following conditions apply. If

any of the following conditions apply, fol-

low Maintenance Under Severe Usage

Conditions.

• Repeated short distance driving.

• Driving in dusty conditions or sandy

areas.

• Extensive use of brakes.

• Driving in areas where salt or other

corrosive materials are being used.

• Driving on rough or muddy roads.

• Driving in mountainous areas.

• Extended periods of idling or low

speed operation.

• Driving for a prolonged period in cold

temperatures and/or extremely humid

climates.

• More than 50% driving in heavy city

traffic during hot weather above 32°C

(90°F).

If your vehicle is operated under the

above conditions, you should inspect,

replace or refill more frequently than

“Normal Maintenance Schedule which is

provied in your Service Passport.”

Maintenance

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Engine oil and filter

The engine oil and filter should be

changed at the intervals specified in the

maintenance schedule. If the car is being

driven in severe conditions, more fre-

quent oil and filter changes are required.

Drive belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of

cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil satu-

ration and replace if necessary. Drive

belts should be checked periodically for

proper tension and adjusted as neces-

sary.

Fuel filter (cartridge)

A clogged filter can limit the speed at

which the vehicle may be driven, damage

the emission system and cause multiple

issues such as hard starting. If an exces-

sive amount of foreign matter accumu-

lates in the fuel tank, the filter may

require replacement more frequently.

After installing a new filter, run the engine

for several minutes, and check for leaks

at the connections. We recommend that

the fuel filter be replaced by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-

nections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-

nections for leakage and damage.

We recommend that the fuel lines, fuel

hoses and connectionsr be replaced by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

WARNING - Diesel only

Never work on injection system

with engine running or within 30

seconds after shutting off engine.

High pressure pump, rail, injectors

and high pressure pipes are sub-

ject to high pressure even after the

engine stopped. The fuel jet pro-

duced by fuel leaks may cause seri-

ous injury, if it touch the body.

People using pacemakers should

not move than 30cm closer to the

ECU or wiring harness within the

engine room whilst engine is run-

ning, since the high currents in the

Common Rail system produce con-

siderable magnetic fields.

CAUTION

In case the fuel filter is clogged due

to not conforming to the mainte-

nance period, the fuel injection

equipment may supply the fuel

insufficiently, which may damage

the fuel injection equipment and

cause the engine to stall at worst

cases.

CAUTION

When you are inspecting the belt,

place the ignition switch in the

LOCK/OFF or ACC position.

Maintenance

107

Vapour hose and fuel filler cap

The vapour hose and fuel filler cap

should be inspected at those intervals

specified in the maintenance schedule.

Make sure that a new vapour hose or fuel

filler cap is correctly replaced.

Vacuum crankcase ventilation

hoses (if equipped)

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence

of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard

and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,

abrasions, and excessive swelling indi-

cate deterioration. Particular attention

should be paid to examine those hose

surfaces nearest to high heat sources,

such as the exhaust manifold.

Inspect the hose routing to assure that

the hoses do not come in contact with

any heat source, sharp edges or moving

component which might cause heat dam-

age or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose

connections, such as clamps and cou-

plings, to make sure they are secure, and

that no leaks are present. Hoses should

be replaced immediately if there is any

evidence of deterioration or damage.

Air cleaner filter

We recommend that the air cleaner filter

be replaced by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

Spark plugs (for petrol engine)

Make sure to install new spark plugs of

the correct heat range.

Valve clearance (if equipped)

Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or

engine vibration and adjust if necessary.

We recommend that the system be serv-

iced by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Cooling system

Check cooling system components, such

as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and

connections for leakage and damage.

Replace any damaged parts.

Coolant

The coolant should be changed at the

intervals specified in the maintenance

schedule.

WARNING

Do not disconnect and inspect

spark plugs when the engine is hot.

You may burn yourself.

711

Maintenance

Manual transmission fluid

(if equipped)

Inspect the manual transmission fluid

according to the maintenance schedule.

Automatic transmission fluid

(if equipped)

The fluid level should be in the "HOT"

range of the dipstick, after the engine

and transmission are at normal operating

temperature. Check the automatic trans-

mission fluid level with the engine run-

ning and the transmission in neutral, with

the parking brake properly applied.

✽

NOTICE

If your vehicle is not equipped with the

automatic transmission level gauge, we

recommend that the automatic trans-

mission fluid inspected by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer according to the

maintenance schedule.

Brake hoses and lines

Visually check for proper installation,

chafing, cracks, deterioration and any

leakage. Replace any deteriorated or

damaged parts immediately.

Brake fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid

reservoir. The level should be between

“MIN” and “MAX” marks on the side of

the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake

fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4

specification.

Parking brake

Inspect the parking brake system includ-

ing the parking brake lever and cables.

Brake discs, pads, calipers and

rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs

for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid

leakage.

For more information on checking the

pads or lining wear limit, refer to the

HYUNDAI web site.

(http://brakeman

ual.hmc.co.kr)

Suspension mounting bolts

Check the suspension connections for

looseness or damage. Retighten to the

specified torque.

Maintenance

127

Steering gear box, linkage &

boots/lower arm ball joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off,

check for excessive free-play in the

steering wheel.

Check the linkage for bends or damage.

Check the dust boots and ball joints for

deterioration, cracks, or damage.

Replace any damaged parts.

Power steering pump, belt and

hoses

Check the power steering pump and

hoses for leakage and damage. Replace

any damaged or leaking parts immedi-

ately. Inspect the power steering belt (or

drive belt) for evidence of cuts, cracks,

excessive wear, oiliness and proper ten-

sion. Replace or adjust it if necessary.

Air conditioning refrigerant

(if equipped)

Check the air conditioning lines and con-

nections for leakage and damage.

713

Maintenance

ENGINE OIL

Checking the engine oil level

1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.

2. Start the engine and allow it to reach

normal operating temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few

minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to

return to the oil pan.

4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and

re-insert it fully.

5. Pull the dipstick out again and check

the level. The level should be between

F and L.

If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring

the level to F. Do not overfill.

Use a funnel to help prevent oil from

being spilled on engine components.

Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer

to “Recommended lubricants and capac-

ities” in section 9.)

WARNING - Radiator hose

Be very careful not to touch the

radiator hose when checking or

adding the engine oil as it may be

hot enough to burn you.

OTQ077002L OTQ077003L

CAUTION - Diesel engine

Overfilling the engine oil may cause

severe dieseling due to churning

effect. It may lead to engine damage

accompanied with abrupt engine

speed increment, combustion noise

and white smoke emission.

CAUTION

• Do not overfill with engine oil.

Engine damage may result.

• Do not spill engine oil, when

adding or changing engine oil. If

you drop the engine oil on the

engine room, wipe it off immedi-

ately.

• When you wipe the oil level

gauge, you should wipe it with a

clean cloth. When mixed with

debris, it can cause engine dam-

age.

Maintenance

147

Changing the engine oil and filter

We recommend that the engine oil and

filter be replaced by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

WARNING

Prolonged and repeated contact

with used engine oils may result in

serious skin disorders including

dermatitis and cancer. Avoid con-

tact with skin as far as possible and

always wash thoroughly after any

contact. Keep used oils out of

reach of children. It is illegal to pol-

lute drains, water courses and soil.

Use only authorised waste collec-

tion facilities including civic ameni-

ty sites and garages for the dispos-

al of used oil and oil filters. If in

doubt, contact the local authority

for disposal instructions.

715

Maintenance

ENGINE COOLANT

The high-pressure cooling system has a

reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze

coolant. The reservoir is filled at the fac-

tory.

Check the antifreeze protection and

coolant level at least once a year, at the

beginning of the winter season, and

before travelling to a colder climate.

Checking the coolant level

CAUTION

• Do not drive with no engine

coolant. It may cause water pump

failure and engine seizure, etc.

• When the engine overheats from

low engine coolant, suddenly

adding engine coolant may cause

cracks in the engine. To prevent

damage, add engine coolant

slowly in small quantities.

WARNING

The electric motor (cool-

ing fan) is controlled by

engine coolant tempera-

ture, refrigerant pres-

sure and vehicle speed.

It may sometimes operate even

when the engine is not running.

Use extreme caution when working

near the blades of the cooling fan

so that you are not injured by a

rotating fan blades. As the engine

coolant temperature decreases, the

electric motor will automatically

shut off. This is a normal condition.

WARNING

Removing radiator

cap

• Never attempt to remove the radi-

ator cap whilst the engine is

operating or hot. Doing so might

lead to cooling system and

engine damage and could result

in serious personal injury from

escaping hot coolant or steam.

• Turn the engine off and wait until

it cools down. Use extreme care

when removing the radiator cap.

Wrap a thick towel around it, and

turn it counterclockwise slowly to

the first stop. Step back whilst

the pressure is released from the

cooling system.

When you are sure all the pres-

sure has been released, press

down on the cap, using a thick

towel, and continue turning coun-

terclockwise to remove it.

(Continued)

• Even if the engine is not operat-

ing, do not remove the radiator

cap or the drain plug whilst the

engine and radiator are hot. Hot

coolant and steam may still blow

out under pressure, causing seri-

ous injury.

Maintenance

167

Check the condition and connections of

all cooling system hoses and heater

hoses. Replace any swollen or deterio-

rated hoses.

The coolant level should be filled

between F and L marks on the side of the

coolant reservoir when the engine is

cool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough

specified coolant to provide protection

against freezing and corrosion. Bring the

level to F, but do not overfill. If frequent

additions are required, we recommend

that the system be inspected by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Recommended engine coolant

• When adding coolant, use only deion-

ized water or soft water for your vehicle

and never mix hard water in the

coolant filled at the factory. An improp-

er coolant mixture can result in serious

malfunction or engine damage.

• The engine in your vehicle has alu-

minium engine parts and must be pro-

tected by an ethylene-glycol-based

coolant to prevent corrosion and freez-

ing.

• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol

coolant or mix them with the specified

coolant.

• Do not use a solution that contains

more than 60% antifreeze or less than

35% antifreeze, which would reduce

the effectiveness of the solution.

For mixture percentage, refer to the fol-

lowing table.

OTQ077004

WARNING

Radiator cap

Do not remove the radiator cap

when the engine and radiator are

hot. Scalding hot coolant and

steam may blow out under pres-

sure causing serious injury.

OTQ072005

Ambient

Temperature

Mixture Percentage

(volume)

Antifreeze Water

-15°C (5°F) 35 65

-25°C (-13°F) 40 60

-35°C (-31°F) 50 50

-45°C (-49°F) 60 40

717

Maintenance

Changing the coolant

We recommend that the coolant be

replaced by a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

CAUTION

Put a thick cloth or fabric around

the radiator cap before refilling the

coolant in order to prevent the

coolant from overflowing into

engine parts such as generator.

WARNING - Coolant

• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid

reservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severely

obscure visibility when sprayed

on the windscreen and may

cause loss of vehicle control or

damage to paint and body trim.

Maintenance

187

BRAKE AND CLUTCH (IF EQUIPPED) FLUID

Checking the brake fluid level

Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri-

odically. The fluid level should be

between MAX and MIN marks on the

side of the reservoir.

Before removing the reservoir cap and

adding brake fluid, clean the area around

the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent

brake fluid contamination.

If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX

level. The level will fall with accumulated

mileage. This is a normal condition asso-

ciated with the wear of the brake linings.

If the fluid level is excessively low, we

recommend that the system be checked

by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Use only the specified brake fluid. (Refer

to “Recommended lubricants or capaci-

ties” in section 9.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

✽

NOTICE

Before removing the brake/clutch filter

cap, read the warning on the cap.

WARNING -

Brake fluid

When changing and adding brake

fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it

come in contact with your eyes. If

brake fluid should come in contact

with your eyes, immediately flush

them with a large quantity of fresh

tap water. Have your eyes examined

by a doctor as soon as possible.

WARNING - Loss of brake

fluid

In the event the brake system

requires frequent additions of fluid,

we recommend that the system be

inspected by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

WARNING

Clean filler cap before removing.

Use only DOT3 or DOT4

brake/clutch fluid from a sealed

container.

OTQ077006R

CAUTION

Do not allow brake fluid to contact

the vehicle's body paint, as paint

damage will result. Brake fluid,

which has been exposed to open air

for an extended time should never

be used as its quality cannot be

guaranteed. It should be disposed

of properly. Don't put in the wrong

kind of fluid. A few drops of miner-

al-based oil, such as engine oil, in

your brake system can damage

brake system parts.

719

Maintenance

POWER STEERING FLUID

Checking the power steering fluid

level

With the vehicle on level ground, check

the fluid level in the power steering reser-

voir periodically. The fluid should be

between MAX and MIN marks on the

side of the reservoir at the normal tem-

perature.

Before adding power steering fluid, thor-

oughly clean the area around the reser-

voir cap to prevent power steering fluid

contamination.

If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX

level.

✽

NOTICE

Check that the fluid level is in the

"HOT" range on the reservoir. If the

fluid is cold, check that it is in the

"COLD" range.

In the event the power steering system

requires frequent additions of fluid, we

recommend that the system be inspect-

ed by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Use only the specified power steering

fluid. (Refer to "Recommended lubricants

or capacities" in section 9.)

Checking the power steering

hose

Check the connections for oil leaks, dam-

age and twists in the power steering

hose before driving.

CAUTION

• To avoid damage to the power

steering pump, do not operate the

vehicle for prolonged periods

with a low power steering fluid

level.

• Never start the engine when the

reservoir tank is empty.

• When adding fluid, be careful that

dirt does not get into the reser-

voir.

• Too little fluid can result in

increased steering effort and/or

noise from the power steering

system.

• The use of the non-specified fluid

could reduce the effectiveness of

the power steering system and

cause damage to it.

OTQ077007

Maintenance

207

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)

Checking the automatic transmis-

sion fluid level

✽

NOTICE

If your vehicle is not equipped with the

automatic transmission level gauge, we

recommend that the automatic trans-

mission fluid inspected by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer according to the

maintenance schedule.

If your vehicle is equipped with the

automatic transmission level gauge,

inspect the fluid level as follows.

The automatic transmission fluid level

should be checked regularly.

Keep the vehicle on the level ground with

the parking brake applied and check the

fluid level according to the following pro-

cedure.

1. Place the selector lever in N (Neutral)

position and confirm the engine is run-

ning at normal idle speed.

2. After the transmission is warmed up

sufficiently (fluid temperature 70~80°C

(158~176°F), for example by 10 min-

utes usual driving, move the shift lever

through all positions then place the

selector lever in “N (Neutral) or P

(Park)” position.

3. Confirm that the fluid level is in “HOT”

range on the level gauge. If the fluid

level is lower, add the specified fluid

from the fill hole. If the fluid level is

higher, drain the fluid from the drain

hole.

4. If the fluid level is checked in cold con-

dition (fluid temperature 20~30°C

(68~86°F) add the fluid to “C” (COLD)

line and then recheck the fluid level

according to the above step 2.

OTQ077009

OTQ076008

OTQ073008

■ Type A

■ Type B

721

Maintenance

✽

NOTICE

“C” (COLD) range is for reference only

and should NOT be used to determine

transmission fluid level.

✽

NOTICE

New automatic transmission fluid

should be red. The red dye is added so

the assembly plant can identify it as

automatic transmission fluid and distin-

guish it from engine oil or antifreeze.

The red dye, which is not an indicator of

fluid quality, is not permanent. As the

vehicle is driven, the automatic trans-

mission fluid will begin to look darker.

The colour may eventually appear light

brown. Therefore, we recommend that

the system be replaced by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer according to the

Scheduled Maintenance at the begin-

ning of this section.

Use only the specified automatic trans-

mission fluid. (Refer to “Recommended

lubricants and capacities” in section 9.)

Changing the automatic transmis-

sion fluid

We recommend that the automatic trans-

mission fluid changed by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer according to the

maintenance schedule.

WARNING -

Transmission

fluid

The transmission fluid level should

be checked when the engine is at

normal operating temperature. This

means that the engine, radiator,

radiator hose and exhaust system

etc., are very hot. Exercise great

care not to burn yourself during

this procedure.

WARNING - Parking brake

To avoid sudden movement of the

vehicle, apply parking brake and

depress the brake pedal before

moving the shift lever.

CAUTION

• Low fluid level causes transmis-

sion slippage. Overfilling can

cause foaming, loss of fluid and

transmission malfunction.

• The use of a non-specified fluid

could result in transmission mal-

function and failure.

Maintenance

227

WASHER FLUID

Checking the washer fluid level

The reservoir is translucent so that you

can check the level with a quick visual

inspection.

Check the fluid level in the washer fluid

reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain

water may be used if washer fluid is not

available.

However, use washer solvent with

antifreeze characteristics in cold climates

to prevent freezing.

Checking the parking brake

Check the stroke of the parking brake by

counting the number of “clicks’’ heard

whilst fully applying it from the released

position. Also, the parking brake alone

should securely hold the vehicle on a fair-

ly steep grade. If the stroke is more or

less than specified, we recommend that

the system be serviced by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

Stroke : 7 “clicks’’ at a force of

44 lbs (20 kg, 196 N).

WARNING - Coolant

• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid

reservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severely

obscure visibility when sprayed

on the windscreen and may

cause loss of vehicle control or

damage to paint and body trim.

• Windscreen washer fluid agents

contain some amounts of alcohol

and can be flammable under cer-

tain circumstances. Do not allow

sparks or flame to contact the

washer fluid or the washer fluid

reservoir. Damage to the vehicle

or occupants could occur.

• Windscreen washer fluid is poi-

sonous to humans and animals.

Do not drink and avoid contact-

ing windscreen washer fluid.

Serious injury or death could

occur.

OTQ057008

PARKING BRAKE

OTQ077010

OTQ077011

Rear (if equipped)

Front

723

Maintenance

FUEL FILTER (FOR DIESEL)

Draining water from fuel filter

The fuel filter for diesel engine plays an

important role of separating water from

fuel and accumulating the water in its

bottom.

If water accumulates in the

fuel filter, the warning light

comes on when the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

If the stroke is more or less

than specified, we recom-

mend that the system be

serviced by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

Fuel filter cartridge replacement

✽

NOTICE

When replacing the fuel filter cartridge,

we recommend that you use parts for

replacement from a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

OTQ077012R

CAUTION

If the water accumulated in the fuel

filter is not drained at proper times,

damages to the major parts such as

the fuel system can be caused by

water permeation in the fuel filter.

Maintenance

247

AIR CLEANER

Filter replacement

It must be replaced when necessary, and

should not be cleaned and reused.

1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching

clips and open the cover.

2. Replace the air cleaner filter.

3. Lock the cover with the cover attaching

clips.

OTQ077013 OTQ077014

OTQ077015

OTQ077016

725

Maintenance

Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.

If the vehicle is operated in extremely

dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele-

ment more often than the usual recom-

mended intervals.

Filter inspection

The climate control air filter should be

replaced according to the maintenance

schedule. If the vehicle is operated in

severely air-polluted cities or on dusty

rough roads for a long period, it should

be inspected more frequently and

replaced earlier. When you replace the

climate control air filter, replace it per-

forming the following procedure, and be

careful to avoid damaging other compo-

nents.

Filter replacement

1. Open the glove box and remove the

support rod (1).

CAUTION

• Do not drive with the air cleaner

removed; this will result in exces-

sive engine wear.

• When removing the air cleaner fil-

ter, be careful that dust or dirt

does not enter the air intake, or

damage may result.

• We recommend that you use

parts for replacement from a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)

OTQ077018R

Maintenance

267

2. With the glove box open, remove the

stoppers on both sides to allow the

glove box to hang freely on the hinges.

3. Remove the climate control air filter

cover by turning the cover stopper (1)

and then remove the air filters.

4. Replace the climate control air filter.

5. Reassemble in the reverse order of

disassembly.

✽

NOTICE

Install a new climate control air filter in

the correct direction with the arrow

symbol (

↓

) facing downwards.

Otherwise, the climate control effects

may decrease, possibly with a noise.

OTQ077019R OTQ077020R OTQ077021

727

Maintenance

WIPER BLADES

Blade inspection

✽

NOTICE

Commercial hot waxes applied by auto-

matic car washes have been known to

make the windscreen difficult to clean.

Contamination of either the windscreen

or the wiper blades with foreign matter

can reduce the effectiveness of the wind-

screen wipers. Common sources of con-

tamination are insects, tree sap, and hot

wax treatments used by some commer-

cial car washes. If the blades are not wip-

ing properly, clean both the window and

the blades with a good cleaner or mild

detergent, and rinse thoroughly with

clean water.

Blade replacement

When the wipers no longer clean ade-

quately, the blades may be worn or

cracked, and require replacement.

1JBA5122/H

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the wiper

blades, do not use petrol, kerosene,

paint thinner, or other solvents on

or near them.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the wiper

arms or other components, do not

attempt to move the wipers manual-

ly.

CAUTION

The use of a non-specified wiper

blade could result in wiper malfunc-

tion and failure.

Maintenance

287

Front windscreen wiper blade

1. Raise the wiper arm.

2. Compress the clip and slide the blade

assembly downward.

3. Lift it off the arm.

4. Install the blade assembly in the

reverse order of removal.

Rear window wiper blade

(if equipped)

1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out the

wiper blade assembly.

1LDA5023

CAUTION

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall

against the windscreen, since it

may chip or crack the windscreen.

1JBA7037

1JBA7038

OEN076018

729

Maintenance

2. Install the new blade assembly by

inserting the centre part into the slot in

the wiper arm until it clicks into place.

3. Make sure the blade assembly is

installed firmly by trying to pull it slight-

ly.

To prevent damage to the wiper arms or

other components, we recommend that

the wiper blade be replaced by a

HYUNDAI authoised repairer.

OEN076019

Maintenance

307

BATTERY

For best battery service

• Keep the battery securely mounted.

• Keep the battery top clean and dry.

• Keep the terminals and connections

clean, tight, and coated with petroleum

jelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the

battery immediately with a solution of

water and baking soda.

• If the vehicle is not going to be used for

an extended time, disconnect the bat-

tery cables.

✽

NOTICE

Basically equipped battery is mainte-

nance free type. If your vehicle is

equipped with the battery marked with

LOWER and UPPER on the side, you

can check the electrolyte level. The elec-

trolyte level should be between LOWER

and UPPER. If the electrolyte level is

low, it needs to add distilled (demineral-

ized) water (Never add sulfuric acid or

other electrolyte). When refill, be care-

ful not to splash the battery and adja-

cent components. And do not overfill the

battery cells. It can cause corrosion on

other parts. After then ensure that tight-

en the cell caps. We recommend that you

contact a HYUNDAI authorised repair-

er.

OTQ077022

WARNING

- Battery

dangers

Always read the following

instructions carefully when

handling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes and

all other flames or sparks

away from the battery.

Hydrogen, a highly com-

bustible gas, is always

present in battery cells and

may explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of the

reach of children because

batteries contain highly

corrosive SULFURIC ACID.

Do not allow battery acid to

contact your skin, eyes,

clothing or paint finish.

If any electrolyte gets into

your eyes, flush your eyes

with clean water for at least

15 minutes and get immedi-

ate medical attention.

(Continued)

731

Maintenance

❈ The actual battery label in the vehicle

may differ from the illustration.

Battery capacity label

1. CMF60L-BCI : The HYUNDAI model

name of battery

2. 12V : The nominal voltage

3. 60Ah (20HR) : The nominal capacity

(in Ampere hours)

4. 92RC : The nominal reserve capacity

(in min.)

5. 550CCA : The cold-test current in

amperes by SAE

6. 440A : The cold-test current in

amperes by EN

(Continued)

• The electrical ignition system

works with high voltage. Never

touch these components with the

engine running or the ignition

switched on.

Failure to follow the above warn-

ings can result in serious bodily

injury or death.

CAUTION

If you connect unauthorised elec-

tronic devices to the battery, the

battery may be discharged. Never

use unauthorised devices.

OJD072039

■ Example

(Continued)

If electrolyte gets on your

skin, thoroughly wash the

contacted area. If you feel a

pain or a burning sensa-

tion, get medical attention

immediately.

Wear eye protection when

charging or working near a

battery. Always provide

ventilation when working in

an enclosed space.

An inappropriately dis-

posed battery can be harm-

ful to the environment and

human health. Dispose the

battery according to your

local law(s) or regulation.

• When lifting a plastic-cased bat-

tery, excessive pressure on the

case may cause battery acid to

leak, resulting in personal injury.

Lift with a battery carrier or with

your hands on opposite corners.

• Never attempt to recharge the

battery when the battery cables

are connected.

(Continued)

Maintenance

327

Battery recharging

Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,

calcium-based battery.

• If the battery becomes discharged in a

short time (because, for example, the

headlights or interior lights were left on

whilst the vehicle was not in use),

recharge it by slow charging (trickle)

for 10 hours.

• If the battery gradually discharges

because of high electric load whilst the

vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-

30A for two hours.

Reset items

Items should be reset after the battery

has been discharged or the battery has

been disconnected.

• Climate control system

(See section 4)

• Clock (See section 4)

• Audio (See section 4)

• Auto up/down window (See section 4)

• Trip computer (See section 4)

(Continued)

• Before performing maintenance

or recharging the battery, turn off

all accessories and stop the

engine.

• The negative battery cable must

be removed first and installed

last when the battery is discon-

nected.

WARNING

- Recharging

battery

When recharging the battery,

observe the following precautions:

• The battery must be removed

from the vehicle and placed in an

area with good ventilation.

• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,

or flame near the battery.

• Watch the battery during charg-

ing, and stop or reduce the charg-

ing rate if the battery cells begin

gassing (boiling) violently or if

the temperature of the electrolyte

of any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).

• Wear eye protection when check-

ing the battery during charging.

• Disconnect the battery charger in

the following order.

1. Turn off the battery charger main

switch.

2. Unhook the negative clamp from

the negative battery terminal.

3. Unhook the positive clamp from

the positive battery terminal.

(Continued)

733

Maintenance

TYRES AND WHEELS

Tyre care

For proper maintenance, safety, and

maximum fuel economy, you must

always maintain recommended tyre

inflation pressures and stay within

the load limits and weight distribution

recommended for your vehicle.

Recommended cold tyre inflation

pressures

All tyre pressures (including the

spare) should be checked when the

tyres are cold. “Cold Tyres” means

the vehicle has not been driven for at

least three hours or driven less than

one mile (1.6 km).

Recommended pressures must be

maintained for the best ride, top vehi-

cle handling, and minimum tyre

wear.

For recommended inflation pressure,

refer to “Tyre and wheels” in section

All specifications (sizes and pres-

sures) can be found on a label

attached to the vehicle.

WARNING - Tyre underin-

flation

Severe underinflation can lead

to severe heat build-up, causing

blowouts, tread separation and

other tyre failures that can

result in the loss of vehicle con-

trol leading to severe injury or

death. This risk is much higher

on hot days and when driving

for long periods at high speeds.

OTQ087003/H

CAUTION

• Underinflation also results in

excessive wear, poor handling

and reduced fuel economy.

Wheel deformation also is

possible. Keep your tyre pres-

sures at the proper levels. If a

tyre frequently needs refilling,

we recommend that the sys-

tem be checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

• Overinflation produces a

harsh ride, excessive wear at

the centre of the tyre tread,

and a greater possibility of

damage from road hazards.

Maintenance

347

Checking tyre inflation pressure

Check your tyres once a month or

more.

Also, check the tyre pressure of the

spare tyre.

How to check

Use a good quality gauge to check

tyre pressure. You can not tell if your

tyres are properly inflated simply by

looking at them. Radial tyres may

look properly inflated even when

they're underinflated.

Check the tyre's inflation pressure

when the tyres are cold. - "Cold"

means your vehicle has been sitting

for at least three hours or driven no

more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

WARNING - Tyre Inflation

Overinflation or underinflation

can reduce tyre life, adversely

affect vehicle handling, and

lead to sudden tyre failure. This

could result in loss of vehicle

control and potential injury.

CAUTION - Tyre pressure

Always observe the following:

• Check tyre pressure when the

tyres are cold. (After vehicle

has been parked for at least

three hours or hasn't been

driven more than 1.6 km (one

mile) since startup.)

• Check the pressure of your

spare tyre each time you

check the pressure of other

tyres.

• Never overload your vehicle.

Be careful not to overload a

vehicle luggage rack if your

vehicle is equipped with one.

• Worn, old tyres can cause

accidents. If your tread is

badly worn, or if your tyres

have been damaged, replace

them.

CAUTION

• Warm tyres normally exceed

recommended cold tyre pres-

sures by 4 to 6 psi (28 to 41

kPa). Do not release air from

warm tyres to adjust the pres-

sure or the tyres will be under-

inflated.

• Be sure to reinstall the tyre

inflation valve caps. Without

the valve cap, dirt or moisture

could get into the valve core

and cause air leakage. If a

valve cap is missing, install a

new one as soon as possible.

735

Maintenance

Remove the valve cap from the tyre

valve stem. Press the tyre gauge

firmly onto the valve to get a pres-

sure measurement. If the cold tyre

inflation pressure matches the rec-

ommended pressure on the tyre and

loading information label, no further

adjustment is necessary. If the pres-

sure is low, add air until you reach

the recommended amount.

If you overfill the tyre, release air by

pushing on the metal stem in the

centre of the tyre valve. Recheck the

tyre pressure with the tyre gauge. Be

sure to put the valve caps back on

the valve stems. They help prevent

leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-

ture.

Tyre rotation

To equalize tread wear, it is recom-

mended that the tyres be rotated

every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or

sooner if irregular wear develops.

During rotation, check the tyres for

correct balance.

When rotating tyres, check for

uneven wear and damage. Abnormal

wear is usually caused by incorrect

tyre pressure, improper wheel align-

ment, out-of-balance wheels, severe

braking or severe cornering. Look for

bumps or bulges in the tread or side

of tyre. Replace the tyre if you find

either of these conditions. Replace

the tyre if fabric or cord is visible.

After rotation, be sure to bring the

front and rear tyre pressures to spec-

ification and check lug nut tightness.

Refer to “Tyre and wheels” in section

WARNING

• Inspect your tyres frequently

for proper inflation as well as

wear and damage. Always use

a tyre pressure gauge.

• Tyres with too much or too lit-

tle pressure wear unevenly

causing poor handling, loss of

vehicle control, and sudden

tyre failure leading to acci-

dents, injuries, and even death.

The recommended cold tyre

pressure for your vehicle can

be found in this manual and on

the tyre label located on the

driver's side centre pillar.

• Worn tyres can cause acci-

dents. Replace tyres that are

worn, show uneven wear, or

are damaged.

• Remember to check the pres-

sure of your spare tyre.

HYUNDAI recommends that

you check the spare every

time you check the pressure

of the other tyres on your

vehicle.

Maintenance

367

Disc brake pads should be inspected

for wear whenever tyres are rotated.

✽

NOTICE

Rotate radial tyres that have an

asymmetric tread pattern only from

front to rear and not from right to

left.

Wheel alignment and tyre balance

The wheels on your vehicle were

aligned and balanced carefully at the

factory to give you the longest tyre

life and best overall performance.

In most cases, you will not need to

have your wheels aligned again.

However, if you notice unusual tyre

wear or your vehicle pulling one way

or the other, the alignment may need

to be reset.

If you notice your vehicle vibrating

when driving on a smooth road, your

wheels may need to be rebalanced.

WARNING

• Do not use the compact spare

tyre for tyre rotation.

• Do not mix bias ply and radial

ply tyres under any circum-

stances. This may cause

unusual handling characteris-

tics that could result in death,

severe injury, or property

damage.

CAUTION

Improper wheel weights can

damage your vehicle's alu-

minum wheels. Use only

approved wheel weights.

S2BLA790

S2BLA790A

CBGQ0707A

Without a spare tyre

With a full-size spare tyre

Directional tyres (if equipped)

737

Maintenance

Tyre replacement

If the tyre is worn evenly, a tread

wear indicator will appear as a solid

band across the tread. This shows

there is less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)

of tread left on the tyre. Replace the

tyre when this happens.

Do not wait for the band to appear

across the entire tread before replac-

ing the tyre.

OEN076053

Tread wear indicator

WARNING

- Replacing

tyres

To reduce the chance or serious

or fatal injuries from an acci-

dent caused by tyre failure or

loss of vehicle control:

• Replace tyres that are worn,

show uneven wear, or are

damaged. Worn tyres can

cause loss of braking effec-

tiveness, steering control, and

traction.

• Do not drive your vehicle with

too little or too much pressure

in your tyres. This can lead to

uneven wear and tyre failure.

• When replacing tyres, never

mix radial and bias-ply tyres

on the same car. You must

replace all tyres (including the

spare) if moving from radial to

bias-ply tyres.

(Continued)

CAUTION

When replacing the tyres,

recheck and tighten the wheel

nuts after driving about 620

miles (1,000 km). If the steering

wheel shakes or the vehicle

vibrates whilst driving, the tyre

is out of balance. Align the tyre

balance. If the problem is not

solved, we recommend that you

contact a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

Maintenance

387

Wheel replacement

When replacing the metal wheels for

any reason, make sure the new

wheels are equivalent to the original

factory units in diameter, rim width

and offset.

Tyre traction

Tyre traction can be reduced if you

drive on worn tyres, tyres that are

improperly inflated or on slippery

road surfaces. Tyres should be

replaced when tread wear indicators

appear. To reduce the possibility of

losing control, slow down whenever

there is rain, snow or ice on the road.

Tyre maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correct

wheel alignment helps to decrease

tyre wear. If you find a tyre is worn

unevenly, we recommend that the

wheel alignment be checked by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

When you have new tyres installed,

make sure they are balanced. This

will increase vehicle ride comfort and

tyre life. Additionally, a tyre should

always be rebalanced if it is removed

from the wheel.

(Continued)

• Using tyres and wheel other

than the recommended sizes

could cause unusual handling

characteristics and poor vehi-

cle control, resulting in a seri-

ous accident.

• Wheels that do not meet

HYUNDAI’s specifications

may fit poorly and result in

damage to the vehicle or

unusual handling and poor

vehicle control.

• The ABS works by comparing

the speed of the wheels. Tyre

size can affect wheel speed.

When replacing tyres, all 4

tyres must use the same size

originally supplied with the

vehicle. Using tyres of a dif-

ferent size can cause the ABS

(Anti-lock Brake System) and

ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) (if equipped) to work

irregularly.

WARNING

A wheel that is not the correct

size may adversely affect wheel

and bearing life, braking and

stopping abilities, handling

characteristics, ground clear-

ance, body-to-tyre clearance,

snow chain clearance,

speedometer and odometer cal-

ibration, headlight aim and

bumper height.

739

Maintenance

Tyre sidewall labeling

This information identifies and

describes the fundamental charac-

teristics of the tyre and also provides

the tyre identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification. The

TIN can be used to identify the tyre in

case of a recall.

1. Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or Brand name is

shown.

2. Tyre size designation

A tyre’s sidewall is marked with a tyre

size designation. You will need this

information when selecting replace-

ment tyres for your car. The following

explains what the letters and num-

bers in the tyre size designation

mean.

Example tyre size designation:

(These numbers are provided as an

example only; your tyre size designa-

tor could vary depending on your

vehicle.)

P245/65R17 105T

P - Applicable vehicle type (tyres

marked with the prefix “P’’ are

intended for use on passenger

cars or light trucks; however, not

all tyres have this marking).

245 - Tyre width in millimeters.

65 - Aspect ratio. The tyre’s section

height as a percentage of its

width.

R - Tyre construction code (Radial).

17 - Rim diameter in inches.

105 - Load Index, a numerical code

associated with the maximum

load the tyre can carry.

T - Speed Rating Symbol. See the

speed rating chart in this section

for additional information.

I030B04JM

5,6

Maintenance

407

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with impor-

tant information that you need if you

ever have to replace one. The follow-

ing explains what the letters and

numbers in the wheel size designa-

tion mean.

Example wheel size designation:

7.0JX17

7.0 - Rim width in inches.

J - Rim contour designation.

17 - Rim diameter in inches.

Tyre speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the dif-

ferent speed ratings currently being

used for passenger car tyres. The

speed rating is part of the tyre size

designation on the sidewall of the

tyre. This symbol corresponds to that

tyre's designed maximum safe oper-

ating speed.

3. Checking tyre life (TIN : Tyre

Identification Number)

Any tyres that are over 6 years old,

based on the manufacturing date,

(including the spare tyre) should be

replaced by new ones. You can find

the manufacturing date on the tyre

sidewall (possibly on the inside of the

wheel), displaying the DOT Code.

The DOT Code is a series of num-

bers on a tyre consisting of numbers

and English letters. The manufactur-

ing date is designated by the last four

digits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO

The front part of the DOT means a

plant code number, tyre size and

tread pattern and the last four num-

bers indicate week and year manu-

factured.

For example:

DOT XXXX XXXX 1615 represents

that the tyre was produced in the

16th week of 2015.

S 112 mph (180 km/h)

T 118 mph (190 km/h)

H 130 mph (210 km/h)

V 149 mph (240 km/h)

Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)

Maximum Speed

Speed

Rating

Symbol

741

Maintenance

4. Tyre ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rub-

ber-coated fabric in the tyre. Tyre

manufacturers also must indicate the

materials in the tyre, which include

steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

The letter "R" means radial ply con-

struction; the letter "D" means diago-

nal or bias ply construction; and the

letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-

struction.

5. Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tyre. Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure. Refer

to the Tyre and Loading Information

label for recommended inflation

pressure.

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum

load in kilograms and pounds that

can be carried by the tyre. When

replacing the tyres on the vehicle,

always use a tyre that has the same

load rating as the factory installed

tyre.

7. Uniform tyre quality grading

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tyre sidewall

between tread shoulder and maxi-

mum section width.

For example:

TREAD wear 200

TRACTION AA

TEMPERATUE A

WARNING - Tyre age

Tyres degrade over time, even

when they are not being used.

Regardless of the remaining

tread, it is recommended that

tyres generally be replaced

after six (6) years of normal

service. Heat caused by hot cli-

mates or frequent high loading

conditions can accelerate the

aging process. Failure to follow

this warning can result in sud-

den tyre failure, which could

lead to a loss of control and an

accident involving serious

injury or death.

Maintenance

427

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a compara-

tive rating based on the wear rate of

the tyre when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified govern-

ment test course. For example, a tyre

graded 150 would wear one-and-a-

half times (1½) as well on the gov-

ernment course as a tyre graded

100.

The relative performance of tyres

depends upon the actual conditions

of their use, however, and may

depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

These grades are molded on the

side-walls of passenger vehicle

tyres.The tyres available as standard

or optional equipment on your vehi-

cle may vary with respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those

grades represent the tyre’s ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on spec-

ified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tyre marked

C may have poor traction perform-

ance.

Temperature -A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing the

tyre’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled condi-

tions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can

cause the material of the tyre to

degenerate and reduce tyre life, and

excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tyre failure. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of perform-

ance on the laboratory test wheel

than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to

this tyre is based on straight-

ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include accelera-

tion, cornering, hydroplaning,

or peak traction characteristics.

743

Maintenance

Low aspect ratio tyre

(if equipped)

Low aspect ratio tyre s, whose

aspect ratio is lower than 50, are pro-

vided for sporty looks.

Because the low aspect ratio tyre s

are optimized for handling and brak-

ing, it may be more uncomfortable to

ride in and there is more noise com-

pare with normal tyres.

WARNING - Tyre

temperature

The temperature grade for this

tyre is established for a tyre that

is properly inflated and not

overloaded. Excessive speed,

underinflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or in

combination, can cause heat

build-up and possible sudden

tyre failure. This can cause loss

of vehicle control and serious

injury or death.

CAUTION

Because the sidewall of the low

aspect ratio tyre is shorter than

the normal, the wheel and tyre

of the low aspect ratio tyre is

easier to be damaged. So, follow

the instructions below.

- When driving on a rough road

or off road, drive cautiously

because tyre s and wheels

may be damaged. And after

driving, inspect tyre s and

wheels.

- When passing over a pothole,

speed bump, manhole, or kerb

stone, drive slowly so that the

tyre s and wheels are not dam-

aged.

- If the tyre is impacted, we rec-

ommend that you inspect the

tyre condition or contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

- To prevent damage to the tyre ,

inspect the tyre condition and

pressure every 1,860 miles

(3,000km).

Maintenance

447

CAUTION

• It is not easy to recognize the

tyre damage with your own

eyes. But if there is the slight-

est hint of tyre damage, even

though you cannot see the

tyre damage with your own

eyes, have the tyre checked or

replaced because the tyre

damage may cause air leak-

age from the tyre .

• If the tyre is damaged by driv-

ing on a rough road, off road,

pothole, manhole, or kerb

stone, it will not be covered by

the warranty.

• You can find out the tyre infor-

mation on the tyre sidewall.

745

Maintenance

FUSES

A vehicle’s electrical system is protected

from electrical overload damage by

fuses.

This vehicle has 3 fuse panels, one locat-

ed in the driver’s side panel bolster, the

other in the engine compartment.

If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-

sories, or controls do not work, check the

appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has

blown, the element inside the fuse will be

melted.

If the electrical system does not work,

first check the driver’s side fuse panel.

Before replacing a blown fuse, turn off

the ignition. and then disconnect the neg-

ative battery cable. replace it in a safe

place.

JAlways replace a blown fuse with one of

the same rating.

If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-

cates an electrical problem. Avoid using

the system involved and we recommend

that you consult a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type

for lower amperage rating, cartridge type,

and fusible link for higher amperage rat-

ings.

✽

NOTICE

The actual fuse/relay panel label may

differ from equipped items.

1VQA4037

Normal

Blade type

Cartridge type

Fusible link

Blown

Normal Blown

WARNING

- Fuse replace-

ment

• Never replace a fuse with any-

thing but another fuse of the

same rating.

• A higher capacity fuse could

cause damage and possibly a

fire.

• Never install a wire or aluminum

foil instead of the proper fuse -

even as a temporary repair. It may

cause extensive wiring damage

and a possible fire.

CAUTION

Do not use a screwdriver or any

other metal object to remove fuses

because it may cause a short circuit

and damage the system.

Maintenance

467

Instrument panel fuse replace-

ment

1. Turn the ignition switch and all other

switches off.

2. Open the fuse panel cover.

3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.

Use the removal tool provided in the

engine compartment fuse panel.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it

is blown.

Spare fuses are provided in the inner

fuse panel (or in the engine compart-

ment fuse panel).

5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,

and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, we recommend that you

consult a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of

the same rating from a circuit you may

not need for operating the vehicle, such

as the cigarette lighter fuse.

OTQ077041ROTQ077040R

CAUTION

• When replacing a blown fuse or

relay with a new one, make sure

the new fuse or relay fits tightly

into the clips. The incomplete fas-

tening fuse or relay may cause

the vehicle wiring and electric

systems damage and a possible

fire.

• Do not remove fuses, relays and

terminals fastened with bolts or

nuts. The fuses, relays and termi-

nals may be fastened incomplete-

ly, and it may cause a possible

fire. If fuses, relays and terminals

fastened with bolts or nuts are

blown, we recommend that you

consult with a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

• Do not input any other objects

except fuses or relays into

fuse/relay terminals such as a

driver or wiring. It may cause con-

tact failure and system malfunc-

tion.

747

Maintenance

If the headlights or other electrical com-

ponents do not work and the fuses are

OK, check the fuse panel in the engine

compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must

be replaced.

Memory fuse

Your vehicle is equipped with a memory

fuse to prevent battery discharge if your

vehicle is parked without being operated

for prolonged periods. Use the following

procedures before parking the vehicle for

prolonged periods.

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.

3. Open the driver’s side panel cover and

pull up the memory fuse.

✽

NOTICE

• If the memory fuse is pulled up from

the fuse panel, the warning chime,

audio, clock and interior lamps, etc.,

will not operate. Some items must be

reset after replacement. Refer to

“Battery” in this section.

• Even though the memory fuse is

pulled up, the battery can still be dis-

charged by operation of the head-

lights or other electrical devices.

OTQ077042

Maintenance

487

Engine compartment fuse

replacement

1. Turn the ignition switch and all other

switches off.

2. Remove the fuse panel cover by

pressing the tab and pulling up.

3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it

is blown. To remove or insert the fuse,

use the fuse puller in the engine com-

partment fuse panel.

4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,

and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, we recommend that

you consult a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

Main fuse

If the main fuse is blown, it must be

removed as follows:

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

2. Remove the nuts shown in the picture

above.

3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the

same rating.

4. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

✽

NOTICE

If the multi fuse is blown, we recom-

mend that you consult a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

CAUTION

After checking the fuse panel in the

engine compartment, securely

install the fuse panel cover. If not,

electrical failures may occur from

water contact.

OTQ077045

OTQ077043R

OTQ077044R

Diesel only

749

Maintenance

Fuse/relay panel description

Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you

can find the fuse/relay label describing

fuse/relay name and capacity.

✽

NOTICE

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this

manual may be applicable to your vehi-

cle. It is accurate at the time of printing.

When you inspect the fuse panel in your

vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.

OTQ075046

OTQ075108

Maintenance

507

Instrument panel fuse panel

Description Fuse rating Protected component

AUDIO-2 10A Audio, Digital clock, BCM, Power outside mirror switch

C/LIGHTER 20A Cigarette lighter, Front power outlet

S/HEATER DRV 10A Driver seat warmer switch (if equipped)

FOG LAMP REAR 10A Rear fog lamp relay

HEAD LAMP 10A Head lamp High/Low relay

WIPER FRT 25A Front wiper relay, Front wiper motor

BCM 10A BCM, DRL

HEATER 10A Front/Rear blower relay, Front/Rear A/C control module, Condenser fan relay, Electro chromic mirror,

Thermo switch, PTC heater relay(D4CB), EGR solenoid valve(D4BH)

B/UP LAMP 10A Back-up lamp relay, Back-up lamp switch, Transmission range switch

ABS 10A ABS/ESC control module, ESC switch(D4CB)

T/SIGNAL LAMP 10A Hazard switch

AIR BAG 10A SRS control module

MODULE 10A Instrument cluster, BCM, Immobiliser control module(D4BH), A/C relay(D4BH), Generator resister

ECU 10A Vehicle speed sensor, ECM, Air flow sensor(D4CB), Injection pump(D4BH), TCM, Fuel filter warning sensor

START 10A Start relay, Burglar alarm relay

HEATED MIRROR 10A Front A/C control module, Power outside mirror & defogger LH/RH

STOP LAMP 15A Stop lamp switch

RPAS 15A Buzzer, Stop, Signal electronic module

751

Maintenance

Description Fuse rating Protected component

DOOR LOCK 20A Door lock/unlock relay

FOG LAMP FRONT 10A Front fog lamp relay

B/ALARM HORN 10A Burglar alarm horn relay

AUDIO-1 15A Audio

(POWER

CONNECTOR)

Digital clock, Instrument cluster, Courtesy lamp LH/RH,

ROOM LAMP 10A Step lamp LH/RH, Cargo lamp, Room lamp switch,

Door warning switch, Data link connector, BCM, Vanity lamp switch LH/RH, Overhead console lamp

HAZARD 15A Hazard relay, Hazard switch

FUEL LID 15A Fuel filler door relay

P/WINDOW LH 25A Power window main switch, Power window switch LH

P/WINDOW RH 25A Power window main switch, Power window switch RH

HEATED STEERING 15A Steering Wheel Heated Coil

WIPER RR 15A Multi Function Switch

BLOWER FRT 10A Full Auto Aircon Module

BLOWER RR 10A Manual Aircon Module

TCU 15A TCU Module

POWER OUTLET 15A Power Outlet Front

SAFETY P/WINDOW 20A Safety Power Window Module

SUNROOF FRT 20A Front Sunroof Motor

SUNROOF RR 20A Rear Sunroof Motor

Maintenance

527

Engine compartment main fuse panel

Description Fuse rating Protected component

ALT 150A/200A Fuse(A/CON, FRT DEICER), Fusible link(FRT HTR, RR HTR, RR HTD, C/FAN, F/FILTER, ABS 1/2),

Generator, E/R fuse & relay box RH

B+ 1 50A Fuse(DR LOCK, FRT FOG LP, B/ALARM, Power connector(AUDIO-1, ROOM LP))

B+ 2 30A Fuse(FUEL LID, P/WDW LH/RH, HAZARD), Multipurpose check connector

B+ 3/RAD FAN 5 40A Fuse(STOP LP, BWS), Radiator fan relay(G4KC)

IG 1 40A Ignition switch(ACC, IG1)

IG 2 40A Ignition switch(IG2, START), Start relay

ECU 3 30A/20A Engine control relay

HEATER FRT 40A Front blower relay

REAR HEATED 40A Rear defogger relay

HEATER RR 40A Rear blower relay

ABS 1 40A ABS control module(G4KC)

ABS 2 40A ABS control module(G4KC)

COOLING FAN 1 30A Condenser fan relay 1

COOLING FAN 2 30A Radiator Fan Motor

FUEL HEATER 30A Fuel filter heater relay(DIESEL)

ECU 4/TCU 10A TCM, ECM (Petrol)

HORN 10A Horn relay

HEATER 20A Fuel fired heater control module(D4CB)

FUEL PUMP 15A Fuel pump relay(G4KC)

ALT 10A Generator(D4BH)

H/LAMP HI 15A Head lamp(HIGH) relay, Head lamp(LOW) relay

A/CON 10A A/C relay

DEICER 15A Windscreen defogger relay (if equipped)

TAIL LAMP LH 10A Head lamp LH(Position lamp), Rear combi lamp LH, License lamp LH

753

Maintenance

Description Fuse rating Protected component

TAIL LAMP RH 10A Head lamp RH(Position lamp), Rear combi lamp RH, License lamp RH

HEAD LAMP LH 10A Head lamp LH

HEAD LAMP RH 10A Head lamp RH

SENSOR 1 10A A/C relay, Condenser fan relay(D4CB), Lambda sensor(D4CB), PTC heater relay #1(D4CB), Stop lamp

switch(D4CB)

SENSOR 2 15A D4CB: Camshaft position sensor, Glow plug relay, EGR actuator, VGT control valve, Immobiliser control module

G4KC: Fuel pump relay, Canister purge solenoid valve, Oil control valve, Crankshaft position sensor,

Oxygen sensor, Immobiliser control module, Idle speed control actuator

IGN COIL 15A Ignition coil #1~#4(G4KC), Condenser(G4KC)

ECU 1 10A ECM(D4CB)

ECU 2 20A ECM(D4CB, G4KC), Injector #1~#4(G4KC)

Engine compartment sub fuse panel (Diesel engine)

Description Fuse rating Protected component

GLOW 80A Glow plug relay

PTC HEATER 1 40A PTC heater relay #1

PTC HEATER 2 40A PTC heater relay #2

PTC HEATER 3 40A PTC heater relay #3

ABS 1 40A ABS/ESC control module

ABS 2 40A ABS/ESC control module

ECU 15A Electronic Control Unit Power

FUEL PUMP 20A Fuel Pump Motor

DCU 1 20A Dosing Control Unit Power 1

DCU 2 20A Dosing Control Unit Power 2

DCU 3 20A Dosing Control Unit Power 3

DCU 60A Dosing Control Unit Main Power

Maintenance

547

LIGHT BULBS

Use only the bulbs of the specified

wattage.

✽

NOTICE

After heavy, driving rain or washing,

headlight and taillight lenses could

appear frosty. This condition is caused

by the temperature difference between

the lamp inside and outside. This is sim-

ilar to the condensation on your win-

dows inside your vehicle during the rain

and doesn’t indicate a problem with

your vehicle. If the water leaks into the

lamp bulb circuitry, we recommend that

the system be checked by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

Headlight, position light, turn sig-

nal light, front fog light bulb

replacement

(1) Headlight (High)

(2) Headlight (Low)

(3) Position light

(4) Front turn signal light

(5) Front fog light (if equipped)

WARNING

- Working on

the lights

Prior to working on the light, firmly

apply the parking brake, ensure

that the ignition switch is turned to

the LOCK position and turn off the

lights to avoid sudden movement

of the vehicle and burning your fin-

gers or receiving an electric shock.

CAUTION

Be sure to replace the burned-out

bulb with one of the same wattage

rating. Otherwise, it may cause

damage to the fuse or electric

wiring system.

CAUTION

If you don’t have necessary tools,

the correct bulbs and the expertise,

we recommend that you consult a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer. In

many cases, it is difficult to replace

vehicle light bulbs because other

parts of the vehicle must be

removed before you can get to the

bulb. This is especially true if you

have to remove the headlight

assembly to get to the bulb(s).

Removing/installing the headlight

assembly can result in damage to

the vehicle.

OTQ076049

755

Maintenance

Headlight bulb

1. Open the bonnet.

2. Remove the headlight bulb cover by

turning it counterclockwise.

3. Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly.

4. Install a new headlight bulb assembly.

5. Install the headlight bulb cover by turn-

ing it clockwise.

✽

NOTICE

We recommend that the headlight aim-

ing be adjusted after an accident or

after the headlight assembly is rein-

stalled at a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer.

(Continued)

• If a bulb becomes damaged or

cracked, replace it immediately

and carefully dispose of it.

• Wear eye protection when chang-

ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool

down before handling it.

OTQ077063 OTQ077062

WARNING -

Halogen bulbs

• Halogen bulbs contain pressur-

ized gas that will produce flying

pieces of glass if broken.

• Always handle them carefully,

and avoid scratches and abra-

sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid

contact with liquids. Never touch

the glass with bare hands.

Residual oil may cause the bulb

to overheat and burst when lit. A

bulb should be operated only

when installed in a headlight.

(Continued)

Maintenance

567

Turn signal light/position light, fog

light bulb (if equipped)

Turn signal light

1. If necessary, remove the headlight

assembly by loosening the headlight

installation bolts. When you remove

the headlight assembly, you may need

to remove the bumper according to the

vehicle.

2. Replace the malfunctioned light bulb.

3. Install the headlight assembly.

Fog light bulb (if equipped)

1. Remove the fog light under cover by

loosening the screw.

2. Replace the malfunctioned light bulb.

3. Install the fog light under cover.

Front fog light bulb (if equipped)

1. Remove the front bumper under cover

(if equipped).

2. Reach your hand into the back of the

front bumper.

3. Disconnect the power connector from

the socket.

4. Remove the bulb-socket from the

housing by turning the socket counter

clockwise until the tabs on the socket

align with the slots on the housing.

5. Install the new bulb-socket into the

housing by aligning the tabs on the

socket with the slots in the housing.

Push the socket into the housing and

turn the socket clockwise.

6. Connect the power connector to the

socket.

7. Reinstall the front bumper under cover

(if equipped).

OTQ073100

757

Maintenance

Position light

1. Open the bonnet.

2. Remove the socket by turning it coun-

terclockwise.

3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.

4. Insert a new bulb in the socket.

5. Install the position light socket.

Side repeater light bulb replace-

ment (if equipped)

1. Remove the light assembly from the

vehicle by prying the lens and pulling

the assembly out.

2. Disconnect the bulb electrical connec-

tor.

3. Separate the socket and the lens parts

by turning the socket counterclockwise

until the tabs on the socket align with

the slots on the lens part.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.

5. Insert a new bulb in the socket.

6. Reassemble the socket and the lens

part.

7. Connect the bulb electrical connector.

8. Reinstall the light assembly to the

body of the vehicle.

OTQ077056OTQ077050

Maintenance

587

Rear combination light bulb

replacement

- Without rear fog light

(1) Tail light

(2) Back-up light

(3) Rear turn signal light

(4) Stop light

- With rear fog light

(1) Tail and stop light

(2) Back-up light

(3) Rear turn signal light

(4) Rear fog light

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Loosen the light assembly retaining

screws with a philips head screwdriver.

3. Remove the rear combination light

assembly from the body of the vehicle.

OTQ077052

OTQ077053

OTQ077051

OTQ077051G

Type B

Type A

759

Maintenance

4. Remove the socket from the assembly

by turning the socket counterclockwise

until the tabs on the socket align with

the slots on the assembly.

5. Remove the bulb from the socket by

pressing it in and rotating it counter-

clockwise until the tabs on the bulb

align with the slots in the socket. Pull

the bulb out of the socket.

6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into

the socket and rotating it until it locks

into place.

7. Install the socket in the assembly by

aligning the tabs on the socket with the

slots in the assembly. Push the socket

into the assembly and turn the socket

clockwise.

8. Reinstall the light assembly to the

body of the vehicle.

High mounted stop light

replacement (if equipped)

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Loosen the light assembly retaining

bolts with a proper tool.

OTQ077054

OTQ077055

OTQ077060G

OTQ077091

Maintenance

607

3. Remove the light assembly from the

body of the vehicle.

4. Separate the socket and the lens parts

by removing the screws with a philips

head screwdriver.

5. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.

6. Insert a new bulb in the socket.

7. Reassemble the socket and the lens

part.

8. Reinstall the light assembly to the

body of the vehicle.

License plate light bulb replace-

ment

1. Loosen the lens retaining screws with

a philips head screwdriver.

2. Remove the lens.

3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.

4. Install a new bulb.

5. Reinstall the lens securely with the

lens retaining screws.

OTQ077092

OEN076039

OTQ077081

OTQ075109

■ Type A

■ Type B

■ Type C

761

Maintenance

Interior light bulb replacement

1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently

pry the lens from the interior light

housing.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight

out.

3. Install a new bulb in the socket.

4. Align the lens tabs with the interior

light housing notches and snap the

lens into place.

WARNING

Prior to working on the Interior

Lights, ensure that the “OFF” but-

ton is depressed to avoid burning

your fingers or receiving an electric

shock.

CAUTION

Use care not to dirty or damage

lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.

OTQ077065

OTQ077065G

OTQ077065L

Type A

Type B

Type C

Maintenance

627

Exterior care

Exterior general caution

It is very important to follow the label

directions when using any chemical

cleaner or polish. Read all warning and

caution statements that appear on the

label.

High-pressure washing

• When using high-pressure washers,

make sure to maintain sufficient dis-

tance from the vehicle.

Insufficient clearance or excessive

pressure can lead to component dam-

age or water penetration.

• Do not spray the camera, sensors or its

surrounding area directly with a high

pressure washer. Shock applied from

high pressure water may cause the

device to not operate normally.

• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to

boots (rubber or plastic covers) or con-

nectors as they may be damaged if

they come into contact with high pres-

sure water.

Finish maintenance

Washing

To help protect your vehicle’s finish from

rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly

and frequently at least once a month with

lukewarm or cold water.

If you use your vehicle for off-road driv-

ing, you should wash it after each off-

road trip. Pay special attention to the

removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt,

mud, and other foreign materials. Make

sure the drain holes in the lower edges of

the doors and rocker panels are kept

clear and clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,

industrial pollution and similar deposits

can damage your vehicle’s finish if not

removed immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain water

may not completely remove all these

deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on

painted surfaces, may be used.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-

oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do

not allow soap to dry on the finish.

APPEARANCE CARE

CAUTION

• Do not use strong soap, chemical

detergents or hot water, and do

not wash the vehicle in direct

sunlight or when the body of the

vehicle is warm.

• Be careful when washing the side

windows of your vehicle.

Especially, with high-pressure

water. Water may leak through the

windows and wet the interior.

• To prevent damage to the plastic

parts and lamps, do not clean

with chemical solvents or strong

detergents.

WARNING - Wet brakes

After washing the vehicle, test the

brakes whilst driving slowly to see

if they have been affected by water.

If braking performance is impaired,

dry the brakes by applying them

lightly whilst maintaining a slow

forward speed.

763

Maintenance

Waxing

Wax the vehicle when water will no

longer bead on the paint.

Always wash and dry the vehicle before

waxing. Use a good quality liquid or

paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s

instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect

it and to maintain its luster.

Removing oil, tar, and similar materials

with a spot remover will usually strip the

wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax

these areas even if the rest of the vehicle

does not yet need waxing.

Finish damage repair

Deep scratches or stone chips in the

painted surface must be repaired

promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust

and may develop into a major repair

expense.

✽

NOTICE

If your vehicle is damaged and requires

any metal repair or replacement, be sure

the body shop applies anti-corrosion

materials to the parts repaired or

replaced.

CAUTION

• Water washing in the engine com-

partment including high pressure

water washing may cause the fail-

ure of electrical circuits located in

the engine compartment.

• Never allow water or other liquids

to come in contact with electri-

cal/electronic components inside

the vehicle as this may damage

them.

OJB037800

CAUTION

• Wiping dust or dirt off the body

with a dry cloth will scratch the

finish.

• Do not use steel wool, abrasive

cleaners, or strong detergents

containing highly alkaline or

caustic agents on chrome-plated

or anodized aluminium parts.This

may result in damage to the pro-

tective coating and cause discol-

oration or paint deterioration.

Maintenance

647

Bright-metal maintenance

• To remove road tar and insects, use a

tar remover, not a scraper or other

sharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal

parts from corrosion, apply a coating of

wax or chrome preservative and rub to

a high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastal

areas, cover the bright metal parts with

a heavier coating of wax or preserva-

tive. If necessary, coat the parts with

non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other

protective compound.

Underbody maintenance

Corrosive materials used for ice and

snow removal and dust control may col-

lect on the underbody. If these materials

are not removed, accelerated rusting can

occur on underbody parts such as the

fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust

system, even though they have been

treated with rust protection.

Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody

and wheel openings with lukewarm or

cold water once a month, after off-road

driving and at the end of each winter. Pay

special attention to these areas because

it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It

will do more harm than good to wet down

the road grime without removing it. The

lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and

frame members have drain holes that

should not be allowed to clog with dirt;

trapped water in these areas can cause

rusting.

WARNING

After washing the vehicle, test the

brakes whilst driving slowly to see

if they have been affected by water.

If braking performance is impaired,

dry the brakes by applying them

lightly whilst maintaining a slow

forward speed.

765

Maintenance

Aluminum wheel maintenance

The aluminum wheels are coated with a

clear protective finish.

• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol-

ishing compound, solvent, or wire

brushes on aluminum wheels. They

may scratch or damage the finish.

• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.

• Use only a mild soap or neutral deter-

gent, and rinse thoroughly with water.

Also, be sure to clean the wheels after

driving on salted roads. This helps pre-

vent corrosion.

• Avoid washing the wheels with high-

speed car wash brushes.

• Do not use any alkaline or acid deter-

gent. It may damage and corrode the

aluminum wheels coated with a clear

protective finish.

Corrosion protection

Protecting your vehicle from corrosion

In using the most advanced design and

construction practices, every HYUNDAI

is built to retain its original factory finish

for many years. However, long term dura-

bility is also greatly dependant upon

maintaining the various protection sys-

tems and coatings used in manufacture

since constant exposure to the elements

will eventually result in their breakdown

and loss of effectiveness. The following

suggestions are made to assist in the

maintenance of the vehicle bodywork.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion

on your car are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is

allowed to accumulate underneath the

car.

• Removal of paint or protective coatings

by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor

scrapes and dents which leave unpro-

tected metal exposed to corrosion.

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your car is

regularly exposed to corrosive materials,

corrosion protection is particularly impor-

tant. Some of the common causes of

accelerated corrosion are road salts,

dust control chemicals, ocean air and

industrial pollution.

Maintenance

667

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which

corrosion is most likely to occur. For

example, corrosion is accelerated by

high humidity, particularly when tempera-

tures are just above freezing. In such

conditions, the corrosive material is kept

in contact with the car surfaces by mois-

ture that is slow to evaporate.

Mud is particularly corrosive because it is

slow to dry and holds moisture in contact

with the vehicle. Although the mud

appears to be dry, it can still retain the

moisture and promote corrosion.

High temperatures can also accelerate

corrosion of parts that are not properly

ventilated so the moisture can be dis-

persed. For all these reasons, it is par-

ticularly important to keep your car clean

and free of mud or accumulations of

other materials. This applies not only to

the visible surfaces but particularly to the

underside of the car.

To help prevent corrosion

You can help prevent corrosion from get-

ting started by observing the following:

Keep your car clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to

keep your car clean and free of corrosive

materials. Attention to the underside of

the car is particularly important.

• If you live in a high-corrosion area —

where road salts are used, near the

ocean, areas with industrial pollution,

acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra

care to prevent corrosion. In winter,

hose off the underside of your car at

least once a month and be sure to

clean the underside thoroughly when

winter is over.

• When cleaning underneath the car,

give particular attention to the compo-

nents under the fenders and other

areas that are hidden from view. Do a

thorough job; just dampening the accu-

mulated mud rather than washing it

away will accelerate corrosion rather

than prevent it. Water under high pres-

sure and steam are particularly effec-

tive in removing accumulated mud and

corrosive materials.

• When cleaning lower door panels,

rocker panels and frame members, be

sure that drain holes are kept open so

that moisture can escape and not be

trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.

Keep your garage dry

Don't park your car in a damp, poorly

ventilated garage. This creates a favor-

able environment for corrosion. This is

particularly true if you wash your car in

the garage or drive it into the garage

when it is still wet or covered with snow,

ice or mud. Even a heated garage can

contribute to corrosion unless it is well

ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

767

Maintenance

Keep paint and trim in good condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should be

covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as

possible to reduce the possibility of cor-

rosion. If bare metal is showing through,

the attention of a qualified body and paint

shop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are high-

ly corrosive and may damage painted

surfaces in just a few hours. Always

remove bird droppings as soon as possi-

ble.

Don't neglect the interior

Moisture can collect under the floor mats

and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check

under the mats periodically to be sure

the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if

you carry fertilisers, cleaning materials or

chemicals in the car.

These should be carried only in proper

containers and any spills or leaks should

be cleaned up, flushed with clean water

and thoroughly dried.

Interior care

Interior general precautions

Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cos-

metic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner and

air freshener from contacting the interior

parts because they may cause damage

or discoloration. If they do contact the

interior parts, wipe them off immediately.

See the instructions that follow for the

proper way to clean vinyl.

Cleaning the upholstery and interior

trim

Vinyl

Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl

with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.

Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Fabric

Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric

with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.

Clean with a mild soap solution recom-

mended for upholstery or carpets.

Remove fresh spots immediately with a

fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not

receive immediate attention, the fabric

can be stained and its colour can be

affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties

can be reduced if the material is not

properly maintained.

CAUTION

Never allow water or other liquids

to come in contact with electrical/

electronic components inside the

vehicle as this may damage them.

CAUTION

When cleaning leather products

(steering wheel, seats etc.), use

neutral detergents or low alcohol

content solutions. If you use high

alcohol content solutions or acid/

alkaline detergents, the colour of

the leather may fade or the surface

may get stripped off.

CAUTION

Using anything but recommended

cleaners and procedures may affect

the fabric’s appearance and fire-

resistant properties.

Maintenance

687

Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt web-

bing

Clean the belt webbing with any mild

soap solution recommended for cleaning

upholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc-

tions provided with the soap. Do not

bleach or re-dye the webbing because

this may weaken it.

Cleaning the interior window glass

If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi-

cle become fogged (that is, covered with

an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should

be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the

directions on the glass cleaner container.

CAUTION

Do not scrape or scratch the inside

of the rear window. This may result

in damage to the rear window

defroster grid.

769

Maintenance

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

The emission control system of your

vehicle is covered by a written limited

warranty. Please see the warranty infor-

mation contained in the Service Passport

in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an emis-

sion control system to meet all applicable

emission regulations.

There are three emission control sys-

tems, as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system

(2) Evaporative emission control system

(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function of

the emission control systems, it is rec-

ommended that you have your car

inspected and maintained by a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer in accor-

dance with the maintenance schedule in

this manual.

Caution for the Inspection and

Maintenance Test (With Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system)

• To prevent the vehicle from misfir-

ing during dynamometer testing,

turn the Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) system off by pressing the

ESC switch.

• After dynamometer testing is com-

pleted, turn the ESC system back on

by pressing the ESC switch again.

1. Crankcase emission control

system

The positive crankcase ventilation sys-

tem is employed to prevent air pollution

caused by blow-by gases being emitted

from the crankcase.This system supplies

fresh filtered air to the crankcase through

the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,

the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,

which then pass through the PCV valve

into the induction system.

2. Evaporative emission control

system

The Evaporative Emission Control

System is designed to prevent fuel

vapours from escaping into the atmos-

phere.

Canister

Fuel vapours generated inside the fuel

tank are absorbed and stored in the

onboard canister. When the engine is

running, the fuel vapours absorbed in the

canister are drawn into the surge tank

through the purge control solenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is con-

trolled by the Engine Control Module

(ECM); when the engine coolant temper-

ature is low during idling, the PCSV clos-

es so that evaporated fuel is not taken

into the engine. After the engine warms-

up during ordinary driving, the PCSV

opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the

engine.

Maintenance

707

3. Exhaust emission control

system

The Exhaust Emission Control System is

a highly effective system which controls

exhaust emissions whilst maintaining

good vehicle performance.

Vehicle modifications

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification of your vehicle could affect

its performance, safety or durability and

may even violate governmental safety

and emissions regulations.

In addition, damage or performance

problems resulting from any modification

may not be covered under warranty.

• If you use unauthorised electronic

devices, it may cause the vehicle to

operate abnormally, wire damage, bat-

tery discharge and fire. For your safety,

do not use unauthorised electronic

devices.

Engine exhaust gas precautions

(carbon monoxide)

• Carbon monoxide can be present with

other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you

smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside

your vehicle, have it inspected and

repaired immediately. If you ever sus-

pect exhaust fumes are coming into

your vehicle, drive it only with all the

windows fully open. Have your vehicle

checked and repaired immediately.

• Do not operate the engine in confined

or closed areas (such as garages) any

more than what is necessary to move

the vehicle in or out of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in an

open area for more than a short time

with the engine running, adjust the

ventilation system (as needed) to draw

outside air into the vehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi-

cle for any extended time with the

engine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails to start,

excessive attempts to restart the

engine may cause damage to the

emission control system.

WARNING - Exhaust

Engine exhaust gases contain car-

bon monoxide (CO). Though

colourless and odourless, it is dan-

gerous and could be lethal if

inhaled. Follow the instructions

following to avoid CO poisoning.

771

Maintenance

Operating precautions for catalytic

converters (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic

converter emission control device.

Therefore, the following precautions

must be observed:

• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for petrol

engines.

• Do not operate the vehicle when there

are signs of engine malfunction, such

as misfire or a noticeable loss of per-

formance.

• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.

Examples of misuse are coasting with

the ignition off and descending steep

grades in gear with the ignition off.

• Do not operate the engine at high idle

speed for extended periods (5 minutes

or more).

• Do not modify or tamper with any part

of the engine or emission control sys-

tem. We recommend that the system

be inspected by a HYUNDAI autho-

rised repairer.

• Avoid driving with a very low fuel level.

If you run out of petrol, it could cause

the engine to misfire and result in

excessive loading of the catalytic con-

verter.

Failure to observe these precautions

could result in damage to the catalytic

converter and to your vehicle.

Additionally, such actions could void your

warranties.

Diesel Particulate Filter (if equipped)

The Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) sys-

tem removes the soot in the exhaust gas.

Unlike a disposable air filter, the DPF

system automatically burns (oxidizes)

and removes the accumulated soot

according to the driving condition. In

other words, the active burning by engine

control system and high exhaust gas

temperature caused by normal/high driv-

ing condition burns and removes the

accumulated soot.

However, if the vehicle continues to be

driven at repeated short distance or driv-

en at low speed for a long time, the accu-

mulate soot may not be automatically

removed because of low exhaust gas

temperature. More than a certain amount

of soot deposited, the malfunction indica-

tor light ( ) illuminates.

When the malfunction indicator light

blinks, it may stop blinking by driving the

vehicle at more than 37 mph (60km/h) or

at more than second gear with 1500 ~

2500 engine rpm for a certain time (for

about 25 minutes).

WARNING - Fire

• A hot exhaust system can ignite

flammable items under your vehi-

cle. Do not park, idle, or drive the

vehicle over or near flammable

objects, such as grass, vegeta-

tion, paper, leaves, etc.

• The exhaust system and catalytic

system are very hot whilst the

engine is running or immediately

after the engine is turned off. Keep

away from the exhaust system

and catalytic, you may get burned.

Also, do not remove the heat sink

around the exhaust system, do

not seal the bottom of the vehicle

or do not coat the vehicle for cor-

rosion control. It may present a

fire risk under certain conditions.

If the malfunction indicator light ( )

continues to be blinked or the warn-

ing massage "check exhaust system"

illuminates in spite of the procedure,

please visit a HYUNDAI authorised

repairer and the check the DPF system.

If you continue to drive with the malfunc-

tion indicator light blinking for a long

time, the DPF system can be damaged

and fuel consumption can be worsen.

Selective Catalytic Reduction

(if equipped)

The Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)

system is to catalytically convert NOx to

Nitrogen and Water by using the reduc-

tion agent, the urea solution.

Urea gauge (if equipped)

The urea solution gauge indicates the

approximate amount of remaining urea

solution inside the urea solution tank.

❈ The urea gauge image pops up, when-

ever the ignition switch is pressed to

the ON position.

CAUTION - Diesel Fuel

(if equipped with DPF)

It is recommended to use the regu-

lated automotive diesel fuel for

diesel vehicle equipped with the

DPF system.

If you use diesel fuel including high

sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur)

and unspecified additives, it can

cause the DPF system to be dam-

aged and white smoke can be emit-

ted.

772

Maintenance

OTQ045316

OTQ045317

■ Type A

■ Type B

773

Maintenance

Low urea warning message

(if equipped)

The lack warning messages of Urea

appear below Urea 3.7 litre. When the

warning message "Low Urea" is dis-

played with SCR warning lamp ( ), the

urea tank needs to be refilled. If not

refilled for a considerable mileage, visual

warning system will escalate the intensi-

ty by displaying the message "Refill

Urea" with SCR warning lamp ( ).

In this case, the tank soon needs to be

refilled. The remaining urea in the tank

approaches to too low level the warning

message "Refill Urea in 000km or vehicle

will not start" with SCR warning lamp

( ). "xxx km(mile)" represents the

remaining travel distance allowed, so do

not continue driving to the limit of the

remaining travel distance without refill-

ing.

Otherwise, the vehicle can't be restarted

once the engine is turned off by ignition

key. Based on the driving pattern, envi-

ronmental condition and road profile, the

deducted remaining mileage may differ

from the actual travel distance.

When "Low Urea" or "Refill Urea" mes-

sage is displayed, add at least 2 litres of

urea. When "Refill Urea in 000km or vehi-

cle will not start" message is displayed,

fill up urea at least 4 litres. When "Refill

Urea tank or vehicle will not start" mes-

sage is displayed with SCR warning lamp

( ), the vehicle can't be restarted once

the engine is turned off by ignition key.

For the above cases, full replenishment

is always recommended.

OTQ045307/OTQ045308/OTQ045309/OTQ045310



Maintenance

747

Malfunction with the SCR system (if equipped)

SCR system has malfunction due to disconnected electrical components, incorrect urea and so on.

"xxx km(mile)" represents the remaining travel distance allowed, so do not continue driving to the limit of the remaining travel dis-

tance without fixing the source of the malfunction. Otherwise, the vehicle can't be restarted once the engine is turned off by igni-

tion key. In this case, we recommend that the system be inspected by a HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

Upon detecting a malfunction

Driving 50 km after detecting

a malfunction

Urea system failure

(= no fuel injection)

Incorrect urea detected

(= abnormal urea)

Abnormal urea-solution

consumption

(= post treatment failure)

OTQ045313

OTQ045311

OTQ045312

OTQ045314

OTQ045315

775

Maintenance

Once the inducement system reached to

final status and disabled the vehicle

restart, it will only be deactivated in case

the urea tank is replenished or the mal-

functions have been rectified. If the vehi-

cle can't be restarted with "Refill Urea

tank or vehicle will not start " message,

refill more than 4 litres urea, wait for min-

utes and try vehicle starting again. If

vehicle starting is not possible regardless

of urea level, we recommend that the

system be inspected by a HYUNDAI

authorised repairer.

No restart

Low urea solution level

Urea system failure

(= no fuel injection)

Incorrect urea detected

(= abnormal urea)

Abnormal urea-solution consumption

(= post treatment failure)

OTQ045310

OTQ045417

OTQ045416

OTQ045417

Clearing the vehicle-restarting restriction (if equipped)

Maintenance

767

Adding the urea solution

To refill the urea solution from the

refill hose

1. Press the ignition switch to the OFF

position.

2. Turn the urea solution tank cap in a

counterclockwise direction to open it.

3. Fully insert the refill hose to add the

ISO 22241-specified urea solution

over 5 litres or above the mark on the

urea solution tank.

❈ Pay the great caution not to add the

urea solution into the fuel tank. If

not, it surely applies adverse impact

on the vehicle performance, causing

various malfunctions.

❈ Never use the urea solution mixture

with additives or water. It may allow

foreign substances to enter the urea

solution tank. If so, it surely applies

adverse impact on the vehicle per-

formance, causing various malfunc-

tions.

❈ Use only the ISO 22241-specified

urea solution. Any unauthorized

urea solution surely applies adverse

impacts on the vehicle performance,

causing various malfunctions.

4. Turn the urea solution tank cap in a

clockwise direction to securely close it.

To refill the urea solution from the

refill bottle

1. Press the ignition switch to the OFF

position

2. Turn the urea solution tank cap in a

counterclockwise direction to open it.

3. Add the ISO 22241-specified urea

solution over 5 litres or above the mark

on the urea solution tank.

❈ Pay the great caution not to add the

urea solution into the fuel tank. If

not, it surely applies adverse impact

on the vehicle performance, causing

various malfunctions.

❈ Pay the great caution not to over-fill

the (completely) fulfilled urea solu-

tion tank by force whilst refilling the

urea solution from the refill bottle.

The over-filled urea solution tank will

be expanded when it becomes

frozen and this can cause a serious

malfunction of the urea solution tank

or urea solution system.

❈ Never use the urea solution mixture

with additives or water. It may allow

foreign substances to enter the urea

solution tank. If so, it surely applies

adverse impact on the vehicle per-

formance, causing various malfunc-

tions.

OTQ045023

777

Maintenance

❈ Use only the ISO 22241-specified

urea solution. Any unauthorized

urea solution surely applies adverse

impacts on the vehicle performance,

causing various malfunctions.

4. Turn the urea solution tank cap in a

clockwise direction to securely close it.

Adding the urea solution: Every approxi-

mately 6,000 km (The urea solution con-

sumption is dependent on the road pro-

file, driving pattern and environmental

condition)

❈ It takes some time to update the clus-

ter gauges after the UREA injection.

(Continued)

• The urea solution system (i.e.

urea solution nozzle, urea solu-

tion pump, and DCU) operates for

approximately 2 minutes more to

eliminate the remaining urea

solution inside, even after the

ignition switch is pressed to the

OFF position. Before the mainte-

nance service, make sure that the

urea solution system is com-

pletely turned OFF.

• The poor urea solution or the

unauthorized liquids may dam-

age the vehicle components,

including the DPF system. Any

unverified additives in the urea

solution may clog the SCR cata-

lyst and cause other malfunc-

tions, which require the expen-

sive DPF system to be replaced.

• When the urea solution contacts

with the eyes or the skin, you

should thoroughly wash the con-

taminated skin area. .

• When you swallow the urea solu-

tion, thoroughly rinse your mouth

and drink a lot of fresh water.Then,

immediately consult a doctor.

(Continued)

WARNING

• Do not apply any external impact

on the DPF system. It may dam-

age the catalyst, which is

equipped inside the DPF system.

• Do not arbitrarily modify or

manipulate the DPF system by

redirecting or lengthen the

exhaust pipe. It may adversely

impact the DPF system.

• Avoid contact with the drained

water from the exhaust pipe. The

water is slightly acid and harmful

to skin. If contacted, thoroughly

wash it.

• Any arbitrary manipulation or

modification of the DPF system

may cause a system malfunction.

The DPF system is controlled by

the complex device.

• Wait for the DPF system to cool

down before the maintenance

service, as it is hot due to the

heat generation. Otherwise, it

may case a skin burn.

• Add only the specified urea solu-

tion, when your vehicle is

equipped with the urea solution

system.

(Continued)

Maintenance

787

Storing the urea solution

• It is improper to store the urea solution

in the containers made with the certain

materials (i.e. aluminum, copper, cop-

per alloy, non-alloyed still, and galva-

nized steel). The urea solution dis-

solves the metal materials, severely

damaging the exhaust purification sys-

tem to be non-repairable.

• Store the urea solution only in the con-

tainers made with the following materi-

als.

(DIN EN 10 088-1-/-2-/-3-specified CR-

Ni steel, Mo-Cr-Ni steel, polypropy-

lene, and polyethylene)

(Continued)

• Store the urea solution tank only

in the well-ventilated locations.

When the urea solution is

exposed to the hot temperature at

approximately 50°C for an extend-

ed period of time (i.e. under the

direct sunlight), the chemical

decomposition may occur, emit-

ting the ammonia vapour.

(Continued)

• When your cloth is contaminated

with the urea solution, immedi-

ately change your cloth.

• When you have an allergic reac-

tion to the urea solution, immedi-

ately consult a doctor.

• Do not allow a child to contact

the urea solution.

• Wipe off any urea solution

spillage with water or cloth. When

the urea solution is crystalized,

wipe it off with the sponge or the

cloth, which is dampened in the

cold water. When the urea solu-

tion spillage is exposed in the air

for an extended period of time, it

is crystalized in white, damaging

the vehicle surface.

• The urea solution is not the fuel

additives. Thus, it should not be

injected to the fuel tank.

Otherwise, it may damage the

engine.

• The urea solution is the aqueous

solution, which is inflammable,

non-toxic, colourless and odour-

less.

(Continued)

779

Maintenance

Urea solution purity

• The following situations may damage

the DPF system.

- Fuels or any unauthorized liquids are

added into the urea solution tank.

- Additives are mixed in the urea solu-

tion.

- Water is added to dilute the urea

solution.

• Use only the ISO 22241- or DIN7007O-

specified urea solution. When any unau-

thorized urea solution is added to the

tank, we recommend you to contact a

HYUNDAI authorised repairer.

• When any unauthorized impurities

enter the urea solution tank, it may

occur the following problems.

- Increased emission

- Malfunction with the DPF system

- Engine failure

Never add the used urea solution, which

is drained from the tank (i.e. whilst main-

taining the vehicle). Its purity cannot be

guaranteed. Always add the new urea

solution.

WARNING

• When opening the urea solution

tank cap at high outside tempera-

tures, ammonia vapours may

escape. Ammonia vapours have a

pungent smell and primarily

cause irritation of the:

- Skin

- Mucous membranes

- Eyes

You may experience a burning

sensation in your eyes, nose and

throat, as well as coughing and

watering of the eyes. Do not

inhale ammonia vapours. Do not

allow urea solution to come in

direct contact with your skin. It is

hazardous to your health. Wash

any affected areas off with plenty

of clean water. If necessary, con-

sult a doctor.

• When handling with urea solution

in closed space, ensure good

ventilation. When the bottle of

urea solution container is

opened, pungent smelling fumes

may escape.

(Continued)

Specific

ation of

the

tandard

urea

solution

Liquid such as diesel, gasoline

and alcohol shall never be used

for SCR system. Any fluid other

than recommended urea solu-

tion (conform to ISO22241 or

DIN70070) can damage SCR

system hardware and deterio-

rate vehicle emission.

Maintenance

807

CAUTION

• If defective urea solution or liquid

that is not recommended is sup-

plied, there may be damage on

the parts of the vehicle such as

processing device. If defective

fuel is used, foreign objects will

be accumulated to SCR catalyst

and cause catalyst pushed away

or breaking.

After adding the incorrect urea

solution, please visit the closest

service centre as early as possi-

ble.

• Liquid that are not recommended

such as diesel, petrol, and alcohol

shall never be used other than the

Hyundai 2016 i800 Car

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Hyundai 2016 I800 Questions and Answers

Related Products

Hyundai 2009 HYUNDAI Accent Car

Hyundai 2016 Hyundai Accent Car

Hyundai 2011 i30 Car

Hyundai 2010 Tucson Car

Hyundai 2017 Elantra Car